WO2021083157A1 - Precoding matrix processing method and communication apparatus - Google Patents

Precoding matrix processing method and communication apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021083157A1
WO2021083157A1 PCT/CN2020/124105 CN2020124105W WO2021083157A1 WO 2021083157 A1 WO2021083157 A1 WO 2021083157A1 CN 2020124105 W CN2020124105 W CN 2020124105W WO 2021083157 A1 WO2021083157 A1 WO 2021083157A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
port
coefficients
terminal device
gain adjustment
codebook
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/124105
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
陈雷
熊鑫
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2021083157A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021083157A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication, and more specifically, to a processing method and communication device of a precoding matrix.
  • Massive MIMO massive multiple-input multiple output
  • network equipment can reduce the interference between multiple terminal devices and the interference between multiple signal streams of the same terminal device through precoding technology . Thereby improving signal quality, realizing space division multiplexing, and improving spectrum utilization.
  • the terminal device may determine a precoding matrix adapted to the downlink channel by means of channel measurement, for example, and hopes that through feedback, the network device obtains a precoding matrix that is the same or similar to the precoding vector determined by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device usually compresses the determined precoding matrix, and feeds back the precoding matrix by feeding back codebook coefficients.
  • the codebook coefficient can be understood as the weight of each port in the precoding matrix.
  • the feedback accuracy of the channel may suffer a certain loss.
  • the loss of feedback accuracy may cause the network equipment to determine the precoding matrix not accurately enough, and cannot adapt well to the downlink channel. Therefore, the transmission performance of the system is affected.
  • the present application provides a processing method and a communication device for a precoding matrix, in order to improve the feedback accuracy, thereby improving the transmission performance of the system.
  • a precoding matrix processing method is provided.
  • the method may be executed by, for example, a terminal device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
  • the method includes: determining the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix; grouping ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain multiple port groups; performing gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups; adjusting the gain
  • the latter codebook coefficients are quantized.
  • the terminal device can perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients before quantizing the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix, so that the codebook coefficients of some ports can be amplified when the energy distribution of the ports differs greatly. , And/or, reduce the codebook coefficients of another part of the ports to reduce the energy distribution difference between the ports, so as to avoid the loss of codebook feedback accuracy of some ports caused by the loss of the codebook coefficients of some ports in the quantization process.
  • the codebook coefficients corresponding to different port groups are adjusted by different gain adjustment coefficients by grouping ports, which is convenient for terminal equipment and network equipment to determine the corresponding relationship between each port and gain adjustment coefficient, which is conducive to the accuracy of network equipment.
  • the method for processing the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improve the transmission performance of the system.
  • the method further includes: sending second information to the network device, where the second information is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficients for use in constructing a precoding matrix; wherein , The quantized codebook coefficients are obtained by quantizing the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
  • the quantized codebook coefficients are obtained by quantizing the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
  • the terminal device may send the quantized codebook coefficients to the network device through the second information, so that the network device can determine the precoding matrix according to the second information.
  • the grouping of ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain multiple port groups includes: receiving first information from a network device, where the first information is used to indicate One or more of the following: the number of port groups, the number of ports contained in each port group in the multiple port groups, and the ports contained in each port group in the multiple port groups; based on the first information, the preset Group the ports corresponding to the coding matrix to obtain multiple port groups.
  • the network device may send the port group configuration to the terminal device through signaling in advance.
  • the terminal device may group the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix according to the first information sent by the network device, or may further combine with predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups.
  • the method further includes: reporting the ports included in each port group of the multiple port groups to the network device.
  • the terminal device can group ports by itself, for example, according to the number of port groups predefined by the protocol and/or the number of ports included in each port group, and predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups.
  • the terminal device may further report the ports included in each group to the network device, so that the network device can subsequently determine the precoding matrix.
  • the multiple codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple ports to perform gain adjustment includes: receiving one or more gain adjustment coefficients from a network device; and according to the one or more The gain adjustment coefficient is used to perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups.
  • the network device may send the gain adjustment coefficient to the terminal device through signaling in advance.
  • the network device may configure one gain adjustment coefficient for each port group, or may send multiple gain adjustment coefficients to the terminal device so that the terminal device can select one or more of them to use. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device may further report the used gain adjustment coefficient to the network device.
  • the performing gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple ports includes: corresponding to multiple port groups based on one or more pre-stored gain adjustment coefficients The codebook coefficients for gain adjustment.
  • the terminal device can select the gain adjustment coefficient by itself, and adjust the gain of the codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups. In this case, since the network device cannot know the gain adjustment coefficient in advance, the terminal device can report the used gain adjustment coefficient to the network device.
  • the method further includes: reporting the one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device.
  • the network device can, in the process of determining the precoding, calculate the quantized codebook coefficient reported by the terminal device according to the gain adjustment coefficient corresponding to each port group (It can be understood that the quantized codebook coefficients reported by the terminal device are codebook coefficients after gain adjustment) are restored to codebook coefficients before gain adjustment, or in other words, restored to codebook coefficients without gain adjustment.
  • a method for processing a precoding matrix is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a network device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
  • the method includes: receiving second information from a terminal device, where the second information is used to indicate quantized codebook coefficients, and the quantized codebook coefficients are codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups in the precoding matrix.
  • the coefficient is obtained after gain adjustment and quantization; according to the second information, the precoding matrix is determined.
  • the terminal device can perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients before quantizing the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix, so that the codebook coefficients of some ports can be amplified when the energy distribution of the ports differs greatly. , And/or, reduce the codebook coefficients of another part of the ports to reduce the energy distribution difference between the ports, so as to avoid the loss of codebook feedback accuracy of some ports caused by the loss of the codebook coefficients of some ports in the quantization process.
  • the codebook coefficients corresponding to different port groups are adjusted by different gain adjustment coefficients by grouping ports, which is convenient for terminal equipment and network equipment to determine the corresponding relationship between each port and gain adjustment coefficient, which is conducive to the accuracy of network equipment.
  • the method for processing the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
  • the method further includes: sending first information to the terminal device, where the first information is used to indicate one or more of the following: the number of port groups, the number of port groups The number of ports contained in each port group, and the ports contained in each port group in multiple port groups.
  • the network device may send the port group configuration to the terminal device through signaling in advance.
  • the terminal device may group the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix according to the first information sent by the network device, or may further combine with predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups.
  • the method further includes: receiving, from the terminal device, an indication of the ports included in each port group of the plurality of port groups.
  • the terminal device can group ports by itself, for example, according to the number of port groups predefined by the protocol and/or the number of ports included in each port group, and predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups.
  • the terminal device may further report the ports included in each group to the network device, so that the network device can subsequently determine the precoding matrix.
  • the method further includes: sending one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the terminal device, where the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used for codes corresponding to the multiple port groups This coefficient is used for gain adjustment.
  • the network device may send the gain adjustment coefficient to the terminal device through signaling in advance.
  • the network device may configure one gain adjustment coefficient for each port group, or may send multiple gain adjustment coefficients to the terminal device so that the terminal device can select one or more of them to use. This application does not limit this.
  • the method further includes: receiving one or more gain adjustment coefficients from the terminal device, and the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used for codes corresponding to the multiple port groups. This coefficient is used for gain adjustment.
  • the terminal device can select the gain adjustment coefficient by itself, and adjust the gain of the codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups. In this case, since the network device cannot know the gain adjustment coefficient in advance, the terminal device can report the used gain adjustment coefficient to the network device.
  • the terminal device may also further report the used gain adjustment coefficient to the network device.
  • a method for processing a precoding matrix is provided.
  • the method may be executed by, for example, a terminal device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
  • the method includes: determining the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix; grouping ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain multiple port groups; respectively performing codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group in the multiple port groups Quantification processing.
  • the terminal device compresses and quantizes the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix separately according to the corresponding port group, and groups ports with similar energy distributions into a group for compression, which can make the port Codebook coefficients with large differences in energy distribution are separated and compressed individually. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the reduction of the codebook feedback accuracy caused by the loss of the codebook coefficients of some ports in the compression process.
  • the network device may determine the precoding matrix according to the relationship between the same port groups and the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group fed back by the terminal device.
  • the precoding matrix recovered by the network device integrates the codebook coefficients of each port, and the loss of the codebook coefficients is less, which is beneficial to the network device to accurately recover the precoding matrix. Therefore, the method for processing the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
  • the method further includes: sending third information to the network device, where the third information is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficients for use in constructing a precoding matrix; wherein ,
  • the quantized codebook coefficient includes the quantized codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group in the multiple port groups, and the quantized codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group in the multiple port groups is
  • the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group in the precoding matrix are obtained by quantization processing; where the first port group is any one of the multiple port groups.
  • the first port group is any one of the plurality of port groups, and should not be limited to the ordering of the plurality of port groups. Assume that the number of port groups is G, G ⁇ 2 and is an integer. Then the first port group may be, for example, any one of the 0th to G-1th in the G port groups.
  • the quantized codebook information indicated by the third information is also the quantized codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group.
  • the terminal device may send the quantized codebook coefficients of each port group to the network device through the third information, so that the network device can determine the precoding matrix according to the third information.
  • the grouping of ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain multiple port groups includes: receiving first information from a network device, where the first information is used to indicate One or more of the following: the number of port groups, the number of ports contained in each port group in the multiple port groups, and the ports contained in each port group in the multiple port groups; based on the first information, the preset Group the ports corresponding to the coding matrix to obtain multiple port groups.
  • the network device may send the port group configuration to the terminal device through signaling in advance.
  • the terminal device may group the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix according to the first information sent by the network device, or may further combine with predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups.
  • the method further includes: reporting the ports included in each port group in the multiple port groups to the network device.
  • the terminal device can group ports by itself, for example, according to the number of port groups predefined by the protocol and/or the number of ports included in each port group, and predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups.
  • the terminal device may further report the ports included in each group to the network device, so that the network device can subsequently determine the precoding matrix.
  • the method further includes: reporting one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device, where the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used to indicate codebooks corresponding to multiple port groups The weight relationship between the coefficients.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device quantizes the codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups, the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group are individually compressed and quantized. However, there is a certain energy difference between the multiple port groups.
  • the terminal device can characterize the energy difference between the port groups through a gain adjustment coefficient, and report it to the network device. Therefore, when restoring the precoding matrix, the network device can perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to each restored port group according to the gain adjustment coefficient, and then determine the precoding matrix.
  • the energy difference between the port groups represented by the gain adjustment coefficient may refer to the weight relationship between the codebook coefficients corresponding to the port groups.
  • the gain adjustment coefficient is only a name, and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
  • a method for processing a precoding matrix is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a network device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
  • the method includes: receiving third information from a terminal device, where the third information is used to indicate quantized codebook coefficients for constructing a precoding matrix; the quantized codebook coefficients include corresponding to multiple ports The quantized codebook coefficients of each port group in the group, corresponding to the quantized codebook coefficients of the first port group in the multiple port groups, are the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group in the precoding matrix. Quantified processing is obtained; wherein, the first port group is any one of the multiple port groups.
  • the first port group is any one of the plurality of port groups, and should not be limited to the ordering of the plurality of port groups. Assume that the number of port groups is G, G ⁇ 2 and is an integer. Then the first port group may be, for example, any one of the 0th to G-1th in the G port groups.
  • the terminal device compresses and quantizes the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix separately according to the corresponding port group, and groups ports with similar energy distributions into a group for compression, which can make the port Codebook coefficients with large differences in energy distribution are separated and compressed individually. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the reduction of the codebook feedback accuracy caused by the loss of the codebook coefficients of some ports in the compression process.
  • the network device may determine the precoding matrix according to the relationship between the same port groups and the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group fed back by the terminal device.
  • the precoding matrix recovered by the network device integrates the codebook coefficients of each port, and the loss of the codebook coefficients is less, which is beneficial to the network device to accurately recover the precoding matrix. Therefore, the method for processing the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
  • the method further includes: sending first information to the terminal device, where the first information is used to indicate one or more of the following: the number of port groups, the number of port groups The number of ports contained in each port group, and the ports contained in each port group in multiple port groups.
  • the network device may send the port group configuration to the terminal device through signaling in advance.
  • the terminal device may group the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix according to the first information sent by the network device, or may further combine with predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups.
  • the method further includes: receiving, from the terminal device, an indication of the ports included in each port group of the plurality of port groups.
  • the terminal device can group ports by itself, for example, according to the number of port groups predefined by the protocol and/or the number of ports included in each port group, and predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups.
  • the terminal device may further report the ports included in each group to the network device, so that the network device can subsequently determine the precoding matrix.
  • the method further includes: receiving one or more gain adjustment coefficients from the terminal device, where the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used to indicate codebooks corresponding to multiple port groups The weight relationship between the coefficients.
  • the terminal device quantizes the codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups
  • the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group are individually compressed and quantized.
  • the terminal device can express the energy difference between the port groups through a gain adjustment coefficient and report it to the network device. Therefore, when restoring the precoding matrix, the network device can perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to each restored port group according to the gain adjustment coefficient, and then determine the precoding matrix.
  • the energy difference between port groups represented by the gain adjustment coefficient may refer to the weight relationship between the codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups.
  • the gain adjustment coefficient is only a name, and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
  • the indication of the ports included in each port group in the multiple port groups includes: a character string; or, a port group division method Or, at least one of the number of ports included in the port group, the first port number, and the last port number.
  • each character in the character string can correspond to a port, and each character can be used to indicate the port group to which the corresponding port belongs.
  • the port group division method may specifically refer to the port numbers of the ports included in each port group.
  • the port group division mode can be selected from a plurality of pre-configured port group division modes, and different port group division modes can be indicated through different identifiers or indexes.
  • a precoding matrix processing method is provided.
  • the method may be executed by, for example, a terminal device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
  • the method includes: determining codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix; performing first quantization processing on the codebook coefficients to obtain first quantization information, where the first quantization information is used to indicate at least one of a plurality of linear superposition coefficients Linear superposition coefficient; wherein, each linear superposition coefficient in the plurality of linear superposition coefficients corresponds to a beam, or, each linear superposition coefficient in the plurality of linear superposition coefficients corresponds to a beam and a frequency domain unit, and Used to construct a precoding matrix; perform second quantization processing on part or all of the linear superimposition coefficients that are not quantized by the first quantization information among the multiple linear superposition coefficients to obtain second quantization information, and the second quantization information is used to indicate the foregoing Part or all of the linear superposition coefficient.
  • the terminal device performs secondary quantization processing on the linear superimposition coefficient, which is equivalent to grouping the linear superimposition coefficients according to the magnitude of energy, and grouping the linear superimposition coefficients with larger energy into a group for compression.
  • the linear superposition coefficients with smaller energy are grouped into another group for compression, and the results of the two compressions are respectively quantized to obtain the first quantized information and the second quantized information.
  • the first quantized information and the second quantized information are obtained through the fourth information.
  • the quantitative information is sent to the network device.
  • the network device can determine the precoding matrix according to the fourth information fed back by the terminal device and the energy relationship between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients.
  • the terminal device feedbacks more linear superposition coefficients, it is possible to avoid a decrease in feedback accuracy caused by the loss of the linear superposition coefficient, which is beneficial to the network device to more accurately recover the precoding matrix. Therefore, the method for processing the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
  • the method further includes: sending fourth information to the network device, where the fourth information includes the first quantization information and the second quantization information.
  • the terminal device can report both sets of linear superposition coefficients to the network device through the first quantization information and the second quantization information, so that the network device can determine the precoding matrix based on more linear superposition coefficients, which is beneficial to the network device Determine the precoding matrix more accurately.
  • the method further includes: reporting one or more or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device, where the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used to indicate that the first quantization information is passed The energy relationship between the indicated linear superimposition coefficient and the linear superimposition coefficient indicated by the second quantization information.
  • the terminal equipment separately compresses and quantizes each set of linear superimposition coefficients when quantizing the two sets of linear superposition coefficients with large energy differences.
  • the energy difference between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients is relatively large, and the terminal device can characterize the energy difference between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients through the gain adjustment coefficient and report it to the network device. Therefore, when restoring the precoding matrix, the network device may first perform normalization processing on the two sets of linear superposition coefficients according to the gain adjustment coefficient, and then determine the precoding matrix.
  • the method further includes: reporting the number of linear superposition coefficients indicated by the second quantization information to the network device.
  • the terminal device can decide by itself which linear superposition coefficients of the linear superposition coefficients not indicated by the first quantization information to perform the second quantization process, and can report the number of linear superposition coefficients subjected to the second quantization process to the network device .
  • the method further includes: receiving fifth information from the network device, where the fifth information is used to indicate the number of linear superimposition coefficients indicated by the second quantization information.
  • the network device may indicate the number of linear superimposition coefficients that the second quantization information can be used to indicate through signaling in advance, that is, limit the number of the second set of linear superimposition coefficients.
  • a method for processing a precoding matrix is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a network device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
  • the method includes: receiving fourth information, the fourth information including first quantization information and second quantization information; the first quantization information is used to indicate at least one linear superimposition coefficient among a plurality of linear superimposition coefficients; wherein, Each linear superposition coefficient in the plurality of linear superposition coefficients corresponds to a beam, or, each linear superposition coefficient in the plurality of linear superposition coefficients corresponds to a beam and a frequency domain unit, so as to construct a precoding matrix
  • the second quantization information is used to indicate part or all of the linear superimposition coefficients that are not quantized by the first quantization information among the plurality of linear superposition coefficients; and the precoding matrix is determined according to the fourth information.
  • the terminal device performs secondary quantization processing on the linear superimposition coefficient, which is equivalent to grouping the linear superimposition coefficients according to the magnitude of energy, and grouping the linear superimposition coefficients with larger energy into a group for compression.
  • the linear superposition coefficients with smaller energy are grouped into another group for compression, and the results of the two compressions are respectively quantized to obtain the first quantized information and the second quantized information.
  • the first quantized information and the second quantized information are obtained through the fourth information.
  • the quantitative information is sent to the network device.
  • the network device can determine the precoding matrix according to the fourth information fed back by the terminal device and the energy relationship between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients.
  • the terminal device feedbacks more linear superposition coefficients, it is possible to avoid a decrease in feedback accuracy caused by the loss of the linear superposition coefficient, which is beneficial to the network device to more accurately recover the precoding matrix. Therefore, the method for processing the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
  • the method further includes: receiving one or more or more gain adjustment coefficients from the terminal device, where the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used to indicate that the first quantization information is passed The energy relationship between the indicated linear superimposition coefficient and the linear superimposition coefficient indicated by the second quantization information.
  • the terminal equipment separately compresses and quantizes each set of linear superimposition coefficients when quantizing the two sets of linear superposition coefficients with large energy differences.
  • the energy difference between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients is relatively large, and the terminal device can characterize the energy difference between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients by the gain adjustment coefficient, and report it to the network device. Therefore, when restoring the precoding matrix, the network device may first perform normalization processing on the two sets of linear superposition coefficients according to the gain adjustment coefficient, and then determine the precoding matrix.
  • the method further includes: receiving the number of linear superposition coefficients indicated by the second quantization information from the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can decide by itself which linear superposition coefficients of the linear superposition coefficients not indicated by the first quantization information to perform the second quantization process, and can report the number of linear superposition coefficients subjected to the second quantization process to the network device .
  • the method further includes: sending fifth information to the terminal device, where the fifth information is used to indicate the number of linear superimposition coefficients indicated by the second quantization information.
  • the network device may indicate the number of linear superimposition coefficients that the second quantization information can be used to indicate through signaling in advance, that is, limit the number of the second set of linear superimposition coefficients.
  • a communication device including various modules or units for executing the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the third aspect, and the fifth aspect.
  • a communication device including various modules or units for executing the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect, the fourth aspect, and the sixth aspect.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the third aspect, and the fifth aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device is a chip configured in a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect, the fourth aspect, and the sixth aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device is a chip configured in a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a processor including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit.
  • the processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • the above-mentioned processor can be one or more chips
  • the input circuit can be an input pin
  • the output circuit can be an output pin
  • the processing circuit can be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits, etc.
  • the input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver
  • the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to the transmitter and transmitted by the transmitter
  • the circuit can be the same circuit, which is used as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
  • a processing device including a processor and a memory.
  • the processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, and can receive signals through a receiver, and transmit signals through a transmitter, so as to execute the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • processors there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
  • the memory can be a non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as a read only memory (ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the setting mode of the memory and the processor.
  • ROM read only memory
  • sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from the processor
  • receiving capability information may be a process of the processor receiving input capability information.
  • the data output by the processor can be output to the transmitter, and the input data received by the processor can come from the receiver.
  • the transmitter and receiver can be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
  • the processing device in the above-mentioned twelfth aspect may be one or more chips.
  • the processor in the processing device can be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the processor may be a logic circuit, integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading the software code stored in the memory, and the memory may Integrated in the processor, can be located outside the processor, and exist independently.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is run, causes the computer to execute the first aspect to The method in any possible implementation of the sixth aspect.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, so that the computer executes the above-mentioned first aspect to The method in any possible implementation of the sixth aspect.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a communication system including the aforementioned network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system suitable for a method for processing a precoding matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIGS. 2 to 4 are schematic flowcharts of a method for processing a precoding matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of performing DFT on a space-frequency matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
  • 5G fifth generation
  • 5G mobile communication system or new wireless access Access technology (new radio Access Technology, NR) or next-generation communications, such as 6G.
  • NSA non-standalone
  • SA standalone
  • the technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to machine type communication (MTC), inter-machine communication long-term evolution technology (Long Term Evolution-machine, LTE-M), and device-to-device (D2D) Network, machine to machine (M2M) network, Internet of things (IoT) network or other networks.
  • MTC machine type communication
  • LTE-M inter-machine communication long-term evolution technology
  • D2D device-to-device
  • M2M machine to machine
  • IoT Internet of things
  • the IoT network may include, for example, the Internet of Vehicles.
  • V2X vehicle to other devices
  • V2X vehicle to other devices
  • V2X vehicle to other devices
  • V2X vehicle to other devices
  • the V2X may include: vehicle to vehicle (V2V) communication, and the vehicle communicates with Infrastructure (vehicle to infrastructure, V2I) communication, vehicle to pedestrian communication (V2P) or vehicle to network (V2N) communication, etc.
  • V2V vehicle to vehicle
  • V2I infrastructure
  • V2P vehicle to pedestrian communication
  • V2N vehicle to network
  • the technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the 6th Generation (6G) mobile communication system. This application does not limit this.
  • 6G 6th Generation
  • the network device may be any device with a wireless transceiver function.
  • This equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC) , Base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) system Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) or transmission and reception point (TRP), etc., can also be 5G, such as NR ,
  • the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU.
  • the gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU).
  • the CU implements some of the functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some of the functions of the gNB.
  • the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implements the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer, and physical (physical, PHY) layer.
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC medium access control
  • PHY physical
  • AAU realizes some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU , Or, sent by DU and AAU.
  • the network device may be a device that includes one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node.
  • the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
  • the network equipment provides services for the cell, and the terminal equipment communicates with the cell through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) allocated by the network equipment, and the cell may belong to a macro base station (for example, a macro eNB or a macro gNB, etc.) , It may also belong to the base station corresponding to the small cell, where the small cell may include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, femto cell, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-speed data transmission services.
  • a macro base station for example, a macro eNB or a macro gNB, etc.
  • the small cell may include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, femto cell, etc.
  • terminal equipment may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, user terminal, Terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device.
  • UE user equipment
  • the terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to the user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on.
  • some examples of terminals can be: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablets (pads), computers with wireless transceiver functions (such as laptops, palmtop computers, etc.), mobile Internet devices (mobile internet devices, MID), virtual reality Virtual reality (VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), and wireless in remote medical (remote medical) Terminals, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, cellular phones, cordless Telephone, session initiation protocol (SIP) telephone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or connection Other processing equipment to wireless modems, in-vehicle equipment, wearable equipment, terminal equipment in the 5G network, or
  • wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which are the general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories.
  • Wearable devices are not only a kind of hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • the terminal device may also be a terminal device in the Internet of Things (IoT) system.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • IoT is an important part of the development of information technology in the future. Its main technical feature is to connect objects to the network through communication technology, so as to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and interconnection of things. IoT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and power-saving terminals through, for example, narrowband NB technology.
  • terminal devices can also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, gas stations, etc.
  • the main functions include collecting data (some terminal devices), receiving control information and downlink data from network devices, and sending electromagnetic waves to transmit uplink data to network devices. .
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 applicable to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 101 in the 5G system shown in FIG. 1; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, as shown in FIG. Terminal equipment 102 to 107.
  • the terminal devices 102 to 107 may be mobile or fixed.
  • the network device 101 and one or more of the terminal devices 102 to 107 can communicate through a wireless link.
  • Each network device can provide communication coverage for a specific geographic area, and can communicate with terminal devices located in the coverage area. For example, the network device may send configuration information to the terminal device, and the terminal device may send uplink data to the network device based on the configuration information; for another example, the network device may send downlink data to the terminal device. Therefore, the network device 101 and the terminal devices 102 to 107 in FIG. 1 constitute a communication system.
  • the terminal devices can communicate directly.
  • D2D technology can be used to realize direct communication between terminal devices.
  • D2D technology can be used for direct communication.
  • the terminal device 106 and the terminal device 107 may communicate with the terminal device 105 individually or at the same time.
  • the terminal devices 105 to 107 may also communicate with the network device 101, respectively. For example, it can directly communicate with the network device 101.
  • the terminal devices 105 and 106 in the figure can directly communicate with the network device 101; it can also communicate with the network device 101 indirectly, as the terminal device 107 in the figure communicates with the network device via the terminal device 106. 101 communication.
  • FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a network device, multiple terminal devices, and communication links between each communication device.
  • the communication system 100 may include multiple network devices, and the coverage of each network device may include other numbers of terminal devices, for example, more or fewer terminal devices. This application does not limit this.
  • Each of the aforementioned communication devices may be configured with multiple antennas.
  • the plurality of antennas may include at least one transmitting antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals.
  • each communication device additionally includes a transmitter chain and a receiver chain.
  • Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that they can all include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as processors, modulators, multiplexers, etc.). , Demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.). Therefore, multiple antenna technology can be used to communicate between network devices and terminal devices.
  • the wireless communication system 100 may also include other network entities such as a network controller and a mobility management entity, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the processing procedure of the downlink signal at the physical layer before transmission may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device.
  • a component such as a chip or a chip system, etc.
  • network devices For the convenience of description, the following are collectively referred to as network devices.
  • Network equipment can process code words on physical channels.
  • the codeword may be coded bits that have been coded (for example, including channel coding).
  • the codeword is scrambling to generate scrambled bits.
  • the scrambled bits undergo modulation mapping (modulation mapping) to obtain modulation symbols.
  • Modulation symbols are mapped to multiple layers, or transmission layers, after layer mapping.
  • the modulation symbols after layer mapping are precoding (precoding) to obtain a precoded signal.
  • the precoded signal is mapped to multiple REs after resource element (resource element, RE) mapping. These REs are then modulated by orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) and then transmitted through an antenna port (antenna port).
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • the sending device (such as network equipment) can process the signal to be sent with the aid of a precoding matrix that matches the channel status when the channel status is known, so that the precoded signal to be sent and the channel Adaptation, thereby reducing the complexity of the receiving device (such as the terminal device) in eliminating the influence between channels. Therefore, through the precoding processing of the signal to be transmitted, the quality of the received signal (for example, the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), etc.) can be improved. Therefore, the use of precoding technology can realize the transmission on the same time-frequency resource between the sending device and multiple receiving devices, that is, the realization of multiple user multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO).
  • MU-MIMO multiple user multiple input multiple output
  • the sending device may also perform precoding in other ways. For example, when channel information (such as but not limited to a channel matrix) cannot be obtained, precoding is performed using a preset precoding matrix or a weighting processing method. For the sake of brevity, its specific content will not be repeated here.
  • Antenna port referred to as port.
  • the antenna port can be understood as a transmitting antenna recognized by the receiving device, or a transmitting antenna that can be distinguished in space.
  • Each antenna port can correspond to a reference signal. Therefore, each antenna port can be called a reference signal port, for example, channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) port, sounding reference signal ( sounding reference signal (SRS) port, etc.
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the terminal device can determine the precoding matrix based on channel measurement.
  • the terminal may determine the channel matrix by means such as channel estimation or based on channel reciprocity.
  • the precoding matrix can be obtained, for example, by performing singular value decomposition (SVD) on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix, or it can also be obtained by performing eigenvalue decomposition (eigenvalue decomposition) on the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. , EVD).
  • SVD singular value decomposition
  • eigenvalue decomposition eigenvalue decomposition
  • EVD eigenvalue decomposition
  • the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device may be referred to as the precoding matrix to be fed back, or in other words, the precoding matrix to be reported.
  • the terminal device may indicate the precoding matrix to be fed back through a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), so that the network device can recover the precoding matrix based on the PMI.
  • PMI precoding matrix indicator
  • the precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the PMI may be the same or similar to the foregoing precoding matrix to be fed back.
  • the network device may determine the precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units based on the feedback of the terminal device.
  • the precoding matrix determined by the network equipment can be directly used for downlink data transmission; it can also undergo some beamforming methods, such as zero forcing (ZF), regularized zero-forcing (RZF), Minimum mean-squared error (MMSE), maximum signal-to-leakage-and-noise (SLNR), etc., to obtain the final precoding matrix for downlink data transmission.
  • ZF zero forcing
  • RZF regularized zero-forcing
  • MMSE Minimum mean-squared error
  • SLNR maximum signal-to-leakage-and-noise
  • the precoding matrix may be, for example, a T ⁇ R-dimensional matrix.
  • T represents the number of antenna ports in a polarization direction
  • R represents the number of transmission layers
  • both T and R are integers greater than or equal to 1.
  • the precoding matrix may be, for example, a 2T ⁇ R-dimensional matrix.
  • Each column in the precoding matrix may correspond to one transmission layer.
  • the T elements in each column represent the weights (or weights) of the T antenna ports. By linearly combining the signals of the T antenna ports, a strong area can be formed in a certain direction of space.
  • the elements in the precoding matrix are referred to as codebook coefficients.
  • Each row in the precoding matrix may correspond to one antenna port.
  • the R elements in each row represent different weights of the same antenna port on the R transmission layers. It can be understood that when the number of transmission layers R is 1, the precoding matrix is a vector of length T, which can also be referred to as a precoding vector.
  • Frequency domain unit a unit of frequency domain resources, which can represent different granularity of frequency domain resources.
  • Frequency domain units may include, but are not limited to, channel quality indicator (CQI) subband, 1/R of CQI subband, resource block (resource block, RB), subcarrier, resource block group ( resource block group, RBG) or precoding resource block group (PRG), etc.
  • CQI channel quality indicator
  • R is a positive integer.
  • the value of R can be 1 or 2, for example.
  • the value of R may be pre-configured by the network device to the terminal device through signaling.
  • the PMI may be used to indicate a precoding matrix corresponding to a frequency domain unit, and the frequency domain unit may also be referred to as a PMI subband.
  • R may represent the ratio of the granularity of the CQI subband to the granularity of the PMI subband.
  • R is 1, the granularity of a CQI subband is the same as the granularity of a PMI subband; when R is 2, the granularity of a CQI subband is twice the granularity of a PMI subband.
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may refer to a precoding matrix determined by performing channel measurement and feedback based on the reference signal on the frequency domain unit.
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit can be used to precode the data subsequently transmitted through the frequency domain unit.
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may also be simply referred to as the precoding matrix of the frequency domain unit.
  • the channel matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may refer to a channel matrix determined by performing channel estimation and feedback based on the reference signal on the frequency domain unit.
  • the channel matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit can be used to determine the precoding matrix used for subsequent data transmission through the frequency domain unit.
  • the channel matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may also be simply referred to as the channel matrix of the frequency domain unit.
  • a subband for example, the above-mentioned PMI subband
  • a frequency domain unit for example, the above-mentioned PMI subband
  • Airspace compression It can refer to the type II (type II) codebook feedback in the version 15 (release 15, R15) (hereinafter referred to as R15) of TS38.214 of the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) standard the way.
  • R15 type II codebook feedback in the version 15 (release 15, R15) (hereinafter referred to as R15) of TS38.214 of the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) standard the way.
  • the terminal can quantize the precoding matrix of each subband (that is, an example of frequency domain unit), and can send the quantized value to the network device through the PMI, so that the network device can follow
  • the PMI determines a precoding matrix that is the same as or similar to the precoding matrix determined by the terminal.
  • the quantization process can be achieved through spatial compression.
  • the so-called spatial compression can specifically mean that the terminal projects the determined precoding matrix of each subband into a space composed of, for example, a DFT basis.
  • the channel is usually sparse, and several sub-bands can be obtained after projection. Strong airspace vector.
  • the precoding matrix of each subband can be approximated by the weighted sum of the above-mentioned several strong spatial vectors.
  • W represents a precoding matrix to be fed back in one transmission layer, one subband, and two polarization directions.
  • W 1 can be fed back through broadband
  • W 2 can be fed back through subbands.
  • v 0 to v 3 are the space vectors included in W 1 , and the plurality of space vectors can be indicated by the index of the combination of the plurality of space vectors, for example.
  • the spatial vectors in the two polarization directions are the same, and the spatial vectors v 0 to v 3 are both used.
  • a 0 to a 7 are the broadband amplitude coefficients included in W 1 , which can be indicated by the quantized value of the broadband amplitude coefficient.
  • c 0 to c 7 are the sub-band coefficients contained in W 2 , and each sub-band coefficient may include a sub-band amplitude coefficient and a sub-band phase coefficient.
  • c 0 to c 7 can respectively include sub-band amplitude coefficients ⁇ 0 to ⁇ 7 and sub-band phase coefficients to The quantized value of the sub-band amplitude coefficient ⁇ 0 to ⁇ 7 and the sub-band phase coefficient can be respectively passed to Quantized value to indicate. It can be seen that the precoding matrix to be fed back can be regarded as a weighted sum of multiple spatial vectors.
  • the feedback overhead of the terminal equipment will also increase.
  • the feedback overhead of a 0 to a 7 and c 0 to c 7 will be at most 4 times that of one transmission layer. That is to say, if the terminal device performs the above-mentioned broadband feedback and subband feedback based on each transmission layer, as the number of transmission layers increases, the feedback overhead caused will increase exponentially. The more the number of subbands, the greater the increase in feedback overhead.
  • TS38.214R16 (hereinafter referred to as R16) proposes a dual-domain compression codebook feedback method.
  • Dual-domain compression It can specifically include compression in the two dimensions of space-domain compression and frequency-domain compression.
  • the terminal can project its determined precoding matrix into a space composed of multiple spatial bases and a space composed of multiple frequency domain bases to obtain several strong spatial vectors and several strong frequency domains. vector.
  • a matrix composed of one or more spatial vectors selected by dual-domain compression is denoted as W 1 , and each column vector in W 1 is a spatial vector.
  • W 1 a matrix composed of one or more spatial vectors selected by dual-domain compression
  • each column vector in W 1 is a spatial vector.
  • L L ⁇ 1 and an integer space vectors
  • the dimension of W 1 may be 2T ⁇ 2L.
  • the same L spatial vectors can be used for the two polarization directions among them, For example, it may be L airspace vectors selected from the set of airspace vectors described above.
  • the matrix composed of one or more frequency domain vectors selected by dual-domain compression is denoted as W 3 , and each column vector in W 3 is a frequency domain vector. If M (M ⁇ 1 and integer) frequency domain vectors are selected, the dimension of W 3 can be N 3 ⁇ M. N 3 represents the number of subbands, and N 3 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the precoding matrix can be obtained by W 1 CW 3 H.
  • C is a 2L ⁇ M-dimensional coefficient matrix.
  • Each element in the coefficient matrix is a linear superposition coefficient, which corresponds to a spatial vector and a frequency vector.
  • the matrix calculated by W 1 CW 3 H is actually a matrix composed of precoding vectors corresponding to different subbands on the same transmission layer. Based on this matrix, the precoding matrix corresponding to each subband can be further determined.
  • the matrix calculated by W 1 CW 3 H is referred to as a space-frequency matrix. If a transmitting antenna with dual polarization directions is used, the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be 2T ⁇ N 3 .
  • the space-frequency matrix will be explained in detail below, and will not be described in detail here.
  • the space-frequency matrix H and W 1 , W 3 shown above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. Based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can perform mathematical transformations on the above-mentioned relationship to obtain other calculation formulas for representing the relationship between the space-frequency matrix H and W 1 , W 3.
  • each row vector in W 3 can correspond to a selected frequency domain vector.
  • the terminal can feed back the selected one or more spatial vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors to the network device when feedback
  • Each sub-band (such as sub-band) feeds back the linear superposition coefficient of the sub-band (for example, including amplitude and phase). Therefore, the feedback overhead can be greatly reduced.
  • the frequency domain vector can represent the change law of the channel in the frequency domain
  • the linear superposition of one or more frequency domain vectors can approximate the change of the channel in the frequency domain. Therefore, a high feedback accuracy can still be maintained, so that the precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can still be better adapted to the channel.
  • Spatial domain vector It is also called beam vector, spatial beam basis vector or spatial domain vector, etc.
  • Each element in the spatial vector can represent the weight of each antenna port. Based on the weight of each antenna port represented by each element in the space vector, the signals of each antenna port are linearly superimposed to form an area with a strong signal in a certain direction in space.
  • the spatial vector is a Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) vector.
  • DFT vector may refer to the vector in the DFT matrix.
  • the spatial vector is a conjugate transpose vector of the DFT vector.
  • the DFT conjugate transpose vector may refer to the column vector in the conjugate transpose matrix of the DFT matrix.
  • the spatial vector is an oversampled DFT vector.
  • the oversampled DFT vector may refer to the vector in the oversampled DFT matrix.
  • the spatial vector is the conjugate transpose vector of the oversampled DFT vector.
  • the airspace vector may be a two-dimensional (2 dimensions, 2D)-DFT vector v defined in a type II (type II) codebook in the NR protocol TS 38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15), for example. l,m .
  • the spatial vector can be a 2D-DFT vector or an oversampled 2D-DFT vector.
  • 2D-DFT vector a detailed description of the 2D-DFT vector is omitted here.
  • the spatial vector is one of the vectors used to construct the precoding matrix.
  • Frequency domain vector also called frequency domain basis vector.
  • the frequency domain vector can be used to represent the vector of the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain.
  • Each frequency domain vector can represent a change law. Since the signal is transmitted through the wireless channel, it can reach the receiving antenna through multiple paths from the transmitting antenna. Multipath time delay causes frequency selective fading, which is the change of frequency domain channel. Therefore, different frequency domain vectors can be used to represent the channel change law in the frequency domain caused by the time delay on different transmission paths.
  • the frequency domain vector may be used to construct a combination of multiple space domain vectors and frequency domain vectors, or simply a space-frequency vector pair, with the above-mentioned spatial domain vector to construct a precoding vector.
  • the frequency domain vector is a DFT vector.
  • the DFT vector may refer to the vector in the DFT matrix.
  • the frequency domain vector is a conjugate transpose vector of the DFT vector.
  • the frequency domain vector is an oversampled DFT vector.
  • the frequency domain vector is the conjugate transpose vector of the oversampled DFT vector.
  • the frequency domain vector is a discrete cosine transform (DCT) vector.
  • DCT discrete cosine transform
  • the frequency domain vector is a conjugate transpose vector of the DCT vector.
  • the frequency domain vector is an oversampled DCT vector.
  • the frequency domain vector is a conjugate transpose vector of the oversampled DCT vector.
  • the frequency domain vector is one of the vectors used to construct the precoding matrix in the feedback mode of dual domain compression.
  • the space-frequency matrix can be understood as an intermediate quantity used to determine the precoding matrix or the channel matrix corresponding to each subband.
  • the space-frequency matrix can be determined by the precoding matrix or the channel matrix corresponding to each subband.
  • the space-frequency matrix can be composed of multiple space-domain vectors and frequency-domain vectors (for example, the product of the conjugate transpose of the space-domain vector and the frequency-domain vector, or the Kronecker of the space-domain vector and the frequency-domain vector). This application includes but is not limited to the weighted sum of the product, etc., to be used to restore the channel matrix or the precoding matrix.
  • the space frequency matrix can be denoted as H, Where w 0 to Is N 3 column vectors corresponding to N 3 subbands, each column vector can be a precoding matrix corresponding to each subband, and the length of each column vector can be N s .
  • the N 3 column vectors respectively correspond to precoding vectors of N 3 subbands. That is, the space-frequency matrix can be regarded as a joint matrix formed by combining the precoding vectors corresponding to N 3 subbands.
  • the terminal performs spatial compression and dual-domain compression on the determined precoding matrix to compress and quantize the precoding matrix.
  • the compression effect is better due to the high correlation between the ports.
  • the compression effect is not ideal due to the poor correlation between the ports. If a similar scheme is sampled for compression and quantization, the feedback accuracy may be affected, resulting in greater performance loss.
  • the present application provides a method in order to improve the feedback accuracy, thereby improving the transmission performance of the system.
  • G Number of port groups, G ⁇ 2 and an integer.
  • T The number of antenna ports in a polarization direction. Therefore, for a dual-polarized antenna, the number of ports is 2T. T ⁇ 1 and is an integer. In the embodiment of the present application, the dimension of the spatial vector is assumed to be 2T ⁇ 1.
  • N 3 The number of subbands in the measurement bandwidth. N 3 ⁇ 1 and is an integer. In the embodiment of the present application, the dimension of the frequency domain vector is assumed to be N 3 .
  • R The rank (rank) fed back by the terminal device based on the channel measurement.
  • the rank fed back by the terminal device based on the channel measurement may be equal to the number of transmission layers.
  • stronger and weaker are introduced for ease of understanding and description.
  • stronger may, for example, mean greater energy, greater power, or greater amplitude
  • weaker for example, may mean less energy, less power, or greater amplitude. It should be understood that these terms are only introduced for ease of understanding and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • DFT discrete Fourier Transform
  • DCT discrete cosine transform
  • DCT discrete cosine transform
  • DCT discrete cosine transform
  • the basis and corresponding methods that can be used for terminal equipment to compress codebook coefficients are not limited to those listed above.
  • a basis can be generated by a sinc function.
  • the base or base calculation method can be predefined.
  • the protocol or the network device can directly define the base corresponding to the number of different ports (that is, the base type such as DCT, DFT, etc. is not explicitly specified).
  • the terminal device can quantify and report based on the corresponding base and base calculation method.
  • used to indicate may include used for direct indication and used for indirect indication.
  • the indication information may directly indicate I or indirectly indicate I, but it does not mean that I must be carried in the indication information.
  • the information indicated by the instruction information is called the information to be indicated.
  • the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated or the information to be indicated. Indicates the index of the information, etc.
  • the information to be indicated can also be indicated indirectly by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance. For example, it is also possible to realize the indication of specific information by means of the pre-arranged order (for example, stipulated in the agreement) of the various information, thereby reducing the indication overhead to a certain extent.
  • the precoding matrix is composed of precoding vectors, and each precoding vector in the precoding matrix may have the same parts in terms of composition or other attributes.
  • the specific instruction manner may also be various existing instruction manners, such as but not limited to the foregoing instruction manners and various combinations thereof.
  • the required indication mode can be selected according to specific needs, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the selected indication mode. In this way, the instruction methods involved in the embodiments of the present application should be understood to cover various methods that enable the party to be instructed to learn the information to be instructed.
  • a row vector can be expressed as a column vector
  • a matrix can be expressed by the transpose matrix of the matrix
  • a matrix can also be expressed in the form of a vector or an array. It can be formed by connecting each row vector or column vector of the matrix, and the Kronecker product of two vectors can also be expressed in the form of the product of one vector and the transposed vector of the other vector.
  • the information to be instructed can be sent together as a whole, or divided into multiple sub-information to be sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information can be the same or different.
  • the specific sending method is not limited in this application.
  • the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to a protocol, or configured by the transmitting end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device.
  • the configuration information may include, but is not limited to, radio resource control signaling, such as radio resource control (RRC) signaling, medium access control (MAC) layer signaling, such as MAC-information Element (control element, CE), and physical layer signaling, such as one or a combination of at least two of downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI).
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC medium access control
  • CE MAC-information Element
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the Z transmission layers may include the 0th transmission layer to the Z-1th transmission layer.
  • the specific implementation is not limited to this, for example, it can also be numbered consecutively starting from 1.
  • the Z transmission layers may include the 1st transmission layer to the Zth transmission layer, and so on.
  • the “protocols” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, for example, may include the LTE protocol, the NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
  • At least one refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
  • And/or describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an “or” relationship.
  • "The following at least one item (a)” or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a).
  • At least one of a, b, and c can mean: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , B, and c.
  • a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
  • the method provided in the embodiments of the present application can be applied to a system that communicates through multi-antenna technology.
  • the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1. The communication system may include at least one network device and at least one terminal device. Multi-antenna technology can be used to communicate between network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the method provided in the embodiments of the present application is not limited to the communication between the network device and the terminal device, and can also be applied to the communication between the terminal device and the terminal device.
  • This application does not limit the application scenarios of this method.
  • the interaction between a network device and a terminal device is taken as an example to describe in detail the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the embodiments shown below do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the method provided by the embodiments of the present application, as long as the program that records the code of the method provided by the embodiments of the present application can be executed according to the present application.
  • the method provided in the application embodiment can be used for communication, for example.
  • the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or the network device that can call and execute the program.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method 200 for processing a precoding matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application from the perspective of device interaction. As shown in FIG. 2, the method 200 may include step 210 to step 260.
  • step 210 the terminal device determines the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix.
  • the terminal device can estimate the downlink channel based on the received reference signal, and determine the precoding matrix based on the estimated channel matrix.
  • Each row in the precoding matrix may correspond to one antenna port, and each column may correspond to one transmission layer.
  • the dimension of the precoding matrix is the number of ports ⁇ the number of transmission layers.
  • the number of ports here may specifically refer to the number of ports on the sending end (such as a network device).
  • the transmitting antenna of the network device is a transmitting antenna with dual polarization directions, so the number of ports can be recorded as 2T.
  • the number of transmission layers can be denoted as R.
  • the dimension of the precoding matrix is 2T ⁇ R. It can be understood that the precoding matrix is a precoding matrix corresponding to a subband.
  • the precoding matrix is denoted as:
  • the first T row corresponds to the first polarization direction
  • each row in the first T row corresponds to the weight of each port in the first polarization direction
  • the last T row corresponds to the second polarization direction
  • the last T row corresponds to the weight of each port in the first polarization direction.
  • Each row in the row may be a weight corresponding to each port in the second polarization direction.
  • each row in the precoding matrix is a codebook coefficient corresponding to one port.
  • step 220 the terminal device groups the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain G port groups.
  • the port group corresponding to the precoding matrix is the aforementioned port corresponding to the codebook coefficient.
  • the precoding matrix listed above is taken as an example, and there are 2T ports corresponding to the precoding matrix.
  • the terminal device can group the 2T ports.
  • the terminal device may group 2T ports based on instructions from the network device or predefined rules to obtain G port groups.
  • step 220 specifically includes:
  • Step 2201 The terminal device receives first information from the network device.
  • the first information is used to indicate one or more of the following: the number of port groups G, the number of ports contained in each port group in the G port groups, and G The ports contained in each port group in the port group; and
  • Step 2202 The terminal device groups the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain G port groups.
  • the network device sends the above-mentioned first information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may group the ports according to the first information sent by the network device.
  • the first information can be understood as the port group configuration sent by the network device to the terminal device.
  • the first information is used to indicate the number of port groups G, and the terminal device can divide the 2T ports corresponding to the precoding matrix into G port groups according to the number of port groups G.
  • the network device may only indicate the port group number G.
  • the terminal device can divide the 2T ports into G port groups according to predefined rules.
  • the rule for the terminal device to group 2T ports may be pre-defined by the protocol; or pre-configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device can determine how the ports are grouped, that is, determine how the port groups are divided.
  • the rule may be, for example, grouping according to the magnitude relationship between the codebook coefficient and the threshold value (for easy distinction and description, for example, the first threshold value).
  • the first threshold value may be, for example, the codebook coefficient (such as amplitude, energy (or power), etc.) corresponding to each port in the space-domain compressed codebook of R15 or the dual-domain compressed codebook of R16, or it may also be It is the wideband amplitude coefficient in the port selection codebook of type II. This application does not limit this.
  • ports whose codebook coefficients (or wideband amplitude coefficients) are greater than or equal to the first threshold value are a group
  • ports whose codebook coefficients (or wideband amplitude coefficients) are greater than or equal to the first threshold value are a group.
  • the terminal device can determine the code of each port according to the average value of the codebook coefficients of the same port in each subband or other statistical values. The relationship between this coefficient and the first threshold value.
  • the specific implementation manner is not limited in this application.
  • the rule may also be, for example, grouping the ports in each polarization direction equally, such as grouping according to the order of port numbers, or grouping according to the magnitude relationship of the codebook coefficients.
  • the network device indicates that the number of port groups G is 2.
  • the terminal device may group ports whose codebook coefficients are greater than or equal to the first threshold value into one group, and group the remaining ports into one group.
  • the first threshold value may be, for example, amplitude, energy (or power), and the like. This application does not limit this.
  • the first threshold value may be, for example, indicated by the network device through signaling, such as indicated by first indication information or other signaling; the first threshold value may also be predefined, such as protocol predefined. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device can evenly group 2T ports.
  • the network device indicates that the number of port groups G is 4.
  • the protocol can predefine the rules for port grouping by terminal devices.
  • the rule may be, for example, that the terminal device may equally divide the ports in the first polarization direction into two groups, and divide the ports in the second polarization direction into two groups.
  • the terminal equipment can be grouped according to the size relationship of the codebook coefficient, for example, the first T/2 ports with larger amplitude or power are grouped together, and the remaining T/2 ports are grouped as One group.
  • the terminal device may also arrange the port numbers in order, such as sorting from largest to smallest or from smallest to largest, grouping the first T/2 ports into a group, and the last T/2 ports into a group.
  • the terminal device can also group the first 2T/3 ports with a larger amplitude or power into one group, and group the remaining T/3 ports into one group. This application does not limit the number of ports included in each port group.
  • the terminal device can group the first port into a group when the number of ports 2T is less than (or less than or equal to) the second threshold. The remaining ports are grouped together.
  • the network devices or terminal devices are grouped according to other port group division methods (such as other division methods provided in this application).
  • the terminal device can also select one of the possible division methods from the multiple possible division methods indicated by the network equipment through signaling in advance, or from the pre-defined multiple possible division methods, and group the selected division methods. Report to the network device.
  • the following two division methods can be defined in the configuration information issued by the protocol or network equipment: 1. Ports with an odd number in the same polarization direction are a group, and ports with an even number in the same polarization direction are one. Group, the ports in different polarization directions are in different groups; 2. The port number in the front half of the port in the same polarization direction is a group, and the port number in the port in the same polarization direction is lower in the group. Half of the ports are in a group, and ports in different polarization directions are in different groups. Then the terminal device selects one of the division methods for use, and reports the adopted division method to the network device.
  • the indication of the port group number G by the first information may be an explicit indication, such as indicating the value of a specific port group number G, or an identifier or index corresponding to the value of the port group number G.
  • the indication of the number G of port groups by the first information may also be an implicit indication.
  • the number of port groups G is determined according to the relationship between the number of ports and the threshold value (for easy distinction and description, for example, the third threshold value).
  • the third threshold value may be one or multiple. This application does not limit this.
  • the third threshold value includes N1 and N2, and N1 ⁇ N2.
  • the number of port groups is G1; when the number of ports 2T>N2 (or 2T ⁇ N2), the number of port groups is G2, G2>G1; when the number of ports 2T ⁇ N1( Or when 2T ⁇ N1), no grouping is performed.
  • the multiple possible port group division manners listed above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the number of port groups G and the specific manner in which the terminal device groups the ports.
  • the terminal device may also group ports with odd port numbers into a group, and group ports with even port numbers into a group, and so on.
  • the first information is used to indicate the number of ports included in each port group.
  • the terminal device may group the 2T ports corresponding to the precoding matrix according to the number of ports included in each port group.
  • the network device may also only indicate the number of ports included in each port group.
  • the terminal device can group the 2T ports according to predefined rules.
  • the number of port groups G can be determined by the terminal device itself, for example, according to the number of ports. For example, in combination with the above example, when the number of ports 2T is less than a certain threshold (for example, the third threshold), the 2T ports are grouped into two groups, that is, G is 2; otherwise, the 2T port groups are divided into four Group, that is, G is 4.
  • a certain threshold for example, the third threshold
  • the number of port groups G may also be predefined.
  • the protocol predefines the number of port groups G, or the protocol predefines a rule for determining the number of port groups G.
  • the terminal device can determine the number of port groups G according to the predefined rule, and then divide the 2T ports into G port groups. Since the above has described in detail the specific method for the terminal device to divide the 2T ports into G port groups in combination with multiple examples, for brevity, it is not repeated here.
  • the first information is used to indicate the number of port groups G and the number of ports included in each port group.
  • the terminal device can divide the 2T ports corresponding to the precoding matrix into G port groups according to the number of port groups and the number of ports included in each port group.
  • the network device can indicate the number of port groups G and the number of ports included in each port group.
  • step 220 specifically includes: the terminal device receives first information from the network device, where the first information is used to indicate the ports included in each port group; the terminal device responds to 2T ports according to the first indication information. Group to obtain G port groups.
  • the network device can directly instruct the terminal device how to group the 2T ports.
  • Network devices can indicate the ports included in each port group in many different ways.
  • the indication of the ports included in each port group by the first information may be a character string.
  • the network device can indicate the ports contained in each port group through a character string.
  • the character string may include 2T bits to correspond to 2T ports. Each bit corresponds to a port.
  • the 2T ports can be arranged in sequence according to a preset rule, for example, according to the order of port numbers from small to large or from large to small.
  • the bit corresponding to each port can be used to indicate the port group to which the port belongs.
  • T is 4, 2T ports are 8 ports.
  • the port numbers of the eight ports are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7, for example.
  • the 8 ports can correspond to the character string "11011101".
  • Port numbers 0, 1, 3, 4, 5, and 7 send ports as a port group, and ports with port numbers 2 and 6 are another port group. It can be seen that while the string is used to indicate the ports included in each port group, it also implicitly indicates the number of port groups G and the number of ports included in each port group.
  • the indication of the ports included in each port group by the first information may be an indication of the way of dividing the port group.
  • the network device can notify the terminal device how to group the 2T ports through an indication corresponding to a certain port group division method.
  • each indication in the table can correspond to a port group division method.
  • the terminal device can group the 2T ports according to the division method.
  • Port group division method 0 [Port a, port b], [port c, port d, port e], [port f, port g] 1 [Port a, port b, port c], [port d, port e], [port f, port g]
  • the network device may indicate at least one of the following through the first information: the number of ports included in each port group, the first port number in each port group, and the last port in each port group. Port numbers.
  • the network device and the terminal device can sort the 2T ports according to the same rule. For example, sort the port numbers in ascending or descending order.
  • This application does not limit the specific rules for this sorting.
  • the ordering method may be negotiated between the two parties, or may also be pre-defined by the agreement, which is not limited in this application.
  • the indication of the ports included in each port group by the first information may be, for example, the number of ports included in each port group and the last port number in each port group.
  • the port numbers of the eight ports can be, for example, eight consecutive port numbers from 0 to 7. If the first information indicates port numbers 0, 4, 6, then it can be determined that the 8 ports can follow the methods of [Port 0], [Port 1 to Port 4], [Port 5 to Port 6], [Port 7] Grouping.
  • the terminal device pre-determined the number of ports as 8, it can be determined that port 7 is separately classified as a port group.
  • the indication of the ports included in each port group by the first information may be, for example, the number of ports in each port group and the first port number.
  • the port numbers of the eight ports can be, for example, eight consecutive port numbers from 0 to 7. If the first information indicates port numbers 0 and 4, and indicates the number of ports in each port group 2, 2.
  • the terminal device can determine that the 8 ports are divided into 2 groups in each polarization direction, and each group includes 2 ports. Terminal devices can be grouped according to [Port 0 and Port 1], [Port 2 and Port 3], [Port 4 and Port 5], [Port 6 and Port 7].
  • the indication of the ports included in each port group by the first information may be, for example, the first port number or the last port number of one of the port groups.
  • the first information may indicate the last port number of the first port group or the first port number of the second port group.
  • the first information indicates that the last port number of the first port group is M1, and the terminal devices can be grouped in the manner of [port 0 to port M1], [port M1+1, port 2T-1].
  • the value of M1 can be less than or equal to 2T-1, or greater than 2T-1. In the case of M1>2T-1, the port numbers exceeding 2T-1 can be counted from port 0.
  • the indication of the ports included in each port group by the first information may be, for example, the first port number and the last port number in each port group.
  • the port numbers of the eight ports can be, for example, eight consecutive port numbers from 0 to 7. If the first information indicates the port numbers (0, 5) and (6, 7), the terminal device can determine that the 8 ports are divided into 2 port groups. Terminal devices can be grouped according to [Port 0 to Port 5], [Port 6 and Port 7].
  • the first information may be carried in high-layer signaling, for example.
  • the high-level signaling may be, for example, an RRC message.
  • the RRC message may specifically be CSI report configuration (CSIReportConfig). That is, the network device may indicate one or more of the following information for each CSI report configuration: the number of port groups G, the number of ports included in each port group, and the ports included in each port group.
  • the first information can be understood as a statically configured port group configuration.
  • the high-level signaling may also be MAC-CE, for example.
  • the MAC-CE may include a cell identity, association information, and the foregoing first information.
  • the associated information is used to indicate the grouping object, or in other words, the configuration object of the first information.
  • the associated information may be, for example, the index of the CSI report configuration.
  • the terminal device may group the ports configured in the CSI reporting configuration associated with the index based on the index of the CSI reporting configuration based on the first information.
  • the first information can be understood as a semi-statically configured port group configuration.
  • the first information may be carried in physical layer signaling.
  • the physical layer signaling may be DCI, for example.
  • the first information can be understood as a dynamically configured port group configuration.
  • the terminal device can group 2T ports by itself to obtain G port groups.
  • the number of port groups G can be predefined, such as protocol predefined.
  • the terminal device can divide 2T ports into G port groups according to predefined rules. The specific process of the terminal device grouping the ports according to the predefined rules has been described in detail above in conjunction with a number of examples. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the number of port groups G can also be determined by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device groups the 2T ports, it can also report the ports included in each port group to the network device.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device reports the ports included in each port group of the G port groups to the network device.
  • the network device receives an indication of the port included in each port group in the G port groups of the terminal device. After the network device receives the report from the terminal device, it can determine G port groups.
  • the indication of the port included in each port group in the G port groups by the terminal device may be, for example, a character string, or an indication of the port group division method, or the number of ports included in the port group, the first port number, and the last port number. At least one of the port numbers. Since the above three indication methods have been combined with the detailed description of the specific manners of the network equipment indicating the ports included in each port group in the G port groups, the terminal equipment has a detailed description of the ports included in each port group in the G port groups. The specific method of instruction is similar to that, for the sake of brevity, it is not repeated here.
  • step 230 the terminal device performs gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the G port groups.
  • the terminal device may perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the G port groups, or perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to one or more port groups in the G port groups, For example, gain adjustment is performed on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the stronger one or more port groups and/or the weaker one or more port groups.
  • the protocol may not specify the configured gain adjustment coefficient to be used for gain adjustment of the codebook coefficient of which port group.
  • the process in which the terminal device adjusts the codebook coefficients is an internal implementation behavior of the device, which can be implemented by pre-configuring different algorithms or rules. This application does not limit the specific implementation manner of gain adjustment on the terminal device.
  • the first port group includes ports: port 0 to port 5; the second port group includes ports including port 6 and port 7.
  • the second port group is weaker.
  • the precoding vector corresponding to one transmission layer and one subband is expressed as: [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 v 6 v 7 ] T.
  • the t-th element corresponds to port t, t can be traversed from 0 to 7, and t is an integer.
  • the t-th v t element can be used to represent the codebook coefficient of port t.
  • the codebook coefficients corresponding to the port and the seventh port are smaller than the codebook coefficients of other ports.
  • ports 6 and 7 are grouped into one port group, that is, the above-mentioned second port group; ports 0 to 5 are grouped into one group, that is, the above-mentioned first port group.
  • the first port group is stronger than the second port group, or in other words, the second port group is weaker than the first port group.
  • the terminal device may use different gain adjustment coefficients to adjust the gain of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the G port groups.
  • the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group can be a gain adjustment coefficient 1
  • the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group can be a gain adjustment coefficient greater than 1, so as to change the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group. This factor is magnified.
  • the gain adjustment coefficient used for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group is ⁇ , ⁇ >1.
  • the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group in the aforementioned precoding vector can be expressed as [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 ⁇ v 6 ⁇ v 7 ] T after gain adjustment.
  • the gain adjustment coefficient 1 is adopted for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group, it can also be understood that only the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group is gain adjusted.
  • the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group may use a gain adjustment coefficient less than 1, and the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group may use a gain adjustment coefficient of 1, so as to change the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group.
  • the codebook coefficient is reduced.
  • the precoding vector can be expressed as [ ⁇ v 0 ⁇ v 1 ⁇ v 2 ⁇ v 3 ⁇ v 4 ⁇ v 5 v 6 v 7 ] T after gain adjustment.
  • the gain adjustment coefficient 1 is adopted for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group, it can also be understood that only the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group is gain adjusted. For another example, a gain adjustment coefficient less than 1 may be used for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group, and a gain adjustment coefficient greater than 1 may be used for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group.
  • the gain adjustment coefficient used for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group is ⁇ , ⁇ 1; the gain adjustment coefficient used for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group is ⁇ , ⁇ >1.
  • the precoding vector can be expressed as [ ⁇ v 0 ⁇ v 1 ⁇ v 2 ⁇ v 3 ⁇ v 4 ⁇ v 5 ⁇ v 6 ⁇ v 7 ] T after gain adjustment.
  • a gain adjustment coefficient less than 1 can also be set.
  • the codebook coefficient can be divided by the gain adjustment coefficient to obtain the port
  • the codebook coefficients of one group are enlarged. For the sake of brevity, I will not illustrate them one by one.
  • the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group is reduced, compared with the codebook coefficient of the second port group, the gap between the codebook coefficients of the two is reduced; the second port group The corresponding codebook coefficients are enlarged, and the gap between the codebook coefficients of the two is reduced compared to the first port group. Therefore, it can be considered that reducing the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group has the same effect as enlarging the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group.
  • each column vector therein is adjusted for gain in the manner described above, and independent grouping and gain can be performed between multiple transmission layers. Adjustment. In other words, the gain adjustment and quantization between multiple transmission layers can be independent of each other. For the sake of brevity, no examples are given here.
  • the gain adjustment coefficient used by the terminal device to adjust the codebook coefficients may be determined by the terminal device itself, or may be notified by the network device through signaling in advance, which is not limited in this application.
  • the network device may send the gain adjustment coefficient to the terminal device through signaling in advance.
  • step 230 specifically includes: the terminal device receives one or more gain adjustment coefficients from the network device; and performs gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the G port groups according to the one or more gain adjustment coefficients.
  • the network device sends one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the terminal device.
  • the gain adjustment coefficient sent by the network device to the terminal device can be one-to-one corresponding to the G port groups; it can also be multiple candidate values of the gain adjustment coefficient, and the terminal device determines which one or more gains to use. Adjust the coefficient, and report the used gain adjustment coefficient to the network device.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device reports the used one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device.
  • the terminal device may pre-store multiple gain adjustment coefficients.
  • both the terminal device and the network device store multiple gain adjustment coefficients in advance.
  • the terminal device can select one or more gain adjustment coefficients from them to adjust the gain of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the G port groups.
  • step 230 specifically includes: the terminal device performs gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the G port groups based on one or more pre-stored gain adjustment coefficients.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device reports the used one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device.
  • the indication of the gain adjustment coefficient may be, for example, an index corresponding to the gain adjustment coefficient.
  • the network device and the terminal device may, for example, pre-store multiple mapping relationships between gain adjustment coefficients and indexes, and the corresponding gain adjustment coefficients can be indicated by indicating the indexes.
  • the following table shows an example of the gain adjustment coefficient and its corresponding index.
  • indicating the gain adjustment coefficient by the index corresponding to the gain adjustment coefficient is only one possible implementation manner, and should not constitute any limitation to the application.
  • the magnitude of the gain adjustment coefficient can also be directly adjusted. This application does not limit the specific indication method of the gain adjustment coefficient.
  • the terminal device may not perform gain adjustment, so there is no need to report the gain adjustment coefficient to the port group.
  • the gain adjustment coefficient is only a name defined for ease of description, and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
  • the gain adjustment coefficient may also be referred to as a scaling coefficient, a correction coefficient, and so on. This application does not limit this.
  • step 240 the terminal device performs quantization processing on the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
  • the terminal device may perform quantization processing based on the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment in step 230.
  • Step 240 will be described in detail below in combination with two different codebook feedback methods.
  • the terminal device can perform spatial compression on the wideband precoding vector on each transmission layer to obtain codebook coefficients that can approximately characterize the precoding vector.
  • the codebook coefficients that can be used to approximate the precoding vector are the quantized codebook coefficients.
  • the precoding vector corresponding to one transmission layer and one subband is taken as an example to illustrate the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group and the process of compressing the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group.
  • the specific form of the precoding vector corresponding to one transmission layer and one subband may be, for example, [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 v 6 v 7 ] T listed above. It should be understood that this is only an example for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to the application.
  • each precoding matrix can include codebook coefficients corresponding to 2T ports. There can be multiple codebook coefficients corresponding to each port, such as R.
  • the gain-adjusted precoding vector obtained after gain adjustment on the wideband precoding vector is [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 ⁇ v 6 ⁇ v 7 ] T.
  • the precoding vector includes codebook coefficients corresponding to 2T ports. Therefore, performing gain adjustment on the precoding vector means performing gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the 2T ports, and the obtained precoding vector after gain adjustment also includes the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
  • the precoding vector after the gain adjustment can be compressed in the space domain.
  • the spatial compression of the gain-adjusted precoding vector can be implemented, for example, by discrete Fourier transform (DFT) or discrete cosine transform (DCT).
  • the terminal device can project the gain-adjusted precoding vector to the spatial DCT base.
  • the first L DCT The vector and its corresponding linear superposition coefficient are used as the quantized codebook coefficient, and the linear superposition coefficient of the L DCT vectors can be reported.
  • the number L of DCT vectors can also be reported.
  • the terminal device can select at least one spatial vector whose total energy proportion does not exceed ⁇ and its corresponding linear superposition coefficient as the quantized code according to the DCT energy limit ⁇ indicated to the network device. This coefficient is reported.
  • the linear superposition coefficient described herein may specifically refer to a broadband amplitude coefficient.
  • the quantized codebook coefficients determined by the terminal device are not limited to the aforementioned at least one spatial vector and its corresponding wideband amplitude coefficient.
  • the terminal device may further determine the subband amplitude coefficient and subband phase coefficient corresponding to each subband through the precoding vector of the subband.
  • the sub-band amplitude coefficient and sub-band phase coefficient corresponding to each sub-band can also be understood as a part of the linear superposition coefficient.
  • the wideband amplitude coefficients involved in the following text can all be understood as a kind of linear superposition coefficient. In the following, for brevity, descriptions of the same or similar situations are omitted.
  • the gain adjustment involved in the embodiments of the present application mainly involves the determination of the broadband spatial vector and the broadband amplitude coefficient. However, it is not ruled out that gain adjustment is performed on the precoding vector of the subband in the process of determining the subband amplitude coefficient and the subband phase coefficient. The specific operation of performing gain adjustment on the precoding vector of the subband is similar to that described above. For brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • DFT and DCT are only a possible implementation for spatial compression of codebook coefficients, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • This application does not limit the specific implementation manner of the terminal device compressing the codebook coefficients.
  • examples are not described here.
  • the specific process of airspace compression described above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to perform spatial compression based on the codebook coefficients in the precoding matrix belongs to the internal implementation behavior of the device, and can be implemented based on different pre-configured algorithms.
  • the terminal device may generate the second information according to the quantization of the codebook coefficients after the gain adjustment.
  • the second information may be used to indicate the codebook coefficients corresponding to the gain adjustment.
  • the terminal device can generate the at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency Indication information of a domain vector, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one subband amplitude coefficient and at least one subband phase coefficient corresponding to each subband.
  • the terminal device may indicate the at least one airspace vector through an index, for example, indicating an index corresponding to each airspace vector, or indicating an index corresponding to a combination of at least one airspace vector; the terminal;
  • the device may also indicate the size of the at least one linear superimposition coefficient through a quantized value.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to indicate the above at least one spatial vector, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one subband amplitude coefficient and at least one subband phase coefficient corresponding to each subband can refer to the prior art, for example, refer to the relevant description in R15 , For the sake of brevity, I will not elaborate here.
  • the terminal device completes the quantization of the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
  • the terminal device can combine the precoding vectors of multiple subbands on the same transmission layer and perform dual-domain compression to obtain a code that can approximately characterize the precoding vectors of the multiple subbands.
  • the codebook coefficients that can be used to approximate the precoding vector are the quantized codebook coefficients.
  • the codebook coefficients that can be used to approximate the precoding vector are the quantized codebook coefficients.
  • the precoding vectors corresponding to one transmission layer and multiple subbands are used to illustrate the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group and the process of compressing the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group.
  • each column in the space-frequency matrix may correspond to a precoding vector of one transmission layer and one sub-band. Therefore, each element in the space-frequency matrix is a codebook coefficient corresponding to a port. More specifically, the t-th row in the space-frequency matrix may be codebook coefficients corresponding to the 3 subbands of ports t and N.
  • the element v t,n represents the codebook coefficient corresponding to port t in the precoding vector corresponding to subband n, t can be traversed from 0 to 7, and n can be traversed from 1 to N 3 -1. Value, and both t and n are integers.
  • the space-frequency matrix after gain adjustment can be obtained as follows:
  • each column in the space-frequency matrix corresponds to a precoding vector of one subband, and each precoding vector includes codebook coefficients corresponding to 2T ports. Therefore, the gain adjustment is performed on the space frequency matrix, that is, the gain adjustment is performed on each codebook coefficient in the space frequency matrix.
  • the obtained space-frequency matrix after gain adjustment also includes the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
  • the space-frequency matrix after the gain adjustment can be compressed in the space domain and the frequency domain respectively.
  • the dual-domain compression of the space-frequency matrix after the gain adjustment can be implemented, for example, by discrete Fourier transform (DFT) or discrete cosine transform (DCT).
  • DFT discrete Fourier transform
  • DCT discrete cosine transform
  • the terminal device can project the space-frequency matrix after gain adjustment to the space-domain DFT base and the frequency-domain DFT base.
  • the terminal device can select L from the spatial DFT base according to the indication of the number of feedbacks to the spatial vector (for example, L) and the indication of the number of feedbacks to the frequency domain vector (for example, M, M ⁇ 1 and an integer). Select M strong frequency-domain vectors from the frequency-domain DFT base.
  • the terminal device determines at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient to be fed back.
  • each linear superposition coefficient can correspond to a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector, and the at least one space-frequency vector, at least one frequency-domain vector and its corresponding linear superposition coefficient can be used to approximate the aforementioned space-frequency matrix.
  • the at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency vector, and one or more linear superposition coefficients obtained by projecting the gain-adjusted space-frequency matrix onto the spatial DFT base and the frequency-domain DFT base are different from those obtained without gain adjustment.
  • At least one spatial vector, at least one frequency vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient obtained by projecting the space-frequency matrix of, onto the spatial DFT base and the frequency domain DFT base are different.
  • DFT and DCT are only a possible implementation for dual-domain compression of codebook coefficients, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • This application does not limit the specific implementation manner of the terminal device compressing the codebook coefficients.
  • R16 for the sake of brevity, no further examples are given here.
  • the specific process of the above-mentioned dual-domain compression is only an example for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the specific way that the terminal device performs dual-domain compression based on the codebook coefficients in the precoding matrix belongs to the internal implementation behavior of the device, and can be implemented based on different pre-configured algorithms.
  • the terminal device may generate the second information according to the quantization of the codebook coefficients after the gain adjustment.
  • the second information may be used to indicate the codebook coefficients corresponding to the gain adjustment.
  • the terminal device can generate the at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient.
  • the indication information of the coefficient can be generated.
  • the terminal device may indicate the at least one spatial domain vector and the at least one frequency domain vector through an index, for example, an index corresponding to each spatial vector or each frequency domain vector, or, The index corresponding to the combination of at least one spatial domain vector, and the index corresponding to the combination of at least one frequency domain vector, etc.; the terminal device may also indicate the size of the at least one linear superposition coefficient through a quantized value, and set the at least one The corresponding relationship between the linear superposition coefficient and the spatial vector and the frequency vector is indicated by a bitmap.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to indicate the above-mentioned at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient can refer to the prior art. For example, refer to the related description in TS38.214 R16. For brevity, it will not be detailed here.
  • the terminal device completes the quantization of the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
  • the gain adjustment coefficient used by the terminal device for gain adjustment of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the same port group may be one or more. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device performs gain processing on all the codebook coefficients corresponding to one port group based on the same gain adjustment coefficient.
  • All the codebook coefficients mentioned here may specifically refer to the codebook coefficients corresponding to the port group and corresponding to multiple subbands included in the measurement bandwidth.
  • the terminal device can adjust the codebook coefficients corresponding to the same port group and different subbands based on different gain adjustment coefficients. Make gain adjustments. For example, for codebook coefficients corresponding to the same port group, the measurement bandwidth can be divided into multiple subband groups, and each subband group can be adjusted based on the same gain adjustment coefficient, and different subband groups can be based on different gains. Adjust the coefficient to adjust the gain.
  • the method further includes step 250: the terminal device sends second information, where the second information is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficients for determining the precoding matrix.
  • the network device receives the second information.
  • the second information may be information contained in PMI, or may be PMI, for example. Further, the second information may be carried in a CSI report, for example.
  • the CSI report can be carried on the physical uplink resource and transmitted to the network device.
  • the physical uplink resource may be, for example, a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) resource or a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) resource. This application does not limit this.
  • the method further includes step 260: the network device determines a precoding matrix according to the second information.
  • the quantized codebook coefficients indicated by the above second information can be used to construct a precoding matrix.
  • the process of constructing the precoding matrix by the network device according to the second information will be described in detail below in combination with the above two feedback methods.
  • the network device can first determine the corresponding at least one spatial vector, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one subband amplitude coefficient corresponding to each subband according to the received second information. And at least one subband phase coefficient. Then, the precoding vector of each subband can be restored according to the corresponding relationship between each linear superposition coefficient and the spatial vector.
  • the codebook coefficients used by the terminal device for compression are gain-adjusted codebook coefficients
  • the codebook coefficients recovered by the network device based on the second information are also the same or similar to the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
  • the network device may further recover the codebook coefficients that have not undergone gain adjustment according to the gain adjustment coefficient.
  • the network equipment needs to determine the gain adjustment coefficient in advance.
  • the gain adjustment coefficients used by the terminal equipment to adjust the codebook coefficients can be indicated by the network equipment in advance through signaling, or the terminal equipment reports to the network equipment, so the network equipment can predetermine G The gain adjustment coefficient of the port group.
  • the network device can restore the codebook coefficients without gain adjustment based on an operation corresponding to the gain adjustment of the terminal device.
  • the codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group is multiplied by the gain adjustment coefficient, and the network device can divide by the gain adjustment coefficient when restoring the codebook coefficient of the port group.
  • the codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group is divided by the gain adjustment coefficient, and the network device can multiply the gain adjustment coefficient when restoring the codebook coefficient corresponding to the port group.
  • the precoding vector can be expressed as [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 ⁇ v 6 ⁇ v 7 ] T after gain adjustment, which is determined by the network device according to the feedback of the second information
  • the codebook coefficient of can be expressed as [v 0 'v 1 ' v 2 'v 3 ' v 4 'v 5 ' ( ⁇ v 6 )'( ⁇ v 7 )'] T. Since the codebook coefficients fed back by the terminal device through the second information are compressed codebook coefficients, the network device determines the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group based on the second information and the codebook coefficients determined by the terminal device measurement. It may be the same or similar. In order to facilitate the distinction, the codebook coefficient determined by the network device and the codebook coefficient determined by the terminal device are distinguished by the superscript "'".
  • the network device may further determine the codebook coefficient without gain adjustment based on the codebook coefficient after the gain adjustment determined by the second information.
  • the codebook coefficients determined by the network device without gain adjustment can be expressed as [v 0 'v 1 ' v 2 'v 3 ' v 4 'v 5 ' ( ⁇ v 6 )'/ ⁇ ( ⁇ v 7 )'/ ⁇ ] T. Therefore, the network device determines the codebook coefficients that have not undergone gain adjustment.
  • the network device can further determine that the precoding vector corresponding to a transmission layer and a subband is among them, Is the normalization coefficient, >0.
  • this application since this application does not limit the specific operation of the terminal device to adjust the gain of the codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group based on the gain adjustment coefficient, this application restores the code corresponding to each port group based on the gain adjustment coefficient for the network device.
  • the specific operation of this coefficient is also not limited.
  • the network device can determine the precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer and each subband. Thereafter, the network device may determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each subband based on the precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer and each subband.
  • the precoding vector corresponding to the rth transmission layer and the nth subband is denoted as w r,n , then the precoding matrix corresponding to the nth subband can be expressed as: among them Is the normalization coefficient,
  • the network device may directly determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each subband according to the codebook coefficients corresponding to each subband on the multiple transmission layers.
  • the process for the network device to determine the precoding matrix based on the second information can refer to the prior art, for example, refer to the related description in R15. For brevity, it will not be detailed here.
  • the network device may first determine the corresponding at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient according to the received second information. Then, the space-frequency matrix is restored according to the correspondence between each linear superposition coefficient and the spatial vector and the frequency domain vector.
  • the space-frequency matrix used by the terminal device for compression is the space-frequency matrix after gain adjustment
  • the space-frequency matrix recovered by the network device based on the second information is also the same or similar to the space-frequency matrix after gain adjustment.
  • the network device may further recover the space-frequency matrix without gain adjustment according to the gain adjustment coefficient.
  • the space-frequency matrix without gain adjustment is the space-frequency matrix determined by the terminal device based on the precoding matrix to be reported.
  • the network equipment needs to determine the gain adjustment coefficient in advance.
  • the gain adjustment coefficients used by the terminal equipment to adjust the codebook coefficients can be indicated by the network equipment in advance through signaling, or the terminal equipment reports to the network equipment, so the network equipment can predetermine G The gain adjustment coefficient of the port group.
  • the network device can restore the space-frequency matrix without gain adjustment based on an operation corresponding to the gain adjustment of the terminal device.
  • the codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group is multiplied by the gain adjustment coefficient, and the network device can divide by the gain adjustment coefficient when restoring the codebook coefficient of the port group.
  • the codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group is divided by the gain adjustment coefficient, and the network device can multiply the gain adjustment coefficient when restoring the codebook coefficient corresponding to the port group.
  • the space frequency matrix after gain adjustment can be expressed as
  • the codebook coefficient determined by the network device according to the feedback of the second information can be expressed as Since the codebook coefficients fed back by the terminal device through the second information are compressed codebook coefficients, the network device determines the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group based on the second information and the codebook determined by the terminal device measurement. The coefficients may be the same or similar. In order to facilitate the distinction, the codebook coefficient determined by the network device and the codebook coefficient determined by the terminal device are distinguished by the superscript "'".
  • the network device may further determine the codebook coefficient after gain adjustment determined by the second information.
  • the codebook coefficients determined by the network equipment without gain adjustment can be expressed as
  • the network device may further determine the precoding vector corresponding to one transmission layer and one subband. For example, the precoding vector corresponding to a transmission layer and the nth subband can be among them, Is the normalization coefficient,
  • this application does not limit the specific operation of the terminal device to adjust the gain of the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group based on the gain adjustment coefficients, this application does not limit the network equipment to recover the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group based on the gain adjustment coefficients.
  • the specific operation is also not limited.
  • the network device can recover the space-frequency matrix without gain adjustment.
  • the network device can recover the precoding vector of each subband according to the space-frequency matrix without gain adjustment, and then determine the precoding matrix of each subband.
  • the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the rth transmission layer is Then the precoding matrix corresponding to the nth subband can be expressed as: Where w r,n represents the precoding vector corresponding to the nth subband of the rth transmission layer; Is the normalization coefficient.
  • the concept of space-frequency matrix is introduced to facilitate understanding.
  • the space-frequency matrix is also determined by multiple precoding vectors, which can be understood as a precoding matrix in the frequency domain.
  • This application does not limit the specific form of the precoding matrix.
  • other names are used to define the same or similar matrix as the space frequency matrix.
  • the network device determines that the precoding matrix belongs to the internal implementation behavior of the device according to the third information, and can be implemented based on different pre-configured algorithms. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the network device determines the precoding matrix according to the third information.
  • the gain adjustment coefficient used by the terminal device for gain adjustment of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the same port group may be one or more. If the terminal device can adjust the gain of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the same port group and different subbands based on different gain adjustment coefficients, when the network device restores the precoding matrix, it also needs to be based on the code corresponding to each subband. This coefficient is a gain adjustment coefficient corresponding to different subbands to restore the precoding vector without gain adjustment.
  • the terminal device performs gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients before quantizing the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix, so that when the energy distribution of the ports differs greatly, the codebook coefficients of some ports can be amplified , And/or, reduce the codebook coefficients of another part of the ports to reduce the energy distribution difference between the ports, so as to avoid the loss of codebook feedback accuracy of some ports caused by the loss of the codebook coefficients of some ports in the quantization process.
  • the network device may obtain the codebook coefficients of each port before the gain adjustment by operating opposite to the terminal device side in the process of restoring the precoding matrix according to the gain adjustment coefficient used for gain adjustment.
  • the codebook coefficients corresponding to different port groups are adjusted by different gain adjustment coefficients by grouping ports, which is convenient for terminal equipment and network equipment to determine the corresponding relationship between each port and gain adjustment coefficient, which is conducive to the accuracy of network equipment.
  • the precoding matrix processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method 300 for processing a precoding matrix provided by another embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 3, the method 300 may include step 310 to step 350.
  • step 310 the terminal device determines the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix.
  • step 320 the terminal device groups the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain G port groups.
  • step 310 and step 320 are the same as the specific processes of step 210 and step 220 in the above method 200, and reference may be made to the related description of step 210 and step 220 above. For the sake of brevity, I will not repeat it here.
  • step 330 the terminal device respectively quantizes the codebook coefficients corresponding to each of the G port groups.
  • the first port group includes ports: port 0 to port 5; the second port group includes ports including port 6 and port 7.
  • the terminal device can separately compress the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group and the codebook coefficients corresponding to the second port group.
  • the corresponding codebook coefficients can be the first six rows of codebook coefficients in the precoding matrix; the second port group includes ports 6 and 7, corresponding to The codebook coefficients may be the last two rows of codebook coefficients in the precoding matrix.
  • the following describes the specific process of respectively compressing the codebook coefficients corresponding to a port group and a second port in combination with different codebook feedback methods.
  • the terminal device can perform spatial compression on the wideband precoding vector on each transmission layer to obtain codebook coefficients that can approximately characterize the precoding vector.
  • the codebook coefficients that can be used to approximate the precoding vector are the quantized codebook coefficients.
  • the precoding vector corresponding to one transmission layer and one subband is taken as an example to illustrate the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group and the process of compressing the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group.
  • the specific form of the precoding vector corresponding to one transmission layer and one subband may be, for example, [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 v 6 v 7 ] T listed above. It should be understood that this is only an example for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to the application.
  • each precoding matrix can include codebook coefficients corresponding to 2T ports. There can be multiple codebook coefficients corresponding to each port, such as R.
  • the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group include v 0 , v 1 , v 2 , v 3 , v 4 , v 5 , Construct a vector [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 ] T ;
  • the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group include v 6 and v 7 , and a vector [v 6 v 7 ] T can be constructed.
  • the vector of codebook coefficient structure corresponding to the first port group is recorded as the first vector
  • the vector of codebook coefficient structure corresponding to the second port group is recorded as the second vector.
  • the terminal device can respectively compress the first vector and the second vector to obtain quantized codebook coefficients.
  • the specific process of the terminal device respectively compressing the first vector and the second vector is similar to the specific process of compressing the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment in the method 200 above. It should be noted that since the number of ports in the first port group and the number of ports in the second port group are not necessarily the same, the dimensions of the first vector and the second vector are not necessarily the same. In the compression process, it is necessary to select the spatial base of the corresponding dimension and compress the codebook coefficients to obtain the quantized codebook coefficients. Since the specific process of airspace compression has been described in detail in the above method 200, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device may generate the third information according to the quantization of the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group.
  • the third information may be used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to each of the G port groups.
  • the terminal device may generate the at least one spatial vector, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one subband amplitude coefficient and subband phase coefficient corresponding to the subband based on the at least one spatial vector, at least one broadband amplitude coefficient obtained by compressing the first vector.
  • Broadband amplitude coefficients and indication information of at least one subband amplitude coefficient and subband phase coefficient corresponding to the subband where the indication information is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group; and may be based on the At least one spatial vector obtained by the two-vector compression, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one subband amplitude coefficient and subband phase coefficient corresponding to the subband indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that it corresponds to the second port group
  • the terminal device may report the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups to the network device in the same signaling.
  • the two indication information may be, for example, two information elements in the same signaling.
  • the above method 200 also exemplifies possible implementations in which the terminal device indicates the above-mentioned at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the terminal device indicates the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups.
  • the terminal device completes the quantization of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups respectively.
  • the terminal device can combine the precoding vectors of multiple subbands on the same transmission layer and perform dual-domain compression to obtain a code that can approximately characterize the precoding vectors of the multiple subbands.
  • the codebook coefficients that can be used to approximate the precoding vector are the quantized codebook coefficients.
  • the precoding vectors corresponding to one transmission layer and multiple subbands are used to illustrate the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group and the process of compressing the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group.
  • the space-frequency matrix corresponding to one transmission layer can be obtained as shown below:
  • the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group include the elements of the first six rows in the space-frequency matrix, and the matrix can be constructed
  • the codebook coefficients corresponding to the second port group include the elements of the last two rows in the space-frequency matrix, and the matrix can be constructed
  • the matrix constructed by the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group is denoted as the first matrix
  • the matrix constructed by the codebook coefficients corresponding to the second port group is denoted as the second matrix.
  • the terminal device may respectively compress the first matrix and the second matrix to obtain quantized codebook coefficients.
  • the specific process of the terminal device respectively compressing the first vector and the second vector is similar to the specific process of compressing the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment in the method 200 above. It should be noted that since the number of ports in the first port group and the number of ports in the second port group are not necessarily the same, the dimensions of the first matrix and the second matrix are not necessarily the same. In the compression process, the spatial base of the corresponding dimension needs to be selected (it is understandable that the dimensions of the first matrix and the second matrix are transformed in the spatial domain, but the dimension in the frequency domain remains unchanged, which is still N 3 -1 ) To compress the codebook coefficients to obtain quantized codebook coefficients. Since the specific process of dual-domain compression has been described in detail in the above method 200, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device may generate the third information according to the quantization of the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group.
  • the third information may be used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to each of the G port groups.
  • the terminal device may generate the at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one spatial domain vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one spatial domain vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient obtained by compressing the first matrix.
  • Indication information of a linear superposition coefficient which is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group; and may be based on at least one spatial vector and at least one frequency domain vector obtained by compressing the second matrix
  • at least one linear superposition coefficient generating indication information for the at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient, where the indication information is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group .
  • the terminal device may report the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups to the network device in the same signaling.
  • the indication information of the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups generated by the terminal device may become the third information, for example.
  • the third information may include, for example, two information elements, which correspond to two port groups respectively.
  • the above method 200 also exemplifies possible implementations in which the terminal device indicates the foregoing at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient. For brevity, it will not be repeated here. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the terminal device indicates the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups.
  • the terminal device completes the quantization of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups respectively.
  • the terminal device can also divide 2T ports into more port groups, and correspond to each port group.
  • the codebook coefficients of are compressed to obtain the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group.
  • the method further includes step 340: the terminal device sends third information, where the third information is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficients for determining the precoding matrix.
  • the network device receives the third information.
  • the third information may be information contained in PMI, or may be PMI, for example. Further, the third information may be carried in a CSI report, for example.
  • the third information and the second information in the above method 200 can be understood as the same type of information. Since the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group in the precoding matrix are quantized differently, the indicated information may also be possible. They are different, so they are distinguished by different names. For the specific process of step 340, reference may be made to the related description of step 250 in the method 200 above, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device reports one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device, and the one or more gain adjustment coefficients may be used to indicate the weight relationship between the codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups.
  • the network device receives the one or more gain adjustment coefficients from the terminal device. Furthermore, the network device may determine the precoding matrix according to the one or more gain adjustment coefficients.
  • the energy difference between the multiple port groups can be characterized by, for example, the weight ratio relationship between the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups, and the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups are different from each other.
  • the proportional relationship between the weights can be represented by one or more of the above-mentioned gain adjustment coefficients.
  • the method further includes step 350: the network device determines a precoding matrix according to the third information.
  • the quantized codebook coefficients indicated by the third information can be used to construct a precoding matrix.
  • the process of determining the precoding matrix by the network device according to the third information will be described in detail in combination with the above two codebook feedback methods.
  • the network device can first determine at least one spatial vector corresponding to the first port group, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one corresponding to each subband according to the received third information. Subband amplitude coefficient and at least one subband phase coefficient, and at least one spatial vector corresponding to the second port group, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one subband amplitude coefficient and at least one subband phase corresponding to each subband coefficient. Then, the codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group can be determined according to the corresponding relationship between each linear superposition coefficient and the space vector, and the precoding vector corresponding to each subband can be constructed according to the order of each port group in the 2T ports.
  • the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group is [v 0 'v 1 '... v 5 '] T , which is composed of at least one spatial vector corresponding to the first port group, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and At least one sub-band amplitude coefficient and at least one sub-band phase coefficient corresponding to each sub-band
  • the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group can be determined to be [v 6 'v 7 '] T , v 7 '.
  • the network device determines the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group based on the third information and the codebook coefficients determined by the terminal device measurement. It may be the same or similar. In order to facilitate the distinction, the codebook coefficient determined by the network device and the codebook coefficient determined by the terminal device are distinguished by the superscript "'".
  • the terminal device may further report one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device to characterize the energy difference between multiple port groups.
  • the terminal device determines that the ratio of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group and the second port group is ⁇ :1
  • the terminal device can report the difference between the first port group and the second port group.
  • the gain adjustment coefficients corresponding to the groups are ⁇ and 1, or the terminal device may only report ⁇ .
  • the specific method for the terminal device to report the gain adjustment coefficient is similar to the specific method for the network device to indicate the gain adjustment coefficient or the specific method for the terminal device to report the gain adjustment coefficient in the above method 200. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the network device may construct a precoding vector corresponding to the subband based on the determined codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group and the gain adjustment coefficient reported by the terminal device. For example, from the above codebook coefficients v 0 ', v 1 ', v 2 ', v 3 ', v 4 ', v 5 'corresponding to the first port group, and the codebook coefficient v corresponding to the second port group 6 ', v 7 ', and the gain adjustment coefficients ⁇ and 1 reported by the terminal equipment, the precoding vector is constructed as follows: among them, Is the normalization coefficient,
  • the network device can determine the precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer and each subband. Thereafter, the network device may determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each subband based on the precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer and each subband.
  • the specific method for the network device to determine the precoding matrix of each subband according to the second information is not limited to the above example.
  • the network device may directly determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each subband according to the codebook coefficients corresponding to each subband on the multiple transmission layers.
  • the process for the network device to determine the precoding matrix based on the second information can refer to the prior art, for example, refer to the related description in R15. For brevity, it will not be detailed here.
  • the network device can first determine at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient corresponding to the first port group according to the received second information, and At least one spatial domain vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient corresponding to the second port group.
  • the network equipment can restore the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group according to the corresponding relationship between the linear superposition coefficients corresponding to each port group and the spatial vector and frequency domain vector; and construct the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group according to the order of each port group in the 2T ports. With the corresponding precoding vector.
  • the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group fed back in R16 can include the codebook coefficients of multiple subbands. Therefore, the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group determined by the network device can include The codebook coefficients corresponding to the port group and N 3 subbands.
  • the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group determined by the network device is The codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group is The gain adjustment coefficients reported by the terminal equipment are ⁇ and 1. Then the network device can determine the precoding vector corresponding to subband 0 The precoding vector corresponding to subband 1 is By analogy, I will not list them all here. among them, Is the normalization coefficient,
  • the network device can determine the precoding vector corresponding to each subband. Then determine the precoding matrix of each subband.
  • the network device can also determine the space-frequency matrix based on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group and the codebook coefficients corresponding to the second port group, and then the space-frequency matrix determines the precoding corresponding to each subband vector.
  • the space-frequency matrix is also determined by multiple precoding vectors, which can be understood as a precoding matrix in the frequency domain.
  • This application does not limit the specific form of the precoding matrix.
  • other names are used to define the same or similar matrix as the space frequency matrix.
  • the network device determines that the precoding matrix belongs to the internal implementation behavior of the device according to the third information, and can be implemented based on different pre-configured algorithms. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the network device determines the precoding matrix according to the third information.
  • the terminal device compresses and quantizes the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix separately according to the corresponding port group, and groups ports with similar energy distributions into a group for compression, which can make the port Codebook coefficients with large differences in energy distribution are separated and compressed individually. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the reduction of the codebook feedback accuracy caused by the loss of the codebook coefficients of some ports in the compression process.
  • the network device may determine the precoding matrix according to the relationship between the same port groups and the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group fed back by the terminal device.
  • the precoding matrix recovered by the network device integrates the codebook coefficients of each port, and the loss of the codebook coefficients is less, which is beneficial to the network device to accurately recover the precoding matrix. Therefore, the precoding matrix processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a method 400 for processing a precoding matrix according to another embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4, the method 400 may include step 410 to step 450.
  • step 410 the terminal device determines the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix.
  • step 410 is the same as the specific process of step 210 in the above method 200, and reference may be made to the related description of step 210 above. For the sake of brevity, I will not repeat it here.
  • step 420 the terminal device performs a first quantization process on the codebook coefficients to obtain first quantization information, where the first quantization information is used to indicate at least one linear superposition coefficient among the multiple linear superposition coefficients.
  • linear superposition coefficients can correspond to beams, that is, to spatial vectors; linear superposition coefficients can also correspond to beams and subbands, that is, to correspond to spatial vectors and frequency domain vectors.
  • the terminal device In order to reduce the feedback overhead, the terminal device usually reports the linear superposition coefficients with higher energy after transformation with higher accuracy, and the linear superposition coefficients with lower energy are reported with lower accuracy or not reported. Therefore, there may still be a certain difference between the precoding matrix restored based on the codebook coefficients compressed by the terminal device and the actual precoding matrix to be reported. In other words, the feedback accuracy is limited.
  • this application proposes a solution for secondary quantization processing, which performs secondary compression on the unreported linear superposition coefficients and reports them.
  • step 430 the terminal device performs a second quantization process on part or all of the linear superimposition coefficients that are not quantized by the first quantization information to obtain second quantization information.
  • the second quantization information is used to indicate some or all of the linear superposition coefficients .
  • the terminal device compresses the codebook coefficients to obtain K linear superimposition coefficients, and the linear superimposition coefficients quantized by the terminal device through the first quantization information are only a part of them, for example, G.
  • K>G ⁇ 1 K>G ⁇ 1
  • both K and G are integers.
  • the terminal device may perform secondary compression on part or all of the K-G linear superimposition coefficients that are not quantized by the first quantization information, so as to report part or all of the K-G linear superimposition coefficients to the network device.
  • step 420 and step 430 in detail in combination with two different codebook feedback methods. It should be understood that the DCT substrate or the spatial DFT substrate exemplified below can be replaced with other substrates, such as a substrate generated by a Sinc function.
  • the terminal device may perform spatial compression on the wideband precoding vector on each transmission layer to obtain codebook coefficients that can approximately characterize the precoding vector.
  • the wideband precoding vector corresponding to a transmission layer can be expressed as [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 v 6 v 7 ] T.
  • the terminal device performs spatial compression on the precoding vector, such as projecting to a spatial DCT base or a spatial DFT base, to obtain at least one spatial vector and its corresponding broadband amplitude coefficient.
  • the specific process of the terminal device performing the first quantization processing on the codebook coefficients may be consistent with the prior art. For the sake of brevity, I will not go into details here.
  • the number of broadband amplitude coefficients reported by the terminal device may be limited.
  • the network device can indicate the maximum number of width and amplitude coefficients reported by the terminal device, or the protocol can predefine the maximum number of width and amplitude coefficients reported by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may discard a part of the broadband amplitude coefficients in the first quantization process. For example, according to the maximum number of broadband amplitude coefficients, one or more broadband amplitude coefficients with lower energy exceeding the maximum number are discarded.
  • the terminal device determines L wideband spatial vectors and L wideband amplitude coefficients based on spatial compression.
  • the maximum number of broadband amplitude coefficients reported by the terminal equipment is H, H ⁇ L.
  • the terminal device can only quantize the H wideband amplitude coefficients with larger energy among the L wideband amplitude coefficients, while the LH wideband amplitude coefficients with smaller energy are not quantized, that is, they fail to pass.
  • the first quantitative information is reported. Therefore, if the network device only determines the precoding vector based on the L spatial vectors and H wideband amplitude coefficients reported in the first quantization information, the determined precoding matrix may be different from the precoding vector that the terminal device actually wants to report. The difference.
  • the terminal device performs the second quantization process on part or all of the wideband amplitude coefficients among the remaining L-H wideband amplitude coefficients.
  • the terminal device performs the second quantization process for some or all of the remaining K-H broadband amplitude coefficients, which may be predefined by the protocol, instructed in advance by the network device, or determined and reported by the terminal device itself. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device performs the second quantization process on J (KH ⁇ J, J is a positive integer) of the remaining KH broadband amplitude coefficients, and assumes that the terminal device performs the second quantization process
  • the number of reported components is I, I ⁇ 1 and is an integer.
  • the terminal device may perform DCT on the J wideband amplitude coefficients to obtain multiple components that can be used to approximate the J wideband amplitude coefficients and their corresponding weighting coefficients through compression.
  • the number of components reported by the terminal device for the second quantization process may be pre-indicated by the network device or predefined by the protocol, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal device can quantize the weighting coefficient of the first I component obtained by DCT compression. In other words, the terminal device can approximately express the aforementioned J wideband amplitude coefficients through the weighted sum of the I components.
  • the I component may be, for example, the first I DCT vector in the DCT base.
  • the terminal device may perform DFT on the J wideband amplitude coefficients to obtain multiple components that can be used to approximate the J wideband amplitude coefficients and their corresponding weighting coefficients through compression.
  • the terminal device can quantize the stronger I components obtained by DFT compression and their corresponding weighting coefficients.
  • the terminal device can approximately express the aforementioned J wideband amplitude coefficients through the weighted sum of the I components.
  • the I component may refer to, for example, I DFT vectors selected from the DFT base.
  • the terminal device can combine the precoding vectors of multiple subbands on the same transmission layer to obtain a space-frequency matrix with a dimension of 2T ⁇ N 3.
  • the terminal device may perform dual-domain compression on the space-frequency matrix to obtain at least one (for example, L) spatial vector, at least one (for example, M) frequency domain vector, and at least one (for example, M) frequency domain vector that can approximately characterize the precoding vectors of the multiple subbands.
  • One (for example, K) linear superposition coefficients One (for example, K) linear superposition coefficients.
  • the weighted sum of the L space-domain vectors and the M frequency-domain vectors can be used to approximately represent the above-mentioned space-frequency matrix.
  • the specific process of the terminal device performing the first quantization processing on the codebook coefficients may be consistent with the prior art. For the sake of brevity, I will not go into details here.
  • the terminal device In the first quantization process, in order to reduce the feedback overhead, the terminal device only quantizes the H linear superimposition coefficients with the larger energy among the K linear superimposition coefficients, while the KH linear superimposition coefficients with the smaller energy do not Quantification, that is, not reporting through the first quantitative information. Therefore, if the network device determines the space-frequency matrix only based on the L space-domain vectors, M frequency-domain vectors, and H linear superimposition coefficients reported by the terminal device through the first quantization process, the determined space-frequency matrix may be the same as the actual terminal device. It is hoped that there are still some differences in the space-frequency matrix reported.
  • the terminal device performs the second quantization process on part or all of the remaining K-H linear superimposition coefficients.
  • the terminal device performs the second quantization process for part or all of the remaining K-H linear superposition coefficients, which may be predefined by the protocol, instructed in advance by the network device, or determined and reported by the terminal device itself.
  • This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device performs the second quantization process on J (K-H ⁇ J, J is a positive integer) linear superimposition coefficients among the remaining K-H linear superimposition coefficients.
  • the terminal device may also remove the H linear superimposition coefficients indicated by the first quantization information from the L ⁇ M (understandably, L ⁇ M ⁇ K) linear superimposition coefficients corresponding to the L spatial domain vectors and the M frequency domain vectors. Part or all of the remaining L ⁇ MH linear superposition coefficients (such as J′, L ⁇ MH ⁇ J′ are positive integers) are subjected to the second quantization process. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device may perform DCT on the J linear superimposition coefficients to obtain multiple components that can be used to approximate the J linear superimposition coefficients and their corresponding weighting coefficients through compression.
  • the number of components reported by the terminal device for the second quantization process may be pre-indicated by the network device or predefined by the protocol, which is not limited in this application. For ease of understanding and explanation, it is assumed here that the number of components reported by the terminal device for the second quantization process is I, and I ⁇ 1 and is an integer.
  • the terminal device can quantize the weighting coefficient of the first I component obtained by DCT compression. In other words, the terminal device can approximately express the aforementioned J linear superposition coefficients through the weighted sum of the I components.
  • the I component may be, for example, the first I DCT vector in the DCT base.
  • the terminal device may perform DFT on the J linear superimposition coefficients to obtain multiple components that can be used to approximately characterize the J linear superimposition coefficients and their corresponding weighting coefficients through compression.
  • the terminal device can quantize the stronger I components obtained by DFT compression and their corresponding weighting coefficients.
  • the terminal device can approximately express the aforementioned J linear superposition coefficients through the weighted sum of the I components.
  • the I component may refer to, for example, I DFT vectors selected from the DFT base.
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of performing DFT on the space-frequency matrix.
  • the space-frequency matrix is compressed in the space, three strong space vectors can be obtained, the three strong space vectors and the two strong frequency vectors.
  • the first quantization process can quantize the four linear superposition coefficients with larger energy
  • the second quantization process can quantize one or two of the other two linear superposition coefficients with smaller energy.
  • the terminal device may further report which components in the K-H correspond to the J components.
  • the reporting method can be character string, port index number, etc. This application does not limit this.
  • FIG. 5 is only an example for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. This application does not limit the specific method of compression and the specific value of each parameter.
  • the number J of linear superimposition coefficients quantized by the second quantization process may be indicated by the network device in advance through signaling, for example.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives fifth information from the network device, where the fifth information is used to indicate the number of linear superposition coefficients quantized by the second quantization information.
  • the network device sends the fifth information to the terminal device.
  • the number J of linear superposition coefficients quantized by the second quantization process may also be determined by the terminal device itself and reported to the network device.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device reports the number of linear superposition coefficients quantized by the second quantization information to the network device.
  • the number J of linear superposition coefficients quantized by the second quantization process may also be predefined by the protocol. This application does not limit this.
  • the number of components (such as I listed above) used to report the remaining part or all of the linear superimposition coefficients (ie, the J linear superimposition coefficients in the remaining KH) can also be indicated by the network device in advance through signaling of.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives sixth information from the network device, where the sixth information is used to indicate the number of components used to report the second quantized information.
  • the terminal device receives the sixth information from the network device.
  • the number of components used for reporting some or all of the linear superposition coefficients may also be determined by the terminal device and reported to the network device.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device reports the number of components used by the second quantized information to the network device.
  • the network device receives an indication of the number of components used for reporting some or all of the linear superposition coefficients from the terminal device.
  • the number of components used to report some or all of the linear superposition coefficients may also be predefined by the protocol. This application does not limit this.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to perform the second quantization processing may be similar to the specific method for the first quantization processing.
  • the specific method of compression by the terminal device is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. Since the specific process of compression performed by the terminal device belongs to the internal implementation of the device, it can be implemented by configuring different algorithms in advance, and this application does not limit the specific method for compressing the terminal device.
  • the terminal device when it performs the second quantization process, it can construct the J linear superposition coefficients in the form of a vector or matrix according to a predefined rule, and then perform compression processing on the constructed vector post matrix. For example, the terminal device may sequentially arrange the spatial vectors and frequency domain vectors corresponding to the J linear superposition coefficients in the L spatial vectors and M frequency domain vectors to obtain a vector of length J.
  • the terminal device can arrange the two linear superposition coefficients in the order of traversing the rows first and then traversing the columns.
  • the linear superposition coefficient in the fourth row and the second column in FIG. 5 is located before the linear superposition coefficient in the fifth row and the third column.
  • the foregoing manner of sequentially arranging the J linear superposition coefficients according to the order of traversing the rows and then traversing the columns may be a predefined rule. However, it should be understood that this is only an example for ease of understanding, and this application does not limit the specific content of the predefined rule.
  • the reason why the terminal device performs the secondary quantization processing is because in the first quantization processing, a part of the linear superposition coefficients with smaller energy are discarded. This is equivalent to dividing the multiple linear superposition coefficients into two groups.
  • the first quantization process performs quantization processing on the first group of linear superposition coefficients
  • the second quantization process performs quantization processing on the second group of linear superposition coefficients.
  • the energy difference between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients is relatively large.
  • the terminal device may report the proportional relationship between the linear superposition coefficients corresponding to the two quantization processes to the network device.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device reports one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device, and the one or more gain adjustment coefficients may be used to indicate the weight relationship between the multiple linear superimposition coefficients.
  • the network device receives the one or more gain adjustment coefficients from the terminal device. Furthermore, the network device can determine the precoding matrix according to the one or more gain adjustment coefficients.
  • step 440 the terminal device sends fourth information, where the fourth information includes the first quantization information and the second quantization information.
  • the network device receives the fourth information.
  • the fourth information may be information contained in PMI, or may be PMI, for example. Further, the fourth information may be carried in a CSI report, for example.
  • the fourth information and the second information in the above method 200 can be understood as the same type of information. Since the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group in the precoding matrix are re-quantized, the indicated information They may also be different, so they are distinguished by different names. For the specific process of step 440, reference may be made to the related description of step 250 in the method 200 above, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • step 450 the network device determines a precoding matrix according to the fourth information.
  • the quantized codebook coefficients indicated by the foregoing fourth information can be used to construct a precoding matrix.
  • the network device may first determine the second set of linear superposition coefficients based on the second quantization information, and determine the first set of linear superposition coefficients based on the first quantization information. Thereafter, the network device may perform normalization processing on the first set of linear superposition coefficients and the second set of linear superposition coefficients based on the gain adjustment coefficient reported by the terminal device. Thereafter, the network device can determine the precoding matrix according to the linear superposition coefficients.
  • the following describes the process of determining the precoding matrix by the network device according to the fourth information in combination with the above two codebook feedback methods.
  • the network device can first determine the first set of linear superimposition coefficients and their corresponding spatial vectors based on the first quantization information, and determine the second set of linear superimposition coefficients based on the second quantization information. Thereafter, the network device may perform normalization processing on the first set of linear superposition coefficients and the second set of linear superposition coefficients based on one or more gain adjustment coefficients reported by the terminal device. Then, the network device can determine the spatial vector corresponding to each linear superposition coefficient in the second set of linear superposition coefficients according to a predefined rule, and thus can determine the pre-determined space vector based on the one-to-one correspondence between each linear superposition coefficient and the space vector. Encoding matrix.
  • the network device can first determine the second set of linear superimposition coefficients based on the second quantization information, and determine the first set of linear superimposition coefficients and their corresponding spatial and frequency domain vectors based on the first quantization information. Thereafter, the network device may perform normalization processing on the first set of linear superposition coefficients and the second linear superposition coefficients based on one or more gain adjustment coefficients reported by the terminal device. Then, the network device can determine the one-to-one correspondence between each linear superposition coefficient and the space vector and frequency domain vector according to the predefined rules, or according to the index of the space vector and the frequency domain vector corresponding to the second linear superposition coefficient reported by the terminal. Relationship, and then the space-frequency matrix can be determined.
  • the specific process of the network device determining the precoding matrix according to the space-frequency matrix has been briefly described above.
  • the specific method for the network device to determine the precoding matrix according to the spatial vector, the frequency domain vector, and the linear superposition coefficient can refer to the prior art, for example, refer to the related description in R16. For brevity, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the space-frequency matrix is also determined by multiple precoding vectors, which can be understood as a precoding matrix in the frequency domain.
  • This application does not limit the specific form of the precoding matrix.
  • other names are used to define the same or similar matrix as the space frequency matrix.
  • the network device determines that the precoding matrix belongs to the internal implementation behavior of the device according to the fourth information, and can be implemented based on different pre-configured algorithms. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the network device determines the precoding matrix according to the fourth information.
  • the terminal device performs secondary quantization processing on the linear superimposition coefficient, which is equivalent to grouping the linear superimposition coefficients according to the magnitude of energy, and grouping the linear superimposition coefficients with larger energy into a group for compression.
  • the linear superposition coefficients with smaller energy are grouped into another group for compression, and the results of the two compressions are respectively quantized to obtain the first quantized information and the second quantized information.
  • the first quantized information and the second quantized information are obtained through the fourth information.
  • the quantitative information is sent to the network device.
  • the network device can determine the precoding matrix according to the fourth information fed back by the terminal device and the energy relationship between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients.
  • the precoding matrix processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
  • the terminal device and/or the network device may perform part or all of the steps in the embodiments. These steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of various operations.
  • each step may be performed in a different order presented in each embodiment, and it may not be necessary to perform all operations in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the size of the sequence number of each step does not mean the order of execution.
  • the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 6 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 600 may include a determination unit 610, a grouping unit 620, a gain adjustment unit 630, and a quantization unit 640.
  • the communication device 600 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal device, or a component (such as a chip or a chip system) configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication device 600 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 600 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the terminal device in the method 200 in FIG. 2.
  • each unit in the communication device 600 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2.
  • the determining unit 610 can be used to perform step 210 in the method 200
  • the grouping unit can be used to perform step 2202 in the method 200
  • the gain adjustment unit can be used in the method 200.
  • the quantization unit 640 can be used to perform step 240 in the method 200.
  • the communication device 600 may further include a transceiving unit 650 for performing step 2201 and step 250 in the method 200.
  • the above-mentioned determining unit 610, grouping unit 620, gain adjusting unit 630, and quantizing unit 640 may all be implemented by at least one processor.
  • it may correspond to the processor 2010 in the terminal device 2000 shown in the figure.
  • the transceiving unit 650 may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 9.
  • the communication device 600 is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device
  • the above-mentioned transceiving unit 620 may be implemented through an input/output interface
  • the determining unit 610, the grouping unit 620, the gain adjustment unit 630, and the quantization unit 640 may be It is realized by the processor, microprocessor or integrated circuit integrated on the chip or chip system.
  • FIG. 7 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 7, the communication device 700 includes a transceiving unit 710 and a determining unit 720.
  • the communication device 600 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device, or a component (such as a chip or a chip system) configured in the network device.
  • the communication device 700 may correspond to the network device in the method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 700 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the network device in the method 200 in FIG. 2.
  • each unit in the communication device 700 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2.
  • the transceiving unit 710 can be used to execute step 250 in the method 200
  • the determining unit 720 can be used to execute step 260 in the method 200.
  • the aforementioned determining unit 710, grouping unit 720, gain adjusting unit 730, and quantizing unit 740 may all be implemented by at least one processor.
  • it may correspond to the processor 2010 in the network device 2000 shown in the figure.
  • the transceiving unit 750 may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the network device 2000 shown in FIG. 10.
  • the above-mentioned transceiving unit 720 may be implemented through an input/output interface, and the determining unit 710, the grouping unit 720, the gain adjusting unit 730, and the quantizing unit 740 may It is realized by the processor, microprocessor or integrated circuit integrated on the chip or chip system.
  • FIG. 8 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1000 may include a processing unit 1100 and a transceiving unit 1200.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal device, or a component (such as a chip or a chip system) configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 300 or the method 400 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a terminal device for executing the method 300 in FIG. 3 or the method 400 in FIG. 4 The unit of the method performed by the device.
  • each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 300 in FIG. 3 or the method 400 in FIG. 4, respectively.
  • the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 310 to 330 in the method 300, and the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute step 340 in the method 300. It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 410 to 430 in the method 400, and the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute step 440 in the method 400. It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG.
  • the processing unit 1100 in 1000 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 2010 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 9.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 can be implemented through an input/output interface, and the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 can be implemented through the Implementation of a processor, microprocessor, or integrated circuit integrated on a chip or chip system.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device, or a component (such as a chip or a chip system) configured in the network device.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network equipment in the method 300 or the method 400 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a network device for executing the method 300 in FIG. 3 or the method 400 in FIG. 4 The unit of the method performed by the device.
  • each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 300 in FIG. 3 or the method 400 in FIG. 4, respectively.
  • the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute step 350 in the method 300
  • the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute step 340 in the method 300. It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the processing unit 1100 may be used to execute step 450 in the method 400
  • the transceiver unit 1200 may be used to execute step 440 in the method 400. It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit in the communication device 1000 can be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it can correspond to the transceiver 3200 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG.
  • the processing unit 1100 in may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 3100 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG. 10.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 can be implemented through an input/output interface, and the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 can be implemented through the Implementation of a processor, microprocessor, or integrated circuit integrated on a chip or chip system.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 2000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the terminal device 2000 includes a processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020.
  • the terminal device 2000 further includes a memory 2030.
  • the processor 2010, the transceiver 2002, and the memory 2030 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control and/or data signals.
  • the memory 2030 is used for storing computer programs, and the processor 2010 is used for downloading from the memory 2030. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 2020 to send and receive signals.
  • the terminal device 2000 may further include an antenna 2040 for transmitting the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 2020 through a wireless signal.
  • the above-mentioned processor 2010 and the memory 2030 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 2010 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 2030 to realize the above-mentioned functions.
  • the memory 2030 may also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010.
  • the processor 2010 may correspond to the determination unit, the grouping unit, the gain adjustment unit, and the quantization unit in FIG. 6, or may also correspond to the processing unit in FIG. 8.
  • the aforementioned transceiver 2020 may correspond to the transceiver unit in FIG. 6 or FIG. 8, and may also be referred to as a transceiver unit.
  • the transceiver 2020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
  • the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 9 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in any one of the method embodiments shown in FIG. 2 to FIG. 4.
  • the operations and/or functions of the various modules in the terminal device 2000 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned processor 2010 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action.
  • the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action.
  • the aforementioned terminal device 2000 may further include a power supply 2050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 2000 may also include one or more of an input unit 2060, a display unit 2070, an audio circuit 2080, a camera 2090, and a sensor 2100.
  • the audio circuit It may also include a speaker 2082, a microphone 2084, and so on.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, for example, it may be a schematic structural diagram of a base station.
  • the base station 3000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network equipment in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the base station 3000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 3100 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also known as distributed unit (DU) )) 3200.
  • RRU 3100 may be called a transceiver unit, which corresponds to the transceiver unit in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8.
  • the transceiver unit 3100 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 3101 and a radio frequency unit 3102.
  • the transceiver unit 3100 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter or transmitting circuit).
  • the RRU 3100 part is mainly used for sending and receiving of radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment.
  • the 3200 part of the BBU is mainly used for baseband processing, control of the base station, and so on.
  • the RRU 3100 and the BBU 3200 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 3200 is the control center of the base station, and can also be called a processing unit. It can correspond to the determining unit in FIG. 7 or the processing unit in FIG. 8. It is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, and modulation. , Spread spectrum and so on.
  • the BBU processing unit
  • the BBU may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information.
  • the BBU 3200 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access standard, or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
  • the BBU 3200 also includes a memory 3201 and a processor 3202.
  • the memory 3201 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 3202 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 3201 and the processor 3202 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 10 can implement various processes involving network devices in any of the method embodiments shown in FIG. 2 to FIG. 4.
  • the operations and/or functions of the various modules in the base station 3000 are respectively for implementing the corresponding procedures in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned BBU 3200 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the network device, and the RRU 3100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • the RRU 3100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 10 is only a possible form of network equipment, and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
  • the method provided in this application can be applied to other types of network equipment.
  • CPE customer premises equipment
  • the CU and/or DU can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiment implemented by the network device, and the AAU can be used to perform the network device described in the previous method embodiment to send to or receive from the terminal device Actions.
  • the AAU can be used to perform the network device described in the previous method embodiment to send to or receive from the terminal device Actions.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute the method in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the aforementioned processing device may be one or more chips.
  • the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central processor unit
  • NP network processor
  • DSP digital signal processing circuit
  • microcontroller unit microcontroller unit
  • MCU programmable logic device
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • each step of the above method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory serial DRAM, SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the steps shown in FIGS. 2 to 4 The method executed by the terminal device or the method executed by the network device in the embodiment is shown.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable medium that stores program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the steps shown in FIGS. 2 to 4 The method executed by the terminal device or the method executed by the network device in the embodiment is shown.
  • the present application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
  • the network equipment in each of the above-mentioned device embodiments corresponds completely to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps.
  • the communication unit executes the receiving or the terminal equipment in the method embodiments.
  • the processing unit executes the functions of specific units, refer to the corresponding method embodiments. Among them, there may be one or more processors.
  • component used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution.
  • the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor.
  • the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components.
  • One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers.
  • these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • the component can be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • each functional unit may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs).
  • programs When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server, or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium, (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk, SSD)) etc.
  • a magnetic medium for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape
  • an optical medium for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)
  • a semiconductor medium for example, a solid state disk, SSD
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disks or optical disks and other media that can store program codes. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Compression, Expansion, Code Conversion, And Decoders (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Cable Transmission Systems, Equalization Of Radio And Reduction Of Echo (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a precoding matrix processing method and a communication apparatus. The method comprises: a terminal device determining codebook coefficients of a precoding matrix; and grouping ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain multiple port groups. By means of grouping the ports, the ports with a relatively large energy difference are allocated to different port groups. The terminal device can use different gain adjustment coefficients to perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups, and perform quantification processing on the codebook coefficients that have been subjected to gain adjustment; or, the terminal device can respectively perform quantification processing on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups, such that a network device determines the precoding matrix according to the quantized codebook coefficients. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the feedback accuracy caused by the loss of the codebook coefficients of some ports with a relatively low energy. Therefore, a relatively high feedback accuracy can be obtained, thereby facilitating an improvement in the transmission performance of a system.

Description

一种预编码矩阵的处理方法和通信装置Processing method and communication device of precoding matrix
本申请要求于2019年10月31日提交中国专利局、申请号为201911053219.7、申请名称为“一种预编码矩阵的处理方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office on October 31, 2019, the application number is 201911053219.7, and the application name is "a processing method and communication device for a precoding matrix", the entire content of which is incorporated by reference In this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种预编码矩阵的处理方法和通信装置。The present application relates to the field of communication, and more specifically, to a processing method and communication device of a precoding matrix.
背景技术Background technique
在大规模多输入多输出(massive multiple-input multiple output,Massive MIMO)技术中,网络设备可以通过预编码技术减小多终端设备之间的干扰以及同一终端设备的多个信号流之间的干扰。从而提高信号质量,实现空分复用,提高频谱利用率。In massive multiple-input multiple output (massive multiple-input multiple output, Massive MIMO) technology, network equipment can reduce the interference between multiple terminal devices and the interference between multiple signal streams of the same terminal device through precoding technology . Thereby improving signal quality, realizing space division multiplexing, and improving spectrum utilization.
终端设备例如可以通过信道测量等方式确定与下行信道相适配的预编码矩阵,并希望通过反馈,使得网络设备获得与终端设备所确定的预编码向量相同或相近的预编码矩阵。为了减小上报开销,终端设备通常对所确定的预编码矩阵进行压缩,通过反馈码本系数的方式来反馈预编码矩阵。该码本系数可以理解为各端口在预编码矩阵中的权值。The terminal device may determine a precoding matrix adapted to the downlink channel by means of channel measurement, for example, and hopes that through feedback, the network device obtains a precoding matrix that is the same or similar to the precoding vector determined by the terminal device. In order to reduce the reporting overhead, the terminal device usually compresses the determined precoding matrix, and feeds back the precoding matrix by feeding back codebook coefficients. The codebook coefficient can be understood as the weight of each port in the precoding matrix.
然而,为了保证压缩效率,信道的反馈精度可能会有一定的损失。反馈精度的损失可能会造成网络设备对预编码矩阵的确定不够精准,不能够与下行信道很好地适配。因此,系统的传输性能受到影响。However, in order to ensure the compression efficiency, the feedback accuracy of the channel may suffer a certain loss. The loss of feedback accuracy may cause the network equipment to determine the precoding matrix not accurately enough, and cannot adapt well to the downlink channel. Therefore, the transmission performance of the system is affected.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种预编码矩阵的处理方法和通信装置,以期提高反馈精度,进而提高系统的传输性能。The present application provides a processing method and a communication device for a precoding matrix, in order to improve the feedback accuracy, thereby improving the transmission performance of the system.
第一方面,提供了一种预编码矩阵处理方法。该方法例如可以由终端设备执行,或者,也可以由配置在终端设备中的部件(如芯片或芯片系统等)执行。本申请对此不作限定。In the first aspect, a precoding matrix processing method is provided. The method may be executed by, for example, a terminal device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
具体地,该方法包括:确定预编码矩阵的码本系数;对该预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,得到多个端口组;对该多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整;对增益调整后的码本系数进行量化处理。Specifically, the method includes: determining the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix; grouping ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain multiple port groups; performing gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups; adjusting the gain The latter codebook coefficients are quantized.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备可以在对预编码矩阵的码本系数进行量化之前,对码本系数进行增益调整,使得端口的能量分布差异较大的情况下,可以将一部分端口的码本系数放大,和/或,将另一部分端口的码本系数缩小,减小各端口之间的能量分布差异,以避免量化过程对部分端口的码本系数的丢失所造成的码本反馈精度下降。并且,通过对端口分组的方式来对不同端口组对应的码本系数采用不同的增益调整系数进行增益调整,便于终端设备和网络设备确定各端口与增益调整系数的对应关系,有利于网络设备准确地恢复出预编码矩阵。因此,本申请实施例所提供的预编码矩阵的处理方法,可以获得较高的 反馈精度,有利于提高系统的传输性能。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device can perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients before quantizing the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix, so that the codebook coefficients of some ports can be amplified when the energy distribution of the ports differs greatly. , And/or, reduce the codebook coefficients of another part of the ports to reduce the energy distribution difference between the ports, so as to avoid the loss of codebook feedback accuracy of some ports caused by the loss of the codebook coefficients of some ports in the quantization process. In addition, the codebook coefficients corresponding to different port groups are adjusted by different gain adjustment coefficients by grouping ports, which is convenient for terminal equipment and network equipment to determine the corresponding relationship between each port and gain adjustment coefficient, which is conducive to the accuracy of network equipment. To recover the precoding matrix. Therefore, the method for processing the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improve the transmission performance of the system.
结合第一方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向网络设备发送第二信息,该第二信息用于指示量化后的码本系数,以用于构建预编码矩阵;其中,该量化后的码本系数是对增益调整后的码本系数进行量化得到的。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: sending second information to the network device, where the second information is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficients for use in constructing a precoding matrix; wherein , The quantized codebook coefficients are obtained by quantizing the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
由于终端设备对各端口组对应的码本系数进行了增益调整故该量化后的码本系数是由增益调整后的码本系数量化得到的。终端设备可以将量化后的码本系数通过第二信息发送给网络设备,以便于网络设备根据该第二信息确定预编码矩阵。Since the terminal device performs gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group, the quantized codebook coefficients are obtained by quantizing the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment. The terminal device may send the quantized codebook coefficients to the network device through the second information, so that the network device can determine the precoding matrix according to the second information.
结合第一方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述对该预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,得到多个端口组,包括:接收来自网络设备的第一信息,该第一信息用于指示以下一项或多项:端口组数、该多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口数,以及该多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口;基于该第一信息,对该预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,得到多个端口组。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the grouping of ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain multiple port groups includes: receiving first information from a network device, where the first information is used to indicate One or more of the following: the number of port groups, the number of ports contained in each port group in the multiple port groups, and the ports contained in each port group in the multiple port groups; based on the first information, the preset Group the ports corresponding to the coding matrix to obtain multiple port groups.
也就是说,网络设备可预先通过信令向终端设备发送端口组配置。终端设备可以根据该网络设备发送的第一信息,或者可以进一步结合预定义的规则等,对该预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,以得到多个端口组。In other words, the network device may send the port group configuration to the terminal device through signaling in advance. The terminal device may group the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix according to the first information sent by the network device, or may further combine with predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups.
结合第一方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向网络设备上报多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: reporting the ports included in each port group of the multiple port groups to the network device.
也就是说,终端设备可以自行对端口分组,例如可以根据协议预定义的端口组数和/或每个端口组包含的端口数,以及预定义的规则等,以得到多个端口组。终端设备还可以进一步将每个组包含的端口上报网络设备,以便于网络设备后续确定预编码矩阵。In other words, the terminal device can group ports by itself, for example, according to the number of port groups predefined by the protocol and/or the number of ports included in each port group, and predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups. The terminal device may further report the ports included in each group to the network device, so that the network device can subsequently determine the precoding matrix.
结合第一方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述多该多个端口对应的码本系数进行增益调整,包括:从网络设备接收一个或多个增益调整系数;根据该一个或多个增益调整系数,对该多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the multiple codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple ports to perform gain adjustment includes: receiving one or more gain adjustment coefficients from a network device; and according to the one or more The gain adjustment coefficient is used to perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups.
也就是说,网络设备可以预先通过信令向终端设备发送增益调整系数。网络设备可以针对每个端口组配置一个增益调整系数,也可以向终端设备发送多个增益调整系数以便终端设备从中选择一个或多个来使用本申请对此不作限定。In other words, the network device may send the gain adjustment coefficient to the terminal device through signaling in advance. The network device may configure one gain adjustment coefficient for each port group, or may send multiple gain adjustment coefficients to the terminal device so that the terminal device can select one or more of them to use. This application does not limit this.
若终端设备从网络设备发送的多个增益调整系数中选择一个或多个来使用,则终端设备可以进一步向网络设备上报所使用的增益调整系数。If the terminal device selects one or more of the multiple gain adjustment coefficients sent by the network device to use, the terminal device may further report the used gain adjustment coefficient to the network device.
结合第一方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述对该多个端口对应的码本系数进行增益调整,包括:基于预存储的一个或多个增益调整系数,对多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the performing gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple ports includes: corresponding to multiple port groups based on one or more pre-stored gain adjustment coefficients The codebook coefficients for gain adjustment.
也就是说,终端设备可以自行选择增益调整系数,对多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。此情况下,由于网络设备并不能预先获知增益调整系数,因此,终端设备可以向网络设备上报所使用的的增益调整系数。In other words, the terminal device can select the gain adjustment coefficient by itself, and adjust the gain of the codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups. In this case, since the network device cannot know the gain adjustment coefficient in advance, the terminal device can report the used gain adjustment coefficient to the network device.
可选地,该方法还包括:向网络设备上报该一个或多个增益调整系数。Optionally, the method further includes: reporting the one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device.
通过向网络设备上报所使用的的一个或多个增益调整系数,网络设备在确定预编码的过程中,便可以根据各端口组对应的增益调整系数,将由终端设备上报的量化后的码本系数(可以理解,终端设备所上报的量化后的码本系数是增益调整后的码本系数)恢复成增益调整前的码本系数,或者说,恢复成未经过增益调整的码本系数。By reporting the used one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device, the network device can, in the process of determining the precoding, calculate the quantized codebook coefficient reported by the terminal device according to the gain adjustment coefficient corresponding to each port group (It can be understood that the quantized codebook coefficients reported by the terminal device are codebook coefficients after gain adjustment) are restored to codebook coefficients before gain adjustment, or in other words, restored to codebook coefficients without gain adjustment.
第二方面,提供了一种预编码矩阵的处理方法。该方法例如可以由网络设备执行,或 者,也可以由配置在网络设备中的部件(如芯片或芯片系统等)执行。本申请对此不作限定。In the second aspect, a method for processing a precoding matrix is provided. The method may be executed by a network device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
具体地,该方法包括:从终端设备接收第二信息,该第二信息用于指示量化后的码本系数,该量化后的码本系数是对预编码矩阵中与多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整后量化得到;根据该第二信息,确定该预编码矩阵。Specifically, the method includes: receiving second information from a terminal device, where the second information is used to indicate quantized codebook coefficients, and the quantized codebook coefficients are codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups in the precoding matrix. The coefficient is obtained after gain adjustment and quantization; according to the second information, the precoding matrix is determined.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备可以在对预编码矩阵的码本系数进行量化之前,对码本系数进行增益调整,使得端口的能量分布差异较大的情况下,可以将一部分端口的码本系数放大,和/或,将另一部分端口的码本系数缩小,减小各端口之间的能量分布差异,以避免量化过程对部分端口的码本系数的丢失所造成的码本反馈精度下降。并且,通过对端口分组的方式来对不同端口组对应的码本系数采用不同的增益调整系数进行增益调整,便于终端设备和网络设备确定各端口与增益调整系数的对应关系,有利于网络设备准确地恢复出预编码矩阵。因此,本申请实施例所提供的预编码矩阵的处理方法,可以获得较高的反馈精度,有利于提高系统的传输性能。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device can perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients before quantizing the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix, so that the codebook coefficients of some ports can be amplified when the energy distribution of the ports differs greatly. , And/or, reduce the codebook coefficients of another part of the ports to reduce the energy distribution difference between the ports, so as to avoid the loss of codebook feedback accuracy of some ports caused by the loss of the codebook coefficients of some ports in the quantization process. In addition, the codebook coefficients corresponding to different port groups are adjusted by different gain adjustment coefficients by grouping ports, which is convenient for terminal equipment and network equipment to determine the corresponding relationship between each port and gain adjustment coefficient, which is conducive to the accuracy of network equipment. To recover the precoding matrix. Therefore, the method for processing the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
结合第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向终端设备发送第一信息,该第一信息用于指示以下一项或多项:端口组数、多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口数,以及多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: sending first information to the terminal device, where the first information is used to indicate one or more of the following: the number of port groups, the number of port groups The number of ports contained in each port group, and the ports contained in each port group in multiple port groups.
也就是说,网络设备可预先通过信令向终端设备发送端口组配置。终端设备可以根据该网络设备发送的第一信息,或者可以进一步结合预定义的规则等,对该预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,以得到多个端口组。In other words, the network device may send the port group configuration to the terminal device through signaling in advance. The terminal device may group the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix according to the first information sent by the network device, or may further combine with predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups.
结合第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:从终端设备接收对该多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口的指示。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: receiving, from the terminal device, an indication of the ports included in each port group of the plurality of port groups.
也就是说,终端设备可以自行对端口分组,例如可以根据协议预定义的端口组数和/或每个端口组包含的端口数,以及预定义的规则等,以得到多个端口组。终端设备还可以进一步将每个组包含的端口上报网络设备,以便于网络设备后续确定预编码矩阵。In other words, the terminal device can group ports by itself, for example, according to the number of port groups predefined by the protocol and/or the number of ports included in each port group, and predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups. The terminal device may further report the ports included in each group to the network device, so that the network device can subsequently determine the precoding matrix.
结合第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向终端设备发送一个或多个增益调整系数,该一个或多个增益调整系数用于对该多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: sending one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the terminal device, where the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used for codes corresponding to the multiple port groups This coefficient is used for gain adjustment.
也就是说,网络设备可以预先通过信令向终端设备发送增益调整系数。网络设备可以针对每个端口组配置一个增益调整系数,也可以向终端设备发送多个增益调整系数以便终端设备从中选择一个或多个来使用本申请对此不作限定。In other words, the network device may send the gain adjustment coefficient to the terminal device through signaling in advance. The network device may configure one gain adjustment coefficient for each port group, or may send multiple gain adjustment coefficients to the terminal device so that the terminal device can select one or more of them to use. This application does not limit this.
结合第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:从终端设备接收一个或多个增益调整系数,该一个或多个增益调整系数用于对该多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: receiving one or more gain adjustment coefficients from the terminal device, and the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used for codes corresponding to the multiple port groups. This coefficient is used for gain adjustment.
也就是说,终端设备可以自行选择增益调整系数,对多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。此情况下,由于网络设备并不能预先获知增益调整系数,因此,终端设备可以向网络设备上报所使用的的增益调整系数。In other words, the terminal device can select the gain adjustment coefficient by itself, and adjust the gain of the codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups. In this case, since the network device cannot know the gain adjustment coefficient in advance, the terminal device can report the used gain adjustment coefficient to the network device.
或者,若终端设备从网络设备发送的多个增益调整系数中选择一个或多个来使用,则终端设备也可以进一步向网络设备上报所使用的增益调整系数。Alternatively, if the terminal device selects one or more of the multiple gain adjustment coefficients sent by the network device to use, the terminal device may also further report the used gain adjustment coefficient to the network device.
第三方面,提供了一种预编码矩阵的处理方法。该方法例如可以由终端设备执行,或 者,也可以由配置在终端设备中的部件(如芯片或芯片系统等)执行。本申请对此不作限定。In the third aspect, a method for processing a precoding matrix is provided. The method may be executed by, for example, a terminal device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
具体地,该方法包括:确定预编码矩阵的码本系数;对该预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,得到多个端口组;对该多个端口组中每个端口组对应的码本系数分别进行量化处理。Specifically, the method includes: determining the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix; grouping ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain multiple port groups; respectively performing codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group in the multiple port groups Quantification processing.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备通过在对预编码矩阵的码本系数按照所对应的端口组来单独进行压缩和量化,将能量分布较为相近的端口归为一个组来进行压缩,这可以使得端口的能量分布差异较大的码本系数被分开来单独压缩。因此,可以避免压缩过程对部分端口的码本系数的丢失所造成的码本反馈精度下降。网络设备可以根据相同各端口组间的关系,以及终端设备反馈的与各端口组对应的码本系数,确定预编码矩阵。如此一来,网络设备所恢复的预编码矩阵综合了各个端口的码本系数,对码本系数的丢失较少,这有利于网络设备准确地恢复出预编码矩阵。因此,本申请实施例所提供的预编码矩阵的处理方法,可以获得较高的反馈精度,有利于提高系统的传输性能。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device compresses and quantizes the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix separately according to the corresponding port group, and groups ports with similar energy distributions into a group for compression, which can make the port Codebook coefficients with large differences in energy distribution are separated and compressed individually. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the reduction of the codebook feedback accuracy caused by the loss of the codebook coefficients of some ports in the compression process. The network device may determine the precoding matrix according to the relationship between the same port groups and the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group fed back by the terminal device. In this way, the precoding matrix recovered by the network device integrates the codebook coefficients of each port, and the loss of the codebook coefficients is less, which is beneficial to the network device to accurately recover the precoding matrix. Therefore, the method for processing the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
结合第三方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向网络设备发送第三信息,该第三信息用于指示量化后的码本系数,以用于构建预编码矩阵;其中,该量化后的码本系数包括对应于多个端口组中每个端口组的量化后的码本系数,对应于多个端口组中的第一端口组的量化后的码本系数是对该预编码矩阵中第一端口组对应的码本系数进行量化处理得到的;其中,第一端口组是该多个端口组中的任意一个端口组。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: sending third information to the network device, where the third information is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficients for use in constructing a precoding matrix; wherein , The quantized codebook coefficient includes the quantized codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group in the multiple port groups, and the quantized codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group in the multiple port groups is The codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group in the precoding matrix are obtained by quantization processing; where the first port group is any one of the multiple port groups.
应理解,该第一端口组是多个端口组中的任意一个端口组,而并不应对该多个端口组的排序等构成限定。假设端口组数为G,G≥2且为整数。则该第一端口组例如可以是该G个端口组中第0个至第G-1个中的任意一个。It should be understood that the first port group is any one of the plurality of port groups, and should not be limited to the ordering of the plurality of port groups. Assume that the number of port groups is G, G≥2 and is an integer. Then the first port group may be, for example, any one of the 0th to G-1th in the G port groups.
由于终端设备对每个端口组对应的码本系数分别进行了量化,故该第三信息所指示的量化后的码本信息也是与每个端口组对应的量化后的码本系数。终端设备可以将每个端口组的量化后的码本系数通过第三信息发送给网络设备,以便于网络设备根据该第三信息确定预编码矩阵。Since the terminal device respectively quantizes the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group, the quantized codebook information indicated by the third information is also the quantized codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group. The terminal device may send the quantized codebook coefficients of each port group to the network device through the third information, so that the network device can determine the precoding matrix according to the third information.
结合第三方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述对该预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,得到多个端口组,包括:接收来自网络设备的第一信息,该第一信息用于指示以下一项或多项:端口组数、该多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口数,以及该多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口;基于该第一信息,对该预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,得到多个端口组。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the grouping of ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain multiple port groups includes: receiving first information from a network device, where the first information is used to indicate One or more of the following: the number of port groups, the number of ports contained in each port group in the multiple port groups, and the ports contained in each port group in the multiple port groups; based on the first information, the preset Group the ports corresponding to the coding matrix to obtain multiple port groups.
也就是说,网络设备可预先通过信令向终端设备发送端口组配置。终端设备可以根据该网络设备发送的第一信息,或者可以进一步结合预定义的规则等,对该预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,以得到多个端口组。In other words, the network device may send the port group configuration to the terminal device through signaling in advance. The terminal device may group the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix according to the first information sent by the network device, or may further combine with predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups.
接收第三方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向网络设备上报多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口。Receiving the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: reporting the ports included in each port group in the multiple port groups to the network device.
也就是说,终端设备可以自行对端口分组,例如可以根据协议预定义的端口组数和/或每个端口组包含的端口数,以及预定义的规则等,以得到多个端口组。终端设备还可以进一步将每个组包含的端口上报网络设备,以便于网络设备后续确定预编码矩阵。In other words, the terminal device can group ports by itself, for example, according to the number of port groups predefined by the protocol and/or the number of ports included in each port group, and predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups. The terminal device may further report the ports included in each group to the network device, so that the network device can subsequently determine the precoding matrix.
结合第三方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向网络设备上报一个或多个增益调整系数,该一个或多个增益调整系数用于指示多个端口组对应的码本系数之间的权值关系。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: reporting one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device, where the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used to indicate codebooks corresponding to multiple port groups The weight relationship between the coefficients.
由于终端设备在对多个端口组对应的码本系数进行量化时,是对每个端口组对应的码本系数单独进行压缩和量化的。而该多个端口组之间存在一定的能量差异。终端设备可以将端口组之间的能量差异通过增益调整系数来表征,并上报给网络设备。因此,网络设备在恢复预编码矩阵时,可以根据该增益调整系数,对恢复出来的每个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整,进而确定预编码矩阵。When the terminal device quantizes the codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups, the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group are individually compressed and quantized. However, there is a certain energy difference between the multiple port groups. The terminal device can characterize the energy difference between the port groups through a gain adjustment coefficient, and report it to the network device. Therefore, when restoring the precoding matrix, the network device can perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to each restored port group according to the gain adjustment coefficient, and then determine the precoding matrix.
应理解,该增益调整系数所表示的端口组之间的能量差异,更具体地说,可以是指端口组对应的码本系数之间的权值关系。增益调整系数仅为一种命名,不应对本申请构成任何限定。It should be understood that the energy difference between the port groups represented by the gain adjustment coefficient, more specifically, may refer to the weight relationship between the codebook coefficients corresponding to the port groups. The gain adjustment coefficient is only a name, and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
第四方面,提供了一种预编码矩阵的处理方法。该方法例如可以由网络设备执行,或者,也可以由配置在网络设备中的部件(如芯片或芯片系统等)执行。本申请对此不作限定。In the fourth aspect, a method for processing a precoding matrix is provided. The method may be executed by a network device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
具体地,该方法包括:从终端设备接收第三信息,该第三信息用于指示量化后的码本系数,以用于构建预编码矩阵;该量化后的码本系数包括对应于多个端口组中每个端口组的量化后的码本系数,对应于多个端口组中的第一端口组的量化后的码本系数是对该预编码矩阵中第一端口组对应的码本系数进行量化处理得到的;其中,第一端口组是该多个端口组中的任意一个端口组。Specifically, the method includes: receiving third information from a terminal device, where the third information is used to indicate quantized codebook coefficients for constructing a precoding matrix; the quantized codebook coefficients include corresponding to multiple ports The quantized codebook coefficients of each port group in the group, corresponding to the quantized codebook coefficients of the first port group in the multiple port groups, are the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group in the precoding matrix. Quantified processing is obtained; wherein, the first port group is any one of the multiple port groups.
应理解,该第一端口组是多个端口组中的任意一个端口组,而并不应对该多个端口组的排序等构成限定。假设端口组数为G,G≥2且为整数。则该第一端口组例如可以是该G个端口组中第0个至第G-1个中的任意一个。It should be understood that the first port group is any one of the plurality of port groups, and should not be limited to the ordering of the plurality of port groups. Assume that the number of port groups is G, G≥2 and is an integer. Then the first port group may be, for example, any one of the 0th to G-1th in the G port groups.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备通过在对预编码矩阵的码本系数按照所对应的端口组来单独进行压缩和量化,将能量分布较为相近的端口归为一个组来进行压缩,这可以使得端口的能量分布差异较大的码本系数被分开来单独压缩。因此,可以避免压缩过程对部分端口的码本系数的丢失所造成的码本反馈精度下降。网络设备可以根据相同各端口组间的关系,以及终端设备反馈的与各端口组对应的码本系数,确定预编码矩阵。如此一来,网络设备所恢复的预编码矩阵综合了各个端口的码本系数,对码本系数的丢失较少,这有利于网络设备准确地恢复出预编码矩阵。因此,本申请实施例所提供的预编码矩阵的处理方法,可以获得较高的反馈精度,有利于提高系统的传输性能。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device compresses and quantizes the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix separately according to the corresponding port group, and groups ports with similar energy distributions into a group for compression, which can make the port Codebook coefficients with large differences in energy distribution are separated and compressed individually. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the reduction of the codebook feedback accuracy caused by the loss of the codebook coefficients of some ports in the compression process. The network device may determine the precoding matrix according to the relationship between the same port groups and the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group fed back by the terminal device. In this way, the precoding matrix recovered by the network device integrates the codebook coefficients of each port, and the loss of the codebook coefficients is less, which is beneficial to the network device to accurately recover the precoding matrix. Therefore, the method for processing the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
结合第四方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向终端设备发送第一信息,该第一信息用于指示以下一项或多项:端口组数、多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口数,以及多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: sending first information to the terminal device, where the first information is used to indicate one or more of the following: the number of port groups, the number of port groups The number of ports contained in each port group, and the ports contained in each port group in multiple port groups.
也就是说,网络设备可预先通过信令向终端设备发送端口组配置。终端设备可以根据该网络设备发送的第一信息,或者可以进一步结合预定义的规则等,对该预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,以得到多个端口组。In other words, the network device may send the port group configuration to the terminal device through signaling in advance. The terminal device may group the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix according to the first information sent by the network device, or may further combine with predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups.
结合第四方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:从终端设备接收对该多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口的指示。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: receiving, from the terminal device, an indication of the ports included in each port group of the plurality of port groups.
也就是说,终端设备可以自行对端口分组,例如可以根据协议预定义的端口组数和/或每个端口组包含的端口数,以及预定义的规则等,以得到多个端口组。终端设备还可以进一步将每个组包含的端口上报网络设备,以便于网络设备后续确定预编码矩阵。In other words, the terminal device can group ports by itself, for example, according to the number of port groups predefined by the protocol and/or the number of ports included in each port group, and predefined rules, etc., to obtain multiple port groups. The terminal device may further report the ports included in each group to the network device, so that the network device can subsequently determine the precoding matrix.
结合第四方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:从终端设备接收一个或多 个增益调整系数,该一个或多个增益调整系数用于指示多个端口组对应的码本系数之间的权值关系。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: receiving one or more gain adjustment coefficients from the terminal device, where the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used to indicate codebooks corresponding to multiple port groups The weight relationship between the coefficients.
由于终端设备在对多个端口组对应的码本系数进行量化时,是对每个端口组对应的码本系数单独进行压缩和量化的。而该多个端口组之间存在一定的能量差异。终端设备可以将端口组之间的能量差异通过增益调整系数来表示,并上报给网络设备。因此,网络设备在恢复预编码矩阵时,可以根据该增益调整系数,对恢复出来的每个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整,进而确定预编码矩阵。When the terminal device quantizes the codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups, the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group are individually compressed and quantized. However, there is a certain energy difference between the multiple port groups. The terminal device can express the energy difference between the port groups through a gain adjustment coefficient and report it to the network device. Therefore, when restoring the precoding matrix, the network device can perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to each restored port group according to the gain adjustment coefficient, and then determine the precoding matrix.
应理解,该增益调整系数所表示的端口组之间的能量差异,更具体地说,可以是指多个端口组对应的码本系数之间的权值关系。增益调整系数仅为一种命名,不应对本申请构成任何限定。It should be understood that the energy difference between port groups represented by the gain adjustment coefficient, more specifically, may refer to the weight relationship between the codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups. The gain adjustment coefficient is only a name, and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
结合上述第一方面至第四方面中的任意一个方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,对多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口的指示包括:字符串;或,端口组划分方式的指示;或,端口组中包含的端口数、首个端口号和末个端口号中的至少一项。With reference to any one of the first to fourth aspects above, in some possible implementation manners, the indication of the ports included in each port group in the multiple port groups includes: a character string; or, a port group division method Or, at least one of the number of ports included in the port group, the first port number, and the last port number.
其中,字符串中的每个字符可以对应一个端口,每个字符可用于指示所对应的端口所属的端口组。端口组划分方式具体可以指每个端口组包含的端口的端口号。端口组划分方式可以是从预先配置好的多个端口组划分方式中选择的,并可通过不同的标识或索引等来指示不同的端口组划分方式。Among them, each character in the character string can correspond to a port, and each character can be used to indicate the port group to which the corresponding port belongs. The port group division method may specifically refer to the port numbers of the ports included in each port group. The port group division mode can be selected from a plurality of pre-configured port group division modes, and different port group division modes can be indicated through different identifiers or indexes.
第五方面,提供了一种预编码矩阵处理方法。该方法例如可以由终端设备执行,或者,也可以由配置在终端设备中的部件(如芯片或芯片系统等)执行。本申请对此不作限定。In the fifth aspect, a precoding matrix processing method is provided. The method may be executed by, for example, a terminal device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
具体地,该方法包括:确定预编码矩阵的码本系数;对该码本系数进行第一量化处理,得到第一量化信息,该第一量化信息用于指示多个线性叠加系数中的至少一个线性叠加系数;其中,该多个线性叠加系数中的每个线性叠加系数对应于一个波束,或,该多个线性叠加系数中的每个线性叠加系数对应于一个波束和一个频域单元,以用于构建预编码矩阵;对该多个线性叠加系数中未通过第一量化信息量化的部分或全部线性叠加系数进行第二量化处理,得到第二量化信息,该第二量化信息用于指示上述部分或全部线性叠加系数。Specifically, the method includes: determining codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix; performing first quantization processing on the codebook coefficients to obtain first quantization information, where the first quantization information is used to indicate at least one of a plurality of linear superposition coefficients Linear superposition coefficient; wherein, each linear superposition coefficient in the plurality of linear superposition coefficients corresponds to a beam, or, each linear superposition coefficient in the plurality of linear superposition coefficients corresponds to a beam and a frequency domain unit, and Used to construct a precoding matrix; perform second quantization processing on part or all of the linear superimposition coefficients that are not quantized by the first quantization information among the multiple linear superposition coefficients to obtain second quantization information, and the second quantization information is used to indicate the foregoing Part or all of the linear superposition coefficient.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备通过对线性叠加系数进行二次量化处理,也就相当于把线性叠加系数根据能量大小进行了分组,将能量较大的线性叠加系数归为一个组来进行压缩,将能量较小的线性叠加系数归为另一个组来进行压缩,并将两次压缩的结果分别进行量化得到第一量化信息和第二量化信息,通过第四信息将该第一量化信息和第二量化信息发送给网络设备。使得网络设备可以根据终端设备反馈的第四信息,以及两组线性叠加系数之间的能量大小关系,确定预编码矩阵。由于终端设备所反馈的线性叠加系数较多,可以避免对线性叠加系数的丢失造成的反馈精度下降,有利于网络设备更准确地恢复出预编码矩阵。因此,本申请实施例所提供的预编码矩阵的处理方法,可以获得较高的反馈精度,有利于提高系统的传输性能。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device performs secondary quantization processing on the linear superimposition coefficient, which is equivalent to grouping the linear superimposition coefficients according to the magnitude of energy, and grouping the linear superimposition coefficients with larger energy into a group for compression. The linear superposition coefficients with smaller energy are grouped into another group for compression, and the results of the two compressions are respectively quantized to obtain the first quantized information and the second quantized information. The first quantized information and the second quantized information are obtained through the fourth information. The quantitative information is sent to the network device. The network device can determine the precoding matrix according to the fourth information fed back by the terminal device and the energy relationship between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients. Since the terminal device feedbacks more linear superposition coefficients, it is possible to avoid a decrease in feedback accuracy caused by the loss of the linear superposition coefficient, which is beneficial to the network device to more accurately recover the precoding matrix. Therefore, the method for processing the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
结合第五方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向网络设备发送第四信息,该第四信息包括第一量化信息和第二量化信息。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: sending fourth information to the network device, where the fourth information includes the first quantization information and the second quantization information.
终端设备可以通过第一量化信息和第二量化信息将两组线性叠加系数均上报给网络设备,以便于网络设备在确定预编码矩阵时能够基于更多的线性叠加系数来确定,有利于网络设备更准确地确定出预编码矩阵。The terminal device can report both sets of linear superposition coefficients to the network device through the first quantization information and the second quantization information, so that the network device can determine the precoding matrix based on more linear superposition coefficients, which is beneficial to the network device Determine the precoding matrix more accurately.
结合第五方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向网络设备上报一个或多个或多个增益调整系数,该一个或多个增益调整系数用于指示通过第一量化信息指示的线性叠加系数和通过第二量化信息指示的线性叠加系数之间的能量关系。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: reporting one or more or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device, where the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used to indicate that the first quantization information is passed The energy relationship between the indicated linear superimposition coefficient and the linear superimposition coefficient indicated by the second quantization information.
由于终端设备在分别对两组能量差异较大的线性叠加系数进行量化时,是对每组线性叠加系数单独进行压缩和量化的。而该两组线性叠加系数的能量差异较大,终端设备可以将该两组线性叠加系数之间的能量差异通过增益调整系数来表征,并上报给网络设备。此,网络设备在恢复预编码矩阵时,可以根据该增益调整系数,先对两组线性叠加系数进行归一化处理,进而确定预编码矩阵。Because the terminal equipment separately compresses and quantizes each set of linear superimposition coefficients when quantizing the two sets of linear superposition coefficients with large energy differences. However, the energy difference between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients is relatively large, and the terminal device can characterize the energy difference between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients through the gain adjustment coefficient and report it to the network device. Therefore, when restoring the precoding matrix, the network device may first perform normalization processing on the two sets of linear superposition coefficients according to the gain adjustment coefficient, and then determine the precoding matrix.
结合第五方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向网络设备上报第二量化信息所指示的线性叠加系数的个数。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: reporting the number of linear superposition coefficients indicated by the second quantization information to the network device.
即,终端设备可以自行决定对未被第一量化信息指示的线性叠加系数中的哪些线性叠加系数进行第二量化处理,并可以将经第二量化处理的线性叠加系数的个数上报给网络设备。That is, the terminal device can decide by itself which linear superposition coefficients of the linear superposition coefficients not indicated by the first quantization information to perform the second quantization process, and can report the number of linear superposition coefficients subjected to the second quantization process to the network device .
结合第五方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:从网络设备接收第五信息,该第五信息用于指示通过第二量化信息指示的线性叠加系数的个数。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: receiving fifth information from the network device, where the fifth information is used to indicate the number of linear superimposition coefficients indicated by the second quantization information.
即,网络设备可以预先通过信令指示第二量化信息可用于指示的线性叠加系数的个数,也就是对第二组线性叠加系数的个数作出限制。That is, the network device may indicate the number of linear superimposition coefficients that the second quantization information can be used to indicate through signaling in advance, that is, limit the number of the second set of linear superimposition coefficients.
第六方面,提供了一种预编码矩阵的处理方法。该方法例如可以由网络设备执行,或者,也可以由配置在网络设备中的部件(如芯片或芯片系统等)执行。本申请对此不作限定。In the sixth aspect, a method for processing a precoding matrix is provided. The method may be executed by a network device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
具体地,该方法包括:接收第四信息,该第四信息包括第一量化信息和第二量化信息;该第一量化信息用于指示多个线性叠加系数中的至少一个线性叠加系数;其中,该多个线性叠加系数中的每个线性叠加系数对应于一个波束,或,该多个线性叠加系数中的每个线性叠加系数对应于一个波束和一个频域单元,以用于构建预编码矩阵;该第二量化信息用于指示该多个线性叠加系数中未通过第一量化信息量化的部分或全部线性叠加系数;根据该第四信息,确定预编码矩阵。Specifically, the method includes: receiving fourth information, the fourth information including first quantization information and second quantization information; the first quantization information is used to indicate at least one linear superimposition coefficient among a plurality of linear superimposition coefficients; wherein, Each linear superposition coefficient in the plurality of linear superposition coefficients corresponds to a beam, or, each linear superposition coefficient in the plurality of linear superposition coefficients corresponds to a beam and a frequency domain unit, so as to construct a precoding matrix The second quantization information is used to indicate part or all of the linear superimposition coefficients that are not quantized by the first quantization information among the plurality of linear superposition coefficients; and the precoding matrix is determined according to the fourth information.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备通过对线性叠加系数进行二次量化处理,也就相当于把线性叠加系数根据能量大小进行了分组,将能量较大的线性叠加系数归为一个组来进行压缩,将能量较小的线性叠加系数归为另一个组来进行压缩,并将两次压缩的结果分别进行量化得到第一量化信息和第二量化信息,通过第四信息将该第一量化信息和第二量化信息发送给网络设备。使得网络设备可以根据终端设备反馈的第四信息,以及两组线性叠加系数之间的能量大小关系,确定预编码矩阵。由于终端设备所反馈的线性叠加系数较多,可以避免对线性叠加系数的丢失造成的反馈精度下降,有利于网络设备更准确地恢复出预编码矩阵。因此,本申请实施例所提供的预编码矩阵的处理方法,可以获得较高的反馈精度,有利于提高系统的传输性能。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device performs secondary quantization processing on the linear superimposition coefficient, which is equivalent to grouping the linear superimposition coefficients according to the magnitude of energy, and grouping the linear superimposition coefficients with larger energy into a group for compression. The linear superposition coefficients with smaller energy are grouped into another group for compression, and the results of the two compressions are respectively quantized to obtain the first quantized information and the second quantized information. The first quantized information and the second quantized information are obtained through the fourth information. The quantitative information is sent to the network device. The network device can determine the precoding matrix according to the fourth information fed back by the terminal device and the energy relationship between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients. Since the terminal device feedbacks more linear superposition coefficients, it is possible to avoid a decrease in feedback accuracy caused by the loss of the linear superposition coefficient, which is beneficial to the network device to more accurately recover the precoding matrix. Therefore, the method for processing the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
结合第六方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:从终端设备接收一个或多个或多个增益调整系数,该一个或多个增益调整系数用于指示通过第一量化信息指示的线性叠加系数和通过第二量化信息指示的线性叠加系数之间的能量关系。With reference to the sixth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: receiving one or more or more gain adjustment coefficients from the terminal device, where the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used to indicate that the first quantization information is passed The energy relationship between the indicated linear superimposition coefficient and the linear superimposition coefficient indicated by the second quantization information.
由于终端设备在分别对两组能量差异较大的线性叠加系数进行量化时,是对每组线性 叠加系数单独进行压缩和量化的。而该两组线性叠加系数的能量差异较大,终端设备可以将该两组线性叠加系数之间的能量差异通过增益调整系数来表征,并上报给网络设备。此,网络设备在恢复预编码矩阵时,可以根据该增益调整系数,先对两组线性叠加系数进行归一化处理,进而确定预编码矩阵。Because the terminal equipment separately compresses and quantizes each set of linear superimposition coefficients when quantizing the two sets of linear superposition coefficients with large energy differences. However, the energy difference between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients is relatively large, and the terminal device can characterize the energy difference between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients by the gain adjustment coefficient, and report it to the network device. Therefore, when restoring the precoding matrix, the network device may first perform normalization processing on the two sets of linear superposition coefficients according to the gain adjustment coefficient, and then determine the precoding matrix.
结合第六方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:从终端设备接收第二量化信息所指示的线性叠加系数的个数。With reference to the sixth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: receiving the number of linear superposition coefficients indicated by the second quantization information from the terminal device.
即,终端设备可以自行决定对未被第一量化信息指示的线性叠加系数中的哪些线性叠加系数进行第二量化处理,并可以将经第二量化处理的线性叠加系数的个数上报给网络设备。That is, the terminal device can decide by itself which linear superposition coefficients of the linear superposition coefficients not indicated by the first quantization information to perform the second quantization process, and can report the number of linear superposition coefficients subjected to the second quantization process to the network device .
结合第六方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向终端设备发送第五信息,该第五信息用于指示通过第二量化信息指示的线性叠加系数的个数。With reference to the sixth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: sending fifth information to the terminal device, where the fifth information is used to indicate the number of linear superimposition coefficients indicated by the second quantization information.
即,网络设备可以预先通过信令指示第二量化信息可用于指示的线性叠加系数的个数,也就是对第二组线性叠加系数的个数作出限制。That is, the network device may indicate the number of linear superimposition coefficients that the second quantization information can be used to indicate through signaling in advance, that is, limit the number of the second set of linear superimposition coefficients.
第七方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括用于执行第一方面、第三方面及第五方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。In a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided, including various modules or units for executing the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the third aspect, and the fifth aspect.
第八方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括用于执行第二方面、第四方面及第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。In an eighth aspect, a communication device is provided, including various modules or units for executing the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect, the fourth aspect, and the sixth aspect.
第九方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第一方面、第三方面及第五方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。In a ninth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the third aspect, and the fifth aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为终端设备。当该通信装置为终端设备时,该通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In an implementation manner, the communication device is a terminal device. When the communication device is a terminal device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片时,该通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。In another implementation manner, the communication device is a chip configured in a terminal device. When the communication device is a chip configured in a terminal device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
可选地,该收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,该输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
第十方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第二方面、第四方面及第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。In a tenth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect, the fourth aspect, and the sixth aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为终端设备。当该通信装置为终端设备时,该通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In an implementation manner, the communication device is a terminal device. When the communication device is a terminal device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片时,该通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。In another implementation manner, the communication device is a chip configured in a terminal device. When the communication device is a chip configured in a terminal device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
可选地,该收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,该输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
第十一方面,提供了一种处理器,包括:输入电路、输出电路和处理电路。所述处理电路用于通过所述输入电路接收信号,并通过所述输出电路发射信号,使得所述处理器执行第一方面至第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In an eleventh aspect, a processor is provided, including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit. The processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
在具体实现过程中,上述处理器可以为一个或多个芯片,输入电路可以为输入管脚, 输出电路可以为输出管脚,处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的,输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的,且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路,该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请实施例对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。In the specific implementation process, the above-mentioned processor can be one or more chips, the input circuit can be an input pin, the output circuit can be an output pin, and the processing circuit can be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits, etc. . The input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, and the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to the transmitter and transmitted by the transmitter, and the input circuit and output The circuit can be the same circuit, which is used as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
第十二方面,提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和存储器。该处理器用于读取存储器中存储的指令,并可通过接收器接收信号,通过发射器发射信号,以执行第一方面至第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a twelfth aspect, a processing device is provided, including a processor and a memory. The processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, and can receive signals through a receiver, and transmit signals through a transmitter, so as to execute the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
可选地,所述处理器为一个或多个,所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
可选地,所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起,或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
在具体实现过程中,存储器可以为非瞬时性(non-transitory)存储器,例如只读存储器(read only memory,ROM),其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上,也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上,本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。In the specific implementation process, the memory can be a non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as a read only memory (ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the setting mode of the memory and the processor.
应理解,相关的数据交互过程例如发送指示信息可以为从处理器输出指示信息的过程,接收能力信息可以为处理器接收输入能力信息的过程。具体地,处理器输出的数据可以输出给发射器,处理器接收的输入数据可以来自接收器。其中,发射器和接收器可以统称为收发器。It should be understood that the related data interaction process, for example, sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from the processor, and receiving capability information may be a process of the processor receiving input capability information. Specifically, the data output by the processor can be output to the transmitter, and the input data received by the processor can come from the receiver. Among them, the transmitter and receiver can be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
上述第十二方面中的处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片。该处理装置中的处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现。当通过硬件实现时,该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等;当通过软件来实现时,该处理器可以是一个通用处理器,通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现,该存储器可以集成在处理器中,可以位于该处理器之外,独立存在。The processing device in the above-mentioned twelfth aspect may be one or more chips. The processor in the processing device can be implemented by hardware or software. When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading the software code stored in the memory, and the memory may Integrated in the processor, can be located outside the processor, and exist independently.
第十三方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令),当所述计算机程序被运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a thirteenth aspect, a computer program product is provided. The computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is run, causes the computer to execute the first aspect to The method in any possible implementation of the sixth aspect.
第十四方面,提供了一种计算机可读介质,所述计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令)当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a fourteenth aspect, a computer-readable medium is provided, and the computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, so that the computer executes the above-mentioned first aspect to The method in any possible implementation of the sixth aspect.
第十五方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括前述的网络设备和终端设备。In a fifteenth aspect, a communication system is provided, including the aforementioned network equipment and terminal equipment.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是适用于本申请实施例提供的预编码矩阵的处理方法的通信系统的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system suitable for a method for processing a precoding matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2至图4是本申请实施例提供的预编码矩阵的处理方法的示意性流程图;2 to 4 are schematic flowcharts of a method for processing a precoding matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例提供的对空频矩阵进行DFT的示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of performing DFT on a space-frequency matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图;FIG. 6 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例提供的另一通信装置的示意性框图;FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请实施例提供的又一通信装置的示意性框图;FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图。FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、第五代(5th Generation,5G)移动通信系统或新无线接入技术(new radio Access Technology,NR)或者下一代通信,比如6G。其中,5G移动通信系统可以是非独立组网(non-standalone,NSA)或独立组网(standalone,SA)。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex) , TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) communication system, fifth generation (5th Generation, 5G) mobile communication system or new wireless access Access technology (new radio Access Technology, NR) or next-generation communications, such as 6G. Among them, the 5G mobile communication system can be non-standalone (NSA) or standalone (SA).
本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于机器类通信(machine type communication,MTC)、机器间通信长期演进技术(Long Term Evolution-machine,LTE-M)、设备到设备(device-to device,D2D)网络、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)网络、物联网(internet of things,IoT)网络或者其他网络。其中,IoT网络例如可以包括车联网。其中,车联网系统中的通信方式统称为车到其他设备(vehicle to X,V2X,X可以代表任何事物),例如,该V2X可以包括:车辆到车辆(vehicle to vehicle,V2V)通信,车辆与基础设施(vehicle to infrastructure,V2I)通信、车辆与行人之间的通信(vehicle to pedestrian,V2P)或车辆与网络(vehicle to network,V2N)通信等。The technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to machine type communication (MTC), inter-machine communication long-term evolution technology (Long Term Evolution-machine, LTE-M), and device-to-device (D2D) Network, machine to machine (M2M) network, Internet of things (IoT) network or other networks. Among them, the IoT network may include, for example, the Internet of Vehicles. Among them, the communication methods in the Internet of Vehicles system are collectively referred to as vehicle to other devices (vehicle to X, V2X, X can represent anything), for example, the V2X may include: vehicle to vehicle (V2V) communication, and the vehicle communicates with Infrastructure (vehicle to infrastructure, V2I) communication, vehicle to pedestrian communication (V2P) or vehicle to network (V2N) communication, etc.
本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于未来的通信系统,如第六代(6th Generation,6G)移动通信系统等。本申请对此不作限定。The technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the 6th Generation (6G) mobile communication system. This application does not limit this.
本申请实施例中,网络设备可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。该设备包括但不限于:演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)系统中的接入点(access point,AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point,TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point,TRP)等,还可以为5G,如,NR,系统中的gNB,或,传输点(TRP或TP),5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,如基带单元(BBU),或,分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),或者下一代通信6G系统中的基站等。In the embodiments of the present application, the network device may be any device with a wireless transceiver function. This equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC) , Base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) system Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) or transmission and reception point (TRP), etc., can also be 5G, such as NR , The gNB in the system, or the transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of antenna panels (including multiple antenna panels) of the base station in the 5G system, or it can also be a network node that constitutes a gNB or transmission point, Such as a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (DU), or a base station in the next-generation communication 6G system.
在一些部署中,gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和DU。gNB还可以包括有源天线单元(active antenna unit,AAU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能。比如,CU负责处理非实时协议和服务,实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能。DU负责处理物理层协议和实时服务,实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、介质接入控制(medium access control,MAC)层和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。AAU实现部分物理层处理功能、射频处理及有源天线的相关功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层 信令,如RRC层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU和AAU发送的。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为包括CU节点、DU节点、AAU节点中一项或多项的设备。此外,可以将CU划分为接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network,CN)中的网络设备,本申请对此不做限定。In some deployments, the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU. The gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU). The CU implements some of the functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some of the functions of the gNB. For example, the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions. The DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implements the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer, and physical (physical, PHY) layer. AAU realizes some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU , Or, sent by DU and AAU. It can be understood that the network device may be a device that includes one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node. In addition, the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
网络设备为小区提供服务,终端设备通过网络设备分配的传输资源(例如,频域资源,或者说,频谱资源)与小区进行通信,该小区可以属于宏基站(例如,宏eNB或宏gNB等),也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站,这里的小小区可以包括:城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等,这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点,适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。The network equipment provides services for the cell, and the terminal equipment communicates with the cell through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) allocated by the network equipment, and the cell may belong to a macro base station (for example, a macro eNB or a macro gNB, etc.) , It may also belong to the base station corresponding to the small cell, where the small cell may include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, femto cell, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-speed data transmission services.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。In the embodiments of the present application, terminal equipment may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, user terminal, Terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device.
终端设备可以是一种向用户提供语音/数据连通性的设备,例如,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前,一些终端的举例可以为:手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑(如笔记本电脑、掌上电脑等)、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等。The terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to the user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on. At present, some examples of terminals can be: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablets (pads), computers with wireless transceiver functions (such as laptops, palmtop computers, etc.), mobile Internet devices (mobile internet devices, MID), virtual reality Virtual reality (VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), and wireless in remote medical (remote medical) Terminals, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, cellular phones, cordless Telephone, session initiation protocol (SIP) telephone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or connection Other processing equipment to wireless modems, in-vehicle equipment, wearable equipment, terminal equipment in the 5G network, or terminal equipment in the public land mobile network (PLMN) that will evolve in the future.
其中,可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。Among them, wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which are the general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. A wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a kind of hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. In a broad sense, wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones. Use, such as all kinds of smart bracelets and smart jewelry for physical sign monitoring.
此外,终端设备还可以是物联网(Internet of things,IoT)系统中的终端设备。IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分,其主要技术特点是将物品通过通信技术与网络连接,从而实现人机互连,物物互连的智能化网络。IoT技术可以通过例如窄带(narrow band)NB技术,做到海量连接,深度覆盖,终端省电。In addition, the terminal device may also be a terminal device in the Internet of Things (IoT) system. IoT is an important part of the development of information technology in the future. Its main technical feature is to connect objects to the network through communication technology, so as to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and interconnection of things. IoT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and power-saving terminals through, for example, narrowband NB technology.
此外,终端设备还可以包括智能打印机、火车探测器、加油站等传感器,主要功能包括收集数据(部分终端设备)、接收网络设备的控制信息与下行数据,并发送电磁波,向网络设备传输上行数据。In addition, terminal devices can also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, gas stations, etc. The main functions include collecting data (some terminal devices), receiving control information and downlink data from network devices, and sending electromagnetic waves to transmit uplink data to network devices. .
为便于理解本申请实施例,首先结合图1详细说明适用于本申请实施例提供的方法的 通信系统。图1示出了适用于本申请实施例提供的方法的通信系统100的示意图。如图所示,该通信系统100可以包括至少一个网络设备,如图1中所示的5G系统中的网络设备101;该通信系统100还可以包括至少一个终端设备,如图1中所示的终端设备102至107。其中,该终端设备102至107可以是移动的或固定的。网络设备101和终端设备102至107中的一个或多个均可以通过无线链路通信。每个网络设备可以为特定的地理区域提供通信覆盖,并且可以与位于该覆盖区域内的终端设备通信。例如,网络设备可以向终端设备发送配置信息,终端设备可以基于该配置信息向网络设备发送上行数据;又例如,网络设备可以向终端设备发送下行数据。因此,图1中的网络设备101和终端设备102至107构成一个通信系统。In order to facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, a communication system suitable for the method provided in the embodiments of the present application is first described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 applicable to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in the figure, the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 101 in the 5G system shown in FIG. 1; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, as shown in FIG. Terminal equipment 102 to 107. Wherein, the terminal devices 102 to 107 may be mobile or fixed. The network device 101 and one or more of the terminal devices 102 to 107 can communicate through a wireless link. Each network device can provide communication coverage for a specific geographic area, and can communicate with terminal devices located in the coverage area. For example, the network device may send configuration information to the terminal device, and the terminal device may send uplink data to the network device based on the configuration information; for another example, the network device may send downlink data to the terminal device. Therefore, the network device 101 and the terminal devices 102 to 107 in FIG. 1 constitute a communication system.
可选地,终端设备之间可以直接通信。例如可以利用D2D技术等实现终端设备之间的直接通信。如图中所示,终端设备105与106之间、终端设备105与107之间,可以利用D2D技术直接通信。终端设备106和终端设备107可以单独或同时与终端设备105通信。Optionally, the terminal devices can communicate directly. For example, D2D technology can be used to realize direct communication between terminal devices. As shown in the figure, between terminal devices 105 and 106, and between terminal devices 105 and 107, D2D technology can be used for direct communication. The terminal device 106 and the terminal device 107 may communicate with the terminal device 105 individually or at the same time.
终端设备105至107也可以分别与网络设备101通信。例如可以直接与网络设备101通信,如图中的终端设备105和106可以直接与网络设备101通信;也可以间接地与网络设备101通信,如图中的终端设备107经由终端设备106与网络设备101通信。The terminal devices 105 to 107 may also communicate with the network device 101, respectively. For example, it can directly communicate with the network device 101. The terminal devices 105 and 106 in the figure can directly communicate with the network device 101; it can also communicate with the network device 101 indirectly, as the terminal device 107 in the figure communicates with the network device via the terminal device 106. 101 communication.
应理解,图1示例性地示出了一个网络设备和多个终端设备,以及各通信设备之间的通信链路。可选地,该通信系统100可以包括多个网络设备,并且每个网络设备的覆盖范围内可以包括其它数量的终端设备,例如更多或更少的终端设备。本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a network device, multiple terminal devices, and communication links between each communication device. Optionally, the communication system 100 may include multiple network devices, and the coverage of each network device may include other numbers of terminal devices, for example, more or fewer terminal devices. This application does not limit this.
上述各个通信设备,如图1中的网络设备101和终端设备102至107,可以配置多个天线。该多个天线可以包括至少一个用于发送信号的发射天线和至少一个用于接收信号的接收天线。另外,各通信设备还附加地包括发射机链和接收机链,本领域普通技术人员可以理解,它们均可包括与信号发送和接收相关的多个部件(例如处理器、调制器、复用器、解调器、解复用器或天线等)。因此,网络设备与终端设备之间可通过多天线技术通信。Each of the aforementioned communication devices, such as the network device 101 and the terminal devices 102 to 107 in FIG. 1, may be configured with multiple antennas. The plurality of antennas may include at least one transmitting antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals. In addition, each communication device additionally includes a transmitter chain and a receiver chain. Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that they can all include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as processors, modulators, multiplexers, etc.). , Demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.). Therefore, multiple antenna technology can be used to communicate between network devices and terminal devices.
可选地,该无线通信系统100还可以包括网络控制器、移动管理实体等其他网络实体,本申请实施例不限于此。Optionally, the wireless communication system 100 may also include other network entities such as a network controller and a mobility management entity, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,下面简单说明下行信号在发送之前在物理层的处理过程。应理解,下文所描述的对下行信号的处理过程可以由网络设备执行,也可以由配置于网络设备中的部件(如芯片或芯片系统等)执行。为方便说明,下文统称为网络设备。In order to facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following briefly describes the processing procedure of the downlink signal at the physical layer before transmission. It should be understood that the processing of the downlink signal described below may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device. For the convenience of description, the following are collectively referred to as network devices.
网络设备在物理信道可对码字(code word)进行处理。其中,码字可以为经过编码(例如包括信道编码)的编码比特。码字经过加扰(scrambling),生成加扰比特。加扰比特经过调制映射(modulation mapping),得到调制符号。调制符号经过层映射(layer mapping),被映射到多个层(layer),或者称传输层。经过层映射后的调制符号经过预编码(precoding),得到预编码后的信号。预编码后的信号经过资源元素(resource element,RE)映射后,被映射到多个RE上。这些RE随后经过正交复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)调制后通过天线端口(antenna port)发射出去。Network equipment can process code words on physical channels. Wherein, the codeword may be coded bits that have been coded (for example, including channel coding). The codeword is scrambling to generate scrambled bits. The scrambled bits undergo modulation mapping (modulation mapping) to obtain modulation symbols. Modulation symbols are mapped to multiple layers, or transmission layers, after layer mapping. The modulation symbols after layer mapping are precoding (precoding) to obtain a precoded signal. The precoded signal is mapped to multiple REs after resource element (resource element, RE) mapping. These REs are then modulated by orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) and then transmitted through an antenna port (antenna port).
应理解,上文所描述的对下行信号的处理过程仅为示例性描述,不应对本申请构成任何限定。对下行信号的处理过程具体可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里省略对其具体过程的详细说明。It should be understood that the processing procedure for the downlink signal described above is only an exemplary description, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. For the processing process of the downlink signal, reference may be made to the prior art. For brevity, detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
为便于理解本申请实施例,下面对本申请实施例中涉及到的术语做简单介绍。To facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following briefly introduces the terms involved in the embodiments of the present application.
1、预编码技术:发送设备(如网络设备)可以在已知信道状态的情况下,借助与信道状态相匹配的预编码矩阵来对待发送信号进行处理,使得经过预编码的待发送信号与信道相适配,从而使得接收设备(如终端设备)消除信道间影响的复杂度降低。因此,通过对待发送信号的预编码处理,接收信号质量(例如信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio,SINR)等)得以提升。因此,采用预编码技术,可以实现发送设备与多个接收设备在相同的时频资源上传输,也就是实现了多用户多输入多输出(multiple user multiple input multiple output,MU-MIMO)。1. Precoding technology: The sending device (such as network equipment) can process the signal to be sent with the aid of a precoding matrix that matches the channel status when the channel status is known, so that the precoded signal to be sent and the channel Adaptation, thereby reducing the complexity of the receiving device (such as the terminal device) in eliminating the influence between channels. Therefore, through the precoding processing of the signal to be transmitted, the quality of the received signal (for example, the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), etc.) can be improved. Therefore, the use of precoding technology can realize the transmission on the same time-frequency resource between the sending device and multiple receiving devices, that is, the realization of multiple user multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO).
应理解,有关预编码技术的相关描述仅为便于理解而示例,并非用于限制本申请实施例的保护范围。在具体实现过程中,发送设备还可以通过其他方式进行预编码。例如,在无法获知信道信息(例如但不限于信道矩阵)的情况下,采用预先设置的预编码矩阵或者加权处理方式进行预编码等。为了简洁,其具体内容本文不再赘述。It should be understood that the relevant description of the precoding technology is merely an example for ease of understanding, and is not used to limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application. In the specific implementation process, the sending device may also perform precoding in other ways. For example, when channel information (such as but not limited to a channel matrix) cannot be obtained, precoding is performed using a preset precoding matrix or a weighting processing method. For the sake of brevity, its specific content will not be repeated here.
2、天线端口(antenna port):简称端口。天线端口可以理解为被接收设备所识别的发射天线,或者在空间上可以区分的发射天线。每个天线端口可以与一个参考信号对应,因此,每个天线端口可以称为一个参考信号的端口,例如,信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)端口、探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)端口等。2. Antenna port: referred to as port. The antenna port can be understood as a transmitting antenna recognized by the receiving device, or a transmitting antenna that can be distinguished in space. Each antenna port can correspond to a reference signal. Therefore, each antenna port can be called a reference signal port, for example, channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) port, sounding reference signal ( sounding reference signal (SRS) port, etc.
3、预编码矩阵(precoding matrix):终端设备可以基于信道测量确定预编码矩阵。示例性地,终端可以通过信道估计等方式或者基于信道互易性确定信道矩阵。预编码矩阵例如可以通过对信道矩阵或信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行奇异值分解(singular value decomposition,SVD)的方式获得,或者,也可以通过对信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行特征值分解(eigenvalue decopomsition,EVD)的方式获得。应理解,上文中列举的预编码矩阵的确定方式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。预编码矩阵的确定方式可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里不再一一列举。3. Precoding matrix: The terminal device can determine the precoding matrix based on channel measurement. Exemplarily, the terminal may determine the channel matrix by means such as channel estimation or based on channel reciprocity. The precoding matrix can be obtained, for example, by performing singular value decomposition (SVD) on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix, or it can also be obtained by performing eigenvalue decomposition (eigenvalue decomposition) on the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. , EVD). It should be understood that the method for determining the precoding matrix listed above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. The method for determining the precoding matrix can refer to the prior art. For brevity, it is not listed here.
终端设备所确定的预编码矩阵可以称为待反馈的预编码矩阵,或者说,待上报的预编码矩阵。终端设备可以通过预编码矩阵指示(precoding matrix indicator,PMI)指示该待反馈的预编码矩阵,以便于网络设备基于PMI恢复出该预编码矩阵。网络设备基于该PMI恢复出的预编码矩阵可以与上述待反馈的预编码矩阵相同或相近似。The precoding matrix determined by the terminal device may be referred to as the precoding matrix to be fed back, or in other words, the precoding matrix to be reported. The terminal device may indicate the precoding matrix to be fed back through a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), so that the network device can recover the precoding matrix based on the PMI. The precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the PMI may be the same or similar to the foregoing precoding matrix to be fed back.
在下行信道测量中,网络设备根据PMI确定出的预编码矩阵与终端设备所确定的预编码矩阵的近似度越高,其确定出的用于数据传输的预编码矩阵也就越能够与下行信道相适配,因此也就能够提高信号的传输质量。In downlink channel measurement, the higher the similarity between the precoding matrix determined by the network device according to the PMI and the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device, the better the precoding matrix determined by the network device for data transmission can be compared with the downlink channel. Therefore, the transmission quality of the signal can be improved.
需要说明的是,由本申请实施例提供的方法,网络设备可以基于终端设备的反馈确定与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。网络设备由此而确定的预编码矩阵可以直接用于下行数据传输;也可以经过一些波束成形方法,例如包括迫零(zero forcing,ZF)、正则化迫零(regularized zero-forcing,RZF)、最小均方误差(minimum mean-squared error,MMSE)、最大化信漏噪比(signal-to-leakage-and-noise,SLNR)等,以得到最终用于下行数据传输的预编码矩阵。本申请对此不作限定。在未作出特别说明的情况下,下文中所涉及的预编码矩阵均可以是指基于本申请提供的方法所确定的预编码矩阵。It should be noted that in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device may determine the precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units based on the feedback of the terminal device. The precoding matrix determined by the network equipment can be directly used for downlink data transmission; it can also undergo some beamforming methods, such as zero forcing (ZF), regularized zero-forcing (RZF), Minimum mean-squared error (MMSE), maximum signal-to-leakage-and-noise (SLNR), etc., to obtain the final precoding matrix for downlink data transmission. This application does not limit this. Unless otherwise specified, the precoding matrix involved in the following may all refer to the precoding matrix determined based on the method provided in this application.
预编码矩阵例如可以是一个T×R维的矩阵。其中,T表示一个极化方向上的天线端 口数,R表示传输层数,T和R均为大于或等于1的整数。对于双极化方向的发射天线来说,该预编码矩阵例如可以是一个2T×R维的矩阵。The precoding matrix may be, for example, a T×R-dimensional matrix. Among them, T represents the number of antenna ports in a polarization direction, R represents the number of transmission layers, and both T and R are integers greater than or equal to 1. For transmitting antennas with dual polarization directions, the precoding matrix may be, for example, a 2T×R-dimensional matrix.
该预编码矩阵中的每一个列可以与一个传输层对应。每一列中的T个元素表示了T个天线端口的权值(或者说,权重)。将该T个天线端口的信号做线性叠加(linear combine),便可以在空间的某一方向上形成较强的区域。在本申请实施例中,为方便说明,将预编码矩阵中的元素称为码本系数。Each column in the precoding matrix may correspond to one transmission layer. The T elements in each column represent the weights (or weights) of the T antenna ports. By linearly combining the signals of the T antenna ports, a strong area can be formed in a certain direction of space. In the embodiments of the present application, for convenience of description, the elements in the precoding matrix are referred to as codebook coefficients.
该预编码矩阵中的每一个行可以与一个天线端口对应。每一行中的R个元素表示了同一个天线端口在R个传输层上的不同权值。可以理解的是,当传输层数R为1时,该预编码矩阵为一长度为T的向量,也可以称为预编码向量。Each row in the precoding matrix may correspond to one antenna port. The R elements in each row represent different weights of the same antenna port on the R transmission layers. It can be understood that when the number of transmission layers R is 1, the precoding matrix is a vector of length T, which can also be referred to as a precoding vector.
4、频域单元:频域资源的单位,可表示不同的频域资源粒度。频域单元例如可以包括但不限于,信道质量指示(channel quality indicator,CQI)子带(subband)、CQI子带的1/R、资源块(resource block,RB)、子载波、资源块组(resource block group,RBG)或预编码资源块组(precoding resource block group,PRG)等。其中,R为正整数。R的取值例如可以为1或2。在一种可能的实现方式中,R的取值可以由网络设备预先通过信令配置给终端设备。4. Frequency domain unit: a unit of frequency domain resources, which can represent different granularity of frequency domain resources. Frequency domain units may include, but are not limited to, channel quality indicator (CQI) subband, 1/R of CQI subband, resource block (resource block, RB), subcarrier, resource block group ( resource block group, RBG) or precoding resource block group (PRG), etc. Among them, R is a positive integer. The value of R can be 1 or 2, for example. In a possible implementation manner, the value of R may be pre-configured by the network device to the terminal device through signaling.
在本申请实施例中,PMI可用于指示与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵,该频域单元也可以称为PMI子带。其中,R可以表示CQI子带的粒度与PMI子带的粒度的比值。当R为1时,即一个CQI子带的粒度与一个PMI子带的粒度相同;当R为2时,即一个CQI子带的粒度为一个PMI子带的粒度的两倍。In the embodiment of the present application, the PMI may be used to indicate a precoding matrix corresponding to a frequency domain unit, and the frequency domain unit may also be referred to as a PMI subband. Among them, R may represent the ratio of the granularity of the CQI subband to the granularity of the PMI subband. When R is 1, the granularity of a CQI subband is the same as the granularity of a PMI subband; when R is 2, the granularity of a CQI subband is twice the granularity of a PMI subband.
需要说明的是,与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵可以是指基于该频域单元上的参考信号进行信道测量和反馈而确定的预编码矩阵。与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵可用于对后续通过该频域单元传输的数据做预编码。下文中,与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵也可以简称为该频域单元的预编码矩阵。It should be noted that the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may refer to a precoding matrix determined by performing channel measurement and feedback based on the reference signal on the frequency domain unit. The precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit can be used to precode the data subsequently transmitted through the frequency domain unit. Hereinafter, the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may also be simply referred to as the precoding matrix of the frequency domain unit.
与频域单元对应的信道矩阵可以是指基于该频域单元上的参考信号进行信道估计和反馈而确定的信道矩阵。与频域单元对应的信道矩阵可用于确定后续通过该频域单元传输数据所使用的预编码矩阵。下文中,与频域单元对应的信道矩阵也可以简称为该频域单元的信道矩阵。The channel matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may refer to a channel matrix determined by performing channel estimation and feedback based on the reference signal on the frequency domain unit. The channel matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit can be used to determine the precoding matrix used for subsequent data transmission through the frequency domain unit. Hereinafter, the channel matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may also be simply referred to as the channel matrix of the frequency domain unit.
下文中为方便理解和说明,将子带(例如上述PMI子带)作为频域单元的一例来描述本申请实施例。因此文中涉及子带的描述均可以替换为频域单元。In the following, for ease of understanding and description, a subband (for example, the above-mentioned PMI subband) is used as an example of a frequency domain unit to describe the embodiments of the present application. Therefore, all the descriptions related to subbands in the text can be replaced with frequency domain units.
5、空域压缩:可以是指第三代合作伙伴(3nd generation partnership project,3GPP)标准TS38.214的版本15(release 15,R15)(以下简称R15)中的类型II(type II)码本反馈方式。5. Airspace compression: It can refer to the type II (type II) codebook feedback in the version 15 (release 15, R15) (hereinafter referred to as R15) of TS38.214 of the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) standard the way.
在R15的type II码本反馈方式中,终端可以对每个子带(即,频域单元的一例)的预编码矩阵进行量化,并可以通过PMI将量化值发送给网络设备,以便于网络设备根据PMI确定出与终端所确定的预编码矩阵相同或相近的预编码矩阵。该量化的过程可以通过空域压缩来实现。所谓空域压缩,具体可以是指,终端将确定出的各子带的预编码矩阵投影到例如由DFT基底组成的空间中,由于在低频系统中,信道通常具有稀疏性,投影后可以得到若干个较强的空域向量。每个子带的预编码矩阵可以通过上述若干个较强的空域向量的加权和来近似地表征。In the type II codebook feedback mode of R15, the terminal can quantize the precoding matrix of each subband (that is, an example of frequency domain unit), and can send the quantized value to the network device through the PMI, so that the network device can follow The PMI determines a precoding matrix that is the same as or similar to the precoding matrix determined by the terminal. The quantization process can be achieved through spatial compression. The so-called spatial compression can specifically mean that the terminal projects the determined precoding matrix of each subband into a space composed of, for example, a DFT basis. In a low-frequency system, the channel is usually sparse, and several sub-bands can be obtained after projection. Strong airspace vector. The precoding matrix of each subband can be approximated by the weighted sum of the above-mentioned several strong spatial vectors.
为便于理解,下文示出了秩(rank)为1时通过R15的type II码本反馈方式反馈预编码矩阵的简单示例。For ease of understanding, the following shows a simple example of feeding back the precoding matrix through the type II codebook feedback mode of R15 when the rank is 1.
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000001
其中,W表示一个传输层、一个子带、两个极化方向上待反馈的预编码矩阵。W 1可以通过宽带反馈,W 2可以通过子带反馈。v 0至v 3为W 1中包含的空域向量,该多个空域向量例如可通过该多个空域向量的组合的索引来指示。在上文中示出的预编码矩阵中,两个极化方向上的空域向量是相同的,均使用了空域向量v 0至v 3。a 0至a 7为W 1中包含的宽带幅度系数,可通过宽带幅度系数的量化值来指示。c 0至c 7为W 2中包含的子带系数,每个子带系数可以包括子带幅度系数和子带相位系数。如c 0至c 7可以分别包括子带幅度系数α 0至α 7以及子带相位系数
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000003
并可分别通过子带幅度系数α 0至α 7的量化值和子带相位系数
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000005
的量化值来指示。可以看到,该待反馈的预编码矩阵可以视为多个空域向量的加权和。
Where, W represents a precoding matrix to be fed back in one transmission layer, one subband, and two polarization directions. W 1 can be fed back through broadband, and W 2 can be fed back through subbands. v 0 to v 3 are the space vectors included in W 1 , and the plurality of space vectors can be indicated by the index of the combination of the plurality of space vectors, for example. In the precoding matrix shown above, the spatial vectors in the two polarization directions are the same, and the spatial vectors v 0 to v 3 are both used. a 0 to a 7 are the broadband amplitude coefficients included in W 1 , which can be indicated by the quantized value of the broadband amplitude coefficient. c 0 to c 7 are the sub-band coefficients contained in W 2 , and each sub-band coefficient may include a sub-band amplitude coefficient and a sub-band phase coefficient. For example, c 0 to c 7 can respectively include sub-band amplitude coefficients α 0 to α 7 and sub-band phase coefficients
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000002
to
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000003
The quantized value of the sub-band amplitude coefficient α 0 to α 7 and the sub-band phase coefficient can be respectively passed
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000004
to
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000005
Quantized value to indicate. It can be seen that the precoding matrix to be fed back can be regarded as a weighted sum of multiple spatial vectors.
可以看到,随着传输层数的增加,终端设备的反馈开销也会增加。例如传输层数为4时,a 0至a 7以及c 0至c 7的反馈开销最多将达到一个传输层时的4倍。也就是说,如果终端设备基于每个传输层进行如上所述的宽带反馈和子带反馈,则随着传输层数的增加,所带来的反馈开销会成倍增加。而子带数量越多,反馈开销增加的幅度也越大。为了在不损失反馈精度的前提下减小反馈开销,TS38.214R16(以下简称R16)提出了双域压缩的码本反馈方式。 It can be seen that as the number of transmission layers increases, the feedback overhead of the terminal equipment will also increase. For example, when the number of transmission layers is 4, the feedback overhead of a 0 to a 7 and c 0 to c 7 will be at most 4 times that of one transmission layer. That is to say, if the terminal device performs the above-mentioned broadband feedback and subband feedback based on each transmission layer, as the number of transmission layers increases, the feedback overhead caused will increase exponentially. The more the number of subbands, the greater the increase in feedback overhead. In order to reduce feedback overhead without loss of feedback accuracy, TS38.214R16 (hereinafter referred to as R16) proposes a dual-domain compression codebook feedback method.
6、双域压缩:具体可以包括空域压缩和频域压缩这两个维度的压缩。例如,终端可以将其确定的预编码矩阵分别投影至由多个空域基底组成的空间和由多个频域基底组成的空间,以得到若干个较强的空域向量和若干个较强的频域向量。6. Dual-domain compression: It can specifically include compression in the two dimensions of space-domain compression and frequency-domain compression. For example, the terminal can project its determined precoding matrix into a space composed of multiple spatial bases and a space composed of multiple frequency domain bases to obtain several strong spatial vectors and several strong frequency domains. vector.
例如,将经双域压缩所选择的一个或多个空域向量构成的矩阵记为W 1,W 1中的每一个列向量为一个空域向量。若采用双极化方向的发射天线,每个极化方向例如可以选择L(L≥1且为整数)个空域向量。则,W 1的维度可以是2T×2L。在一种可能的实现方式中,两个极化方向可以采用相同的L个空域向量
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000006
其中,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000007
例如可以是从上文所述的空域向量集合中选择的L个空域向量。此时,W 1可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000008
其中
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000009
表示选择的L个空域向量中的第l个空域向量,l=1,1,…,L-1。
For example, a matrix composed of one or more spatial vectors selected by dual-domain compression is denoted as W 1 , and each column vector in W 1 is a spatial vector. If a transmitting antenna with dual polarization directions is used, for example, L (L≥1 and an integer) space vectors can be selected for each polarization direction. Then, the dimension of W 1 may be 2T×2L. In a possible implementation, the same L spatial vectors can be used for the two polarization directions
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000006
among them,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000007
For example, it may be L airspace vectors selected from the set of airspace vectors described above. At this time, W 1 can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000008
among them
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000009
Represents the l-th spatial vector among the selected L spatial vectors, l=1, 1,..., L-1.
将经双域压缩所选择的一个或多个频域向量构成的矩阵记为W 3,W 3中的每一个列向 量为一个频域向量。若选择M(M≥1且为整数)个频域向量,则,W 3的维度可以是N 3×M。N 3表示子带数,N 3为大于或等于1的整数。 The matrix composed of one or more frequency domain vectors selected by dual-domain compression is denoted as W 3 , and each column vector in W 3 is a frequency domain vector. If M (M≥1 and integer) frequency domain vectors are selected, the dimension of W 3 can be N 3 ×M. N 3 represents the number of subbands, and N 3 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
预编码矩阵可以由W 1CW 3 H得到。其中C为2L×M维的系数矩阵。该系数矩阵中的每个元素为一个线性叠加系数,与一个空域向量和一个频域向量对应。 The precoding matrix can be obtained by W 1 CW 3 H. Where C is a 2L×M-dimensional coefficient matrix. Each element in the coefficient matrix is a linear superposition coefficient, which corresponds to a spatial vector and a frequency vector.
应理解,由W 1CW 3 H计算所得的矩阵实际上是同一个传输层上不同的子带对应的预编码向量构成的矩阵。基于该矩阵可以进一步确定与各子带对应的预编码矩阵。在本申请实施例中,为方便区分和说明,将由W 1CW 3 H计算所得的矩阵称为空频矩阵。若采用双极化方向的发射天线,空频矩阵的维度可以是2T×N 3。下文会对空频矩阵做详细说明,这里暂且不作详述。 It should be understood that the matrix calculated by W 1 CW 3 H is actually a matrix composed of precoding vectors corresponding to different subbands on the same transmission layer. Based on this matrix, the precoding matrix corresponding to each subband can be further determined. In the embodiments of the present application, for the convenience of distinction and description, the matrix calculated by W 1 CW 3 H is referred to as a space-frequency matrix. If a transmitting antenna with dual polarization directions is used, the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be 2T×N 3 . The space-frequency matrix will be explained in detail below, and will not be described in detail here.
应理解,上文中所示的空频矩阵H与W 1、W 3的关系仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本领域的技术人员基于相同的构思,可以对上述关系进行数学变换,而得到其他用于表征空频矩阵H与W 1、W 3关系的计算式。例如,空频矩阵H也可以表示为H=W 1CW 3。此情况下,W 3中的每一个行向量可以对应一个被选择的频域向量。 It should be understood that the relationship between the space-frequency matrix H and W 1 , W 3 shown above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. Based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can perform mathematical transformations on the above-mentioned relationship to obtain other calculation formulas for representing the relationship between the space-frequency matrix H and W 1 , W 3. For example, the space frequency matrix H can also be expressed as H=W 1 CW 3 . In this case, each row vector in W 3 can correspond to a selected frequency domain vector.
由于双域压缩在空域和频域都分别进行了压缩,终端在反馈时,可以将被选择的一个或多个空域向量和一个或多个频域向量反馈给网络设备,而不再需要基于每个子带(如子带)分别反馈子带的线性叠加系数(比如包括幅度和相位)。因此,可以大大减小反馈开销。此外,由于频域向量能够表示信道在频域的变化规律,通过一个或多个频域向量的线性叠加来近似地表征信道在频域上的变化。因此,仍能够保持较高的反馈精度,使得网络设备基于终端设备的反馈恢复出来的预编码矩阵仍然能够较好地与信道适配。Since dual-domain compression is compressed in both the space and frequency domains, the terminal can feed back the selected one or more spatial vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors to the network device when feedback Each sub-band (such as sub-band) feeds back the linear superposition coefficient of the sub-band (for example, including amplitude and phase). Therefore, the feedback overhead can be greatly reduced. In addition, since the frequency domain vector can represent the change law of the channel in the frequency domain, the linear superposition of one or more frequency domain vectors can approximate the change of the channel in the frequency domain. Therefore, a high feedback accuracy can still be maintained, so that the precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can still be better adapted to the channel.
7、空域向量(spatial domain vector):或者称波束(beam)向量、空域波束基向量或空域基向量等。空域向量中的各个元素可以表示各个天线端口的权重。基于空域向量中各个元素所表示的各个天线端口的权重,将各个天线端口的信号做线性叠加,可以在空间某一方向上形成信号较强的区域。7. Spatial domain vector: It is also called beam vector, spatial beam basis vector or spatial domain vector, etc. Each element in the spatial vector can represent the weight of each antenna port. Based on the weight of each antenna port represented by each element in the space vector, the signals of each antenna port are linearly superimposed to form an area with a strong signal in a certain direction in space.
可选地,空域向量是离散傅里叶变换(Discrete Fourier Transform,DFT)向量。DFT向量可以是指DFT矩阵中的向量。Optionally, the spatial vector is a Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) vector. The DFT vector may refer to the vector in the DFT matrix.
可选地,空域向量是DFT向量的共轭转置向量。DFT共轭转置向量可以是指DFT矩阵的共轭转置矩阵中的列向量。Optionally, the spatial vector is a conjugate transpose vector of the DFT vector. The DFT conjugate transpose vector may refer to the column vector in the conjugate transpose matrix of the DFT matrix.
可选地,空域向量是过采样DFT向量。过采样DFT向量可以是指过采样DFT矩阵中的向量。Optionally, the spatial vector is an oversampled DFT vector. The oversampled DFT vector may refer to the vector in the oversampled DFT matrix.
可选地,空域向量是过采样DFT向量的共轭转置向量。Optionally, the spatial vector is the conjugate transpose vector of the oversampled DFT vector.
在一种可能的设计中,该空域向量例如可以是NR协议TS 38.214版本15(release 15,R15)中类型II(type II)码本中定义的二维(2 dimensions,2D)-DFT向量v l,m。换句话说,空域向量可以是2D-DFT向量或过采样2D-DFT向量。为了简洁,这里省略对2D-DFT向量的详细说明。 In a possible design, the airspace vector may be a two-dimensional (2 dimensions, 2D)-DFT vector v defined in a type II (type II) codebook in the NR protocol TS 38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15), for example. l,m . In other words, the spatial vector can be a 2D-DFT vector or an oversampled 2D-DFT vector. For brevity, a detailed description of the 2D-DFT vector is omitted here.
在本申请实施例中,空域向量是用于构建预编码矩阵的向量之一。In the embodiment of the present application, the spatial vector is one of the vectors used to construct the precoding matrix.
8、频域向量(frequency domain vector):也称为频域基向量。频域向量可用于表示信道在频域的变化规律的向量。每个频域向量可以表示一种变化规律。由于信号在经过无线信道传输时,从发射天线可以经过多个路径到达接收天线。多径时延导致频率选择性衰落,就是频域信道的变化。因此,可以通过不同的频域向量来表示不同传输路径上时延导 致的信道在频域上的变化规律。8. Frequency domain vector: also called frequency domain basis vector. The frequency domain vector can be used to represent the vector of the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain. Each frequency domain vector can represent a change law. Since the signal is transmitted through the wireless channel, it can reach the receiving antenna through multiple paths from the transmitting antenna. Multipath time delay causes frequency selective fading, which is the change of frequency domain channel. Therefore, different frequency domain vectors can be used to represent the channel change law in the frequency domain caused by the time delay on different transmission paths.
在本申请实施例中,频域向量可用于和上述空域向量构建多个空域向量和频域向量的组合,或者简称空频向量对,以用于构建预编码向量。In the embodiment of the present application, the frequency domain vector may be used to construct a combination of multiple space domain vectors and frequency domain vectors, or simply a space-frequency vector pair, with the above-mentioned spatial domain vector to construct a precoding vector.
可选地,频域向量是DFT向量。DFT向量可以是指DFT矩阵中的向量。Optionally, the frequency domain vector is a DFT vector. The DFT vector may refer to the vector in the DFT matrix.
可选地,频域向量是DFT向量的共轭转置向量。Optionally, the frequency domain vector is a conjugate transpose vector of the DFT vector.
可选地,频域向量是过采样DFT向量。Optionally, the frequency domain vector is an oversampled DFT vector.
可选地,频域向量是过采样DFT向量的共轭转置向量。Optionally, the frequency domain vector is the conjugate transpose vector of the oversampled DFT vector.
可选地,频域向量是离散余弦变换(discrete cosine transform,DCT)向量。Optionally, the frequency domain vector is a discrete cosine transform (DCT) vector.
可选地,频域向量是DCT向量的共轭转置向量。Optionally, the frequency domain vector is a conjugate transpose vector of the DCT vector.
可选地,频域向量是过采样DCT向量。Optionally, the frequency domain vector is an oversampled DCT vector.
可选地,频域向量是过采样DCT向量的共轭转置向量。Optionally, the frequency domain vector is a conjugate transpose vector of the oversampled DCT vector.
在本申请实施例中,频域向量是双域压缩的反馈方式中用于构建预编码矩阵的向量之一。In the embodiment of the present application, the frequency domain vector is one of the vectors used to construct the precoding matrix in the feedback mode of dual domain compression.
9、空频矩阵:在本申请实施例中,空频矩阵可以理解为是用于确定每个子带对应的预编码矩阵或信道矩阵的一个中间量。对于终端设备来说,空频矩阵可以由每个子带对应的预编码矩阵或信道矩阵确定。对于网络设备来说,空频矩阵可以是由多个空域向量和频域向量(例如,空域向量与频域向量的共轭转置的乘积、或空域向量与频域向量的克罗内克尔积等,本申请包含但不限于此)的加权和得到,以用于恢复信道矩阵或预编码矩阵。9. Space-frequency matrix: In this embodiment of the application, the space-frequency matrix can be understood as an intermediate quantity used to determine the precoding matrix or the channel matrix corresponding to each subband. For the terminal device, the space-frequency matrix can be determined by the precoding matrix or the channel matrix corresponding to each subband. For network equipment, the space-frequency matrix can be composed of multiple space-domain vectors and frequency-domain vectors (for example, the product of the conjugate transpose of the space-domain vector and the frequency-domain vector, or the Kronecker of the space-domain vector and the frequency-domain vector). This application includes but is not limited to the weighted sum of the product, etc., to be used to restore the channel matrix or the precoding matrix.
例如,空频矩阵可以记作H,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000010
其中,w 0
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000011
是与N 3个子带对应的N 3个列向量,每个列向量可以是每个子带对应的预编码矩阵,各列向量的长度均可以为N s。该N 3个列向量分别对应N 3个子带的预编码向量。即空频矩阵可以视为将N 3个子带对应的预编码向量组合构成的联合矩阵。
For example, the space frequency matrix can be denoted as H,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000010
Where w 0 to
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000011
Is N 3 column vectors corresponding to N 3 subbands, each column vector can be a precoding matrix corresponding to each subband, and the length of each column vector can be N s . The N 3 column vectors respectively correspond to precoding vectors of N 3 subbands. That is, the space-frequency matrix can be regarded as a joint matrix formed by combining the precoding vectors corresponding to N 3 subbands.
如前所述,终端为了减小反馈,对所确定的预编码矩阵进行空域压缩和双域压缩,来对预编码矩阵进行压缩和量化。在低频系统中,由于端口之间具有较高的相关性,压缩效果较好。而在高频系统中,由于端口之间的相关性不好,压缩效果并不理想。如果采样类似的方案进行压缩和量化,反馈精度可能受到影响,造成较大的性能损失。As mentioned above, in order to reduce feedback, the terminal performs spatial compression and dual-domain compression on the determined precoding matrix to compress and quantize the precoding matrix. In the low frequency system, the compression effect is better due to the high correlation between the ports. In the high-frequency system, the compression effect is not ideal due to the poor correlation between the ports. If a similar scheme is sampled for compression and quantization, the feedback accuracy may be affected, resulting in greater performance loss.
有鉴于此,本申请提供一种方法,以期提高反馈精度,进而提高系统的传输性能。In view of this, the present application provides a method in order to improve the feedback accuracy, thereby improving the transmission performance of the system.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,在介绍本申请实施例之前,首先作出以下几点说明。In order to facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, before introducing the embodiments of the present application, the following points are described first.
第一,为便于理解本申请实施例,下面对下文实施例中涉及到的几个参数做详细说明。First, in order to facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, several parameters involved in the following embodiments will be described in detail below.
G:端口组数,G≥2且为整数。G: Number of port groups, G≥2 and an integer.
T:一个极化方向上的天线端口数。因此,对于双极化天线来说,端口数为2T。T≥1且为整数。在本申请实施例中,空域向量的维度假设为2T×1。T: The number of antenna ports in a polarization direction. Therefore, for a dual-polarized antenna, the number of ports is 2T. T≥1 and is an integer. In the embodiment of the present application, the dimension of the spatial vector is assumed to be 2T×1.
N 3:测量带宽中的子带数。N 3≥1且为整数。在本申请实施例中,频域向量的维度假设为N 3N 3 : The number of subbands in the measurement bandwidth. N 3 ≥1 and is an integer. In the embodiment of the present application, the dimension of the frequency domain vector is assumed to be N 3 .
R:终端设备基于信道测量而反馈的秩(rank)。在本申请实施例中,终端设备基于信道测量而反馈的秩可以等于传输层数。R: The rank (rank) fed back by the terminal device based on the channel measurement. In the embodiment of the present application, the rank fed back by the terminal device based on the channel measurement may be equal to the number of transmission layers.
第二,在本申请实施例中,为便于理解和说明,引入了“较强”、“较弱”等术语。其中,“较强”例如可以是指能量较大、功率较大或幅度较大等,“较弱”例如可以是指能量较小、功率较小或幅度较小等。应理解,这些术语仅为便于理解而引入,不应对本申请构 成任何限定。Second, in the embodiments of the present application, terms such as "stronger" and "weaker" are introduced for ease of understanding and description. Among them, "stronger" may, for example, mean greater energy, greater power, or greater amplitude, and "weaker", for example, may mean less energy, less power, or greater amplitude. It should be understood that these terms are only introduced for ease of understanding and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
第三,在本申请实施例中,为便于理解和说明,以离散傅里叶变换(Discrete Fourier Transform,DFT)、DFT基底、离散余弦变换(discrete cosine transform,DCT)、DCT基底为例说明了终端设备对码本系数进行压缩的过程。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。可用于终端设备对码本系数进行压缩的基底和相应的方式并不限于上文所列举。例如,可以由辛格(sinc)函数生成的基底。又例如,基底或基底计算方式可以预先定义。例如,协议或网络设备可以直接定义对应于不同端口数量的基底(即,不明确指定采用DCT、DFT等基底类型)。类似地,终端设备可以基于相应的基底和基底计算方式进行量化和上报。Third, in the embodiments of the present application, for ease of understanding and explanation, discrete Fourier Transform (DFT), DFT basis, discrete cosine transform (DCT), and DCT basis are taken as examples. The process in which the terminal equipment compresses the codebook coefficients. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application. The basis and corresponding methods that can be used for terminal equipment to compress codebook coefficients are not limited to those listed above. For example, a basis can be generated by a sinc function. For another example, the base or base calculation method can be predefined. For example, the protocol or the network device can directly define the base corresponding to the number of different ports (that is, the base type such as DCT, DFT, etc. is not explicitly specified). Similarly, the terminal device can quantify and report based on the corresponding base and base calculation method.
第四,在本申请实施例中,“用于指示”可以包括用于直接指示和用于间接指示。例如,当描述某一指示信息用于指示信息I时,可以包括该指示信息直接指示I或间接指示I,而并不代表该指示信息中一定携带有I。Fourth, in the embodiments of the present application, "used to indicate" may include used for direct indication and used for indirect indication. For example, when it is described that a certain indication information is used to indicate information I, the indication information may directly indicate I or indirectly indicate I, but it does not mean that I must be carried in the indication information.
将指示信息所指示的信息称为待指示信息,则具体实现过程中,对待指示信息进行指示的方式有很多种,例如但不限于,可以直接指示待指示信息,如待指示信息本身或者该待指示信息的索引等。也可以通过指示其他信息来间接指示待指示信息,其中该其他信息与待指示信息之间存在关联关系。还可以仅仅指示待指示信息的一部分,而待指示信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约定的。例如,还可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的指示,从而在一定程度上降低指示开销。同时,还可以识别各个信息的通用部分并统一指示,以降低单独指示同样的信息而带来的指示开销。例如,本领域的技术人员应当明白,预编码矩阵是由预编码向量组成的,预编码矩阵中的各个预编码向量,在组成或者其他属性方面,可能存在相同的部分。The information indicated by the instruction information is called the information to be indicated. In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to indicate the information to be indicated. For example, but not limited to, the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated or the information to be indicated. Indicates the index of the information, etc. The information to be indicated can also be indicated indirectly by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance. For example, it is also possible to realize the indication of specific information by means of the pre-arranged order (for example, stipulated in the agreement) of the various information, thereby reducing the indication overhead to a certain extent. At the same time, it can also identify the common parts of each information and uniformly indicate, so as to reduce the instruction overhead caused by separately indicating the same information. For example, those skilled in the art should understand that the precoding matrix is composed of precoding vectors, and each precoding vector in the precoding matrix may have the same parts in terms of composition or other attributes.
此外,具体的指示方式还可以是现有各种指示方式,例如但不限于,上述指示方式及其各种组合等。各种指示方式的具体细节可以参考现有技术,本文不再赘述。由上文所述可知,举例来说,当需要指示相同类型的多个信息时,可能会出现不同信息的指示方式不相同的情形。具体实现过程中,可以根据具体的需要选择所需的指示方式,本申请实施例对选择的指示方式不做限定。如此一来,本申请实施例涉及的指示方式应理解为涵盖可以使得待指示方获知待指示信息的各种方法。In addition, the specific instruction manner may also be various existing instruction manners, such as but not limited to the foregoing instruction manners and various combinations thereof. For the specific details of the various indication methods, reference may be made to the prior art, which will not be repeated here. It can be seen from the foregoing that, for example, when multiple pieces of information of the same type need to be indicated, a situation where different information is indicated in different ways may occur. In the specific implementation process, the required indication mode can be selected according to specific needs, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the selected indication mode. In this way, the instruction methods involved in the embodiments of the present application should be understood to cover various methods that enable the party to be instructed to learn the information to be instructed.
此外,待指示信息可能存在其他等价形式,例如行向量可以表现为列向量,一个矩阵可以通过该矩阵的转置矩阵来表示,一个矩阵也可以表现为向量或者数组的形式,该向量或者数组可以由该矩阵的各个行向量或者列向量相互连接而成,两个向量的克罗内克尔积也可以通过一个向量与另一个向量的转置向量的乘积等形式来表现等。本申请实施例提供的技术方案应理解为涵盖各种形式。举例来说,本申请实施例涉及的部分或者全部特性,应理解为涵盖该特性的各种表现形式。In addition, the information to be indicated may have other equivalent forms. For example, a row vector can be expressed as a column vector, a matrix can be expressed by the transpose matrix of the matrix, and a matrix can also be expressed in the form of a vector or an array. It can be formed by connecting each row vector or column vector of the matrix, and the Kronecker product of two vectors can also be expressed in the form of the product of one vector and the transposed vector of the other vector. The technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application should be understood to cover various forms. For example, some or all of the characteristics involved in the embodiments of the present application should be understood to cover various manifestations of the characteristics.
待指示信息可以作为一个整体一起发送,也可以分成多个子信息分开发送,而且这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以相同,也可以不同。具体发送方法本申请不进行限定。其中,这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以是预先定义的,例如根据协议预先定义的,也可以是发射端设备通过向接收端设备发送配置信息来配置的。其中,该配置信息可以例如但不限于包括无线资源控制信令,例如无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令、媒体接入控制(medium access control,MAC)层信令,例如MAC-信息元 素(control element,CE),和物理层信令,例如下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)中的一种或者至少两种的组合。The information to be instructed can be sent together as a whole, or divided into multiple sub-information to be sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information can be the same or different. The specific sending method is not limited in this application. The sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to a protocol, or configured by the transmitting end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device. Wherein, the configuration information may include, but is not limited to, radio resource control signaling, such as radio resource control (RRC) signaling, medium access control (MAC) layer signaling, such as MAC-information Element (control element, CE), and physical layer signaling, such as one or a combination of at least two of downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI).
第五,在本申请实施例中,为便于描述,在涉及编号时,可以从0开始连续编号。例如,Z个传输层可以包括第0个传输层至第Z-1个传输层。以此类推,这里不再一一举例说明。当然,具体实现时不限于此,例如,也可以从1开始连续编号。例如,Z个传输层可以包括第1个传输层至第Z个传输层,等等。Fifth, in the embodiments of the present application, for ease of description, when serial numbers are involved, serial numbers can be started from 0. For example, the Z transmission layers may include the 0th transmission layer to the Z-1th transmission layer. By analogy, here is no longer an example one by one. Of course, the specific implementation is not limited to this, for example, it can also be numbered consecutively starting from 1. For example, the Z transmission layers may include the 1st transmission layer to the Zth transmission layer, and so on.
应理解,上文所述均为便于描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案而进行的设置,而并非用于限制本申请的范围。It should be understood that the above descriptions are all settings to facilitate the description of the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, and are not used to limit the scope of the present application.
第六,在下文示出的实施例中,第一、第二以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。例如,区分不同的信息等。Sixth, in the embodiments shown below, the first, second, and various numerical numbers are only for easy distinction for description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, distinguish different information, etc.
第七,本申请实施例中涉及的“协议”可以是指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。Seventh, the “protocols” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, for example, may include the LTE protocol, the NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
第八,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a、b和c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,或,b,或,c,或,a和b,或,a和c,或,b和c,或,a、b和c。其中a、b和c分别可以是单个,也可以是多个。Eighth, "at least one" refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. "The following at least one item (a)" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a). For example, at least one of a, b, and c can mean: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , B, and c. Among them, a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
第九,在本申请实施例中,“当……时”、“在……的情况下”、“若”以及“如果”等描述均指在某种客观情况下设备(如,终端设备或者网络设备)会做出相应的处理,并非是限定时间,且也不要求设备(如,终端设备或者网络设备)在实现时一定要有判断的动作,也不意味着存在其它限定。Ninth, in the embodiments of this application, descriptions such as "when...", "under the condition of...", "if" and "if" all refer to equipment (such as terminal equipment or The network device will make the corresponding processing, which is not a time limit, and the device (such as a terminal device or a network device) is not required to have a judging action when it is implemented, nor does it mean that there are other restrictions.
下面将结合附图详细说明本申请实施例提供的预编码矩阵的处理方法。The processing method of the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
应理解,本申请实施例提供的方法可以应用于通过多天线技术通信的系统。例如,图1中所示的通信系统100。该通信系统可以包括至少一个网络设备和至少一个终端设备。网络设备和终端设备之间可通过多天线技术通信。It should be understood that the method provided in the embodiments of the present application can be applied to a system that communicates through multi-antenna technology. For example, the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1. The communication system may include at least one network device and at least one terminal device. Multi-antenna technology can be used to communicate between network equipment and terminal equipment.
还应理解,本申请实施例提供的方法并不仅限于网络设备与终端设备之间的通信,还可应用于终端设备与终端设备之间的通信等。本申请对于该方法所应用的场景并不做限定。下文示出的实施例中,仅为便于理解和说明,以网络设备与终端设备之间的交互为例详细说明本申请实施例提供的方法。It should also be understood that the method provided in the embodiments of the present application is not limited to the communication between the network device and the terminal device, and can also be applied to the communication between the terminal device and the terminal device. This application does not limit the application scenarios of this method. In the embodiments shown below, only for ease of understanding and description, the interaction between a network device and a terminal device is taken as an example to describe in detail the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application.
还应理解,下文示出的实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定,只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可,例如。本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备,或者,是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。It should also be understood that the embodiments shown below do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the method provided by the embodiments of the present application, as long as the program that records the code of the method provided by the embodiments of the present application can be executed according to the present application. The method provided in the application embodiment can be used for communication, for example. The execution subject of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or the network device that can call and execute the program.
图2是从设备交互的角度示出的本申请一实施例提供的预编码矩阵的处理方法200的示意性流程图。如图2所示,该方法200可以包括步骤210至步骤260。FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method 200 for processing a precoding matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application from the perspective of device interaction. As shown in FIG. 2, the method 200 may include step 210 to step 260.
在步骤210中,终端设备确定预编码矩阵的码本系数。In step 210, the terminal device determines the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix.
如前所述,终端设备可以基于接收到的参考信号估计下行信道,并基于估计所得的信道矩阵确定预编码矩阵。该预编码矩阵中的每一行可以对应于一个天线端口,每一列可以对应于一个传输层。该预编码矩阵的维度为端口数×传输层数。As mentioned above, the terminal device can estimate the downlink channel based on the received reference signal, and determine the precoding matrix based on the estimated channel matrix. Each row in the precoding matrix may correspond to one antenna port, and each column may correspond to one transmission layer. The dimension of the precoding matrix is the number of ports × the number of transmission layers.
这里的端口数具体可以是指发送端(如网络设备)的端口数。通常情况下,网络设备的发射天线为双极化方向的发射天线,因此端口数可以记为2T。传输层数可以记为R。则该预编码矩阵的维度为2T×R。可以理解的是,该预编码矩阵是与子带对应的预编码矩阵。The number of ports here may specifically refer to the number of ports on the sending end (such as a network device). Under normal circumstances, the transmitting antenna of the network device is a transmitting antenna with dual polarization directions, so the number of ports can be recorded as 2T. The number of transmission layers can be denoted as R. Then the dimension of the precoding matrix is 2T×R. It can be understood that the precoding matrix is a precoding matrix corresponding to a subband.
假设该预编码矩阵记为:Suppose the precoding matrix is denoted as:
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000012
其中,前T行对应于第一极化方向,前T行中的每一行是对应于第一极化方向上的每个端口的权值;后T行对应于第二极化方向,后T行中的每一行可以是对应于第二极化方向上的每个端口的权值。换句话说,该预编码矩阵中的每一行是对应于一个端口的码本系数。Among them, the first T row corresponds to the first polarization direction, each row in the first T row corresponds to the weight of each port in the first polarization direction; the last T row corresponds to the second polarization direction, and the last T row corresponds to the weight of each port in the first polarization direction. Each row in the row may be a weight corresponding to each port in the second polarization direction. In other words, each row in the precoding matrix is a codebook coefficient corresponding to one port.
在步骤220中,终端设备对该预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,得到G个端口组。In step 220, the terminal device groups the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain G port groups.
可以理解,预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,也就是上述与码本系数对应的端口。以上文列举的预编码矩阵为例,该预编码矩阵对应的端口为2T个。终端设备可以对该2T个端口分组。It can be understood that the port group corresponding to the precoding matrix is the aforementioned port corresponding to the codebook coefficient. The precoding matrix listed above is taken as an example, and there are 2T ports corresponding to the precoding matrix. The terminal device can group the 2T ports.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以基于网络设备的指示或预定义的规则对2T个端口分组,得到G个端口组。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device may group 2T ports based on instructions from the network device or predefined rules to obtain G port groups.
可选地,步骤220具体包括:Optionally, step 220 specifically includes:
步骤2201,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一信息,该第一信息用于指示以下一项或多项:端口组数G,G个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口数,以及G个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口;以及Step 2201: The terminal device receives first information from the network device. The first information is used to indicate one or more of the following: the number of port groups G, the number of ports contained in each port group in the G port groups, and G The ports contained in each port group in the port group; and
步骤2202,该终端设备对该预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,得到G个端口组。Step 2202: The terminal device groups the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain G port groups.
相应地,在步骤2201中,网络设备向终端设备发送上述第一信息。终端设备可以根据该网络设备发送的第一信息对端口分组。换言之,该第一信息可以理解为网络设备向终端设备发送的端口组配置。Correspondingly, in step 2201, the network device sends the above-mentioned first information to the terminal device. The terminal device may group the ports according to the first information sent by the network device. In other words, the first information can be understood as the port group configuration sent by the network device to the terminal device.
作为一个示例,该第一信息用于指示端口组数G,终端设备可以根据该端口组数G,将该预编码矩阵对应的2T个端口分为G个端口组。也就是说,网络设备可以仅指示端口组数G。As an example, the first information is used to indicate the number of port groups G, and the terminal device can divide the 2T ports corresponding to the precoding matrix into G port groups according to the number of port groups G. In other words, the network device may only indicate the port group number G.
终端设备可以根据预定义的规则,将该2T个端口分为G个端口组。具体地,终端设备对2T个端口分组的规则可以是协议预定义;或者,预配置在终端设备中的。本申请对此不作限定。基于预定义的规则,终端设备可以确定端口如何分组,即,确定端口组的划分方式。The terminal device can divide the 2T ports into G port groups according to predefined rules. Specifically, the rule for the terminal device to group 2T ports may be pre-defined by the protocol; or pre-configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this. Based on the predefined rules, the terminal device can determine how the ports are grouped, that is, determine how the port groups are divided.
该规则例如可以是:根据码本系数与门限值(为便于区分和说明,例如记作第一门限值)的大小关系分组。其中,该第一门限值例如可以是R15的空域压缩码本或R16的双域压缩码本中的各端口对应的码本系数(比如幅度、能量(或者说功率)等),或者也可以是type II的端口选择(port selection)码本中的宽带幅度系数。本申请对此不作限定。The rule may be, for example, grouping according to the magnitude relationship between the codebook coefficient and the threshold value (for easy distinction and description, for example, the first threshold value). Wherein, the first threshold value may be, for example, the codebook coefficient (such as amplitude, energy (or power), etc.) corresponding to each port in the space-domain compressed codebook of R15 or the dual-domain compressed codebook of R16, or it may also be It is the wideband amplitude coefficient in the port selection codebook of type II. This application does not limit this.
例如,码本系数(或宽带幅度系数)大于或等于该第一门限值的端口为一个组,小于该第一门限值的端口为一个组。For example, ports whose codebook coefficients (or wideband amplitude coefficients) are greater than or equal to the first threshold value are a group, and ports whose codebook coefficients (or wideband amplitude coefficients) are greater than or equal to the first threshold value are a group.
需要说明的是,在R15的空域压缩码本或R16的双域压缩码本中,终端设备可以根据同一端口在各子带的码本系数的平均值或其他统计值,来确定各端口的码本系数与第一门限值的大小关系。具体实现方式本申请不作限定。It should be noted that in the spatial compression codebook of R15 or the dual-domain compressed codebook of R16, the terminal device can determine the code of each port according to the average value of the codebook coefficients of the same port in each subband or other statistical values. The relationship between this coefficient and the first threshold value. The specific implementation manner is not limited in this application.
该规则例如也可以是,对每个极化方向的端口平均分组,如按照端口号的排序分组,或,按照码本系数的大小关系分组等。The rule may also be, for example, grouping the ports in each polarization direction equally, such as grouping according to the order of port numbers, or grouping according to the magnitude relationship of the codebook coefficients.
比如,网络设备指示端口组数G为2。终端设备可以将码本系数大于或等于第一门限值的端口归为一组,剩下的端口归为一组。该第一门限值例如可以是幅度、能量(或者说功率)等。本申请对此不作限定。该第一门限值例如可以是网络设备通过信令指示的,如通过第一指示信息或其他信令指示;该第一门限值也可以是预定义的,如协议预定义等。本申请对此不作限定。For example, the network device indicates that the number of port groups G is 2. The terminal device may group ports whose codebook coefficients are greater than or equal to the first threshold value into one group, and group the remaining ports into one group. The first threshold value may be, for example, amplitude, energy (or power), and the like. This application does not limit this. The first threshold value may be, for example, indicated by the network device through signaling, such as indicated by first indication information or other signaling; the first threshold value may also be predefined, such as protocol predefined. This application does not limit this.
又比如,终端设备可以对2T个端口平均分组。比如,网络设备指示端口组数G为4。协议可以预定义终端设备进行端口分组的规则。该规则例如可以是:终端设备可以将第一极化方向的端口平均分为两组,将第二极化方向的端口平均分为两组。对于每个极化方向的端口,终端设备可以按照码本系数的大小关系来分组,比如将较大幅度或功率的前T/2个端口归为一组,将剩余T/2个端口归为一组。或者,终端设备也可以将端口号按序排列,如按从大到小或从小到大的顺序排列,将前T/2个端口归为一组,后T/2个端口归为一组。For another example, the terminal device can evenly group 2T ports. For example, the network device indicates that the number of port groups G is 4. The protocol can predefine the rules for port grouping by terminal devices. The rule may be, for example, that the terminal device may equally divide the ports in the first polarization direction into two groups, and divide the ports in the second polarization direction into two groups. For each port in the polarization direction, the terminal equipment can be grouped according to the size relationship of the codebook coefficient, for example, the first T/2 ports with larger amplitude or power are grouped together, and the remaining T/2 ports are grouped as One group. Alternatively, the terminal device may also arrange the port numbers in order, such as sorting from largest to smallest or from smallest to largest, grouping the first T/2 ports into a group, and the last T/2 ports into a group.
当然,终端设备也可以将较大幅度或功率的前2T/3个端口归为一组,将剩余T/3个端口归为一组。本申请对于每个端口组中包含的端口数不作限定。Of course, the terminal device can also group the first 2T/3 ports with a larger amplitude or power into one group, and group the remaining T/3 ports into one group. This application does not limit the number of ports included in each port group.
再比如,终端设备可以根据端口数T与第二门限值的关系,在端口数2T小于(或小于或等于)第二门限值的情况下,将第一个端口归为一组,将剩余的端口归为一组。端口数2T大于或等于(或大于)第二门限值时,由网络设备或终端设备按照其他的端口组划分方式(例如本申请中提供的其他划分方式)进行分组。For another example, according to the relationship between the number of ports T and the second threshold, the terminal device can group the first port into a group when the number of ports 2T is less than (or less than or equal to) the second threshold. The remaining ports are grouped together. When the number of ports 2T is greater than or equal to (or greater than) the second threshold, the network devices or terminal devices are grouped according to other port group division methods (such as other division methods provided in this application).
终端设备也可以从网络设备预先通过信令指示的多种可能的划分方式中,或者从预先定义的多种可能的划分方式中,选择其中一种划分方式进行分组,并将所选择的划分方式上报给网络设备。例如,协议或网络设备下发的配置信息中可以定义以下两种划分方式:一、同极化方向上端口号为奇数的端口为一组,同极化方向上端口号为偶数的端口为一组,不同极化极化方向上的端口在不同的组;二、同极化方向上的端口中端口号靠前的一半端口为一组,同极化方向上的端口中端口号靠后的一半端口为一组,不同极化方向上的端口在不同的组。然后终端设备选择其中一种划分方式进行使用,并将所采用的划分方式上报给网络设备。The terminal device can also select one of the possible division methods from the multiple possible division methods indicated by the network equipment through signaling in advance, or from the pre-defined multiple possible division methods, and group the selected division methods. Report to the network device. For example, the following two division methods can be defined in the configuration information issued by the protocol or network equipment: 1. Ports with an odd number in the same polarization direction are a group, and ports with an even number in the same polarization direction are one. Group, the ports in different polarization directions are in different groups; 2. The port number in the front half of the port in the same polarization direction is a group, and the port number in the port in the same polarization direction is lower in the group. Half of the ports are in a group, and ports in different polarization directions are in different groups. Then the terminal device selects one of the division methods for use, and reports the adopted division method to the network device.
应理解,该第一信息对该端口组数G的指示可以是显式指示,例如指示具体的端口组数G的取值,或者与端口组数G取值对应的标识或索引等。该第一信息对端口组数G的指示也可以是隐式指示。例如根据端口数与门限值(为便于区分和说明,例如记作第三门 限值)的关系确定端口组数G。It should be understood that the indication of the port group number G by the first information may be an explicit indication, such as indicating the value of a specific port group number G, or an identifier or index corresponding to the value of the port group number G. The indication of the number G of port groups by the first information may also be an implicit indication. For example, the number of port groups G is determined according to the relationship between the number of ports and the threshold value (for easy distinction and description, for example, the third threshold value).
其中,第三门限值可以为一个,也可以为多个。本申请对此不作限定。Among them, the third threshold value may be one or multiple. This application does not limit this.
举例来说,第三门限值包括N1和N2,N1<N2。当端口数2T>N1(或2T≥N1)时,端口分组数量G1;当端口数2T>N2(或2T≥N2)时,端口分组数量为G2,G2>G1;当端口数2T≤N1(或2T<N1)时,不进行分组。应理解,上文所列举的多种可能的端口组划分方式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于端口组数G以及终端设备对端口分组的具体方式均不作限定。例如,终端设备也可以将端口号为奇数的端口归为一组,端口号为偶数的端口归为一组,等等。For example, the third threshold value includes N1 and N2, and N1<N2. When the number of ports 2T>N1 (or 2T≥N1), the number of port groups is G1; when the number of ports 2T>N2 (or 2T≥N2), the number of port groups is G2, G2>G1; when the number of ports 2T≤N1( Or when 2T<N1), no grouping is performed. It should be understood that the multiple possible port group division manners listed above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the number of port groups G and the specific manner in which the terminal device groups the ports. For example, the terminal device may also group ports with odd port numbers into a group, and group ports with even port numbers into a group, and so on.
此外,上文仅为便于理解,以两个极化方向上的端口数2T为例详细说明了终端设备分组的过程。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。上述分组和分组数量确定规则也可以根据一个极化方向上的端口数T确定。In addition, the above is only for ease of understanding, and the process of grouping terminal devices is described in detail by taking 2T of the number of ports in the two polarization directions as an example. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application. The foregoing grouping and grouping number determination rules may also be determined according to the number T of ports in a polarization direction.
作为另一个示例,该第一信息用于指示每个端口组中包含的端口数。该终端设备可以根据每个端口组中包含的端口数,对该预编码矩阵对应的2T个端口分组。也就是说,网络设备也可以仅指示每个端口组包含的端口数。As another example, the first information is used to indicate the number of ports included in each port group. The terminal device may group the 2T ports corresponding to the precoding matrix according to the number of ports included in each port group. In other words, the network device may also only indicate the number of ports included in each port group.
终端设备可以根据预定义的规则,对该2T个端口分组。其中,端口组数G例如可以由终端设备自行确定,比如根据端口数的多少来确定。比如结合上述示例,端口数2T小于某一门限值(如,第三门限值)时,将2T个端口组分为两组,即G为2;否则将该2T个端口组分为四组,即G为4。The terminal device can group the 2T ports according to predefined rules. Wherein, the number of port groups G can be determined by the terminal device itself, for example, according to the number of ports. For example, in combination with the above example, when the number of ports 2T is less than a certain threshold (for example, the third threshold), the 2T ports are grouped into two groups, that is, G is 2; otherwise, the 2T port groups are divided into four Group, that is, G is 4.
或者,端口组数G也可以是预定义的。例如协议预定义端口组数G,或者,协议预定义确定端口组数G的规则。Alternatively, the number of port groups G may also be predefined. For example, the protocol predefines the number of port groups G, or the protocol predefines a rule for determining the number of port groups G.
终端设备可以根据该预定义的规则,确定端口组数G,进而将该2T个端口分为G个端口组。由于上文已经结合多个示例详细说明了终端设备将2T个端口分为G个端口组的具体方法,为了简洁,这里不再重复。The terminal device can determine the number of port groups G according to the predefined rule, and then divide the 2T ports into G port groups. Since the above has described in detail the specific method for the terminal device to divide the 2T ports into G port groups in combination with multiple examples, for brevity, it is not repeated here.
作为又一个示例,该第一信息用于指示端口组数G和每个端口组中包含的端口数。该终端设备可以根据该端口组数和每个端口组中包含的端口数,将该预编码矩阵对应的2T个端口分为G个端口组。也就是说,网络设备可以指示端口组数G和每个端口组中包含的端口数。As another example, the first information is used to indicate the number of port groups G and the number of ports included in each port group. The terminal device can divide the 2T ports corresponding to the precoding matrix into G port groups according to the number of port groups and the number of ports included in each port group. In other words, the network device can indicate the number of port groups G and the number of ports included in each port group.
由于上文已经结合多个示例详细说明了终端设备将2T个端口分为G个端口组的具体方法,为了简洁,这里不再重复。Since the above has described in detail the specific method for the terminal device to divide the 2T ports into G port groups in combination with multiple examples, for brevity, it is not repeated here.
可选地,步骤220具体包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一信息,该第一信息用于指示每个端口组中包含的端口;该终端设备根据该第一指示信息,对2T个端口分组,以得到G个端口组。也就是说,网络设备可以直接指示终端设备如何对该2T个端口分组。Optionally, step 220 specifically includes: the terminal device receives first information from the network device, where the first information is used to indicate the ports included in each port group; the terminal device responds to 2T ports according to the first indication information. Group to obtain G port groups. In other words, the network device can directly instruct the terminal device how to group the 2T ports.
网络设备可以通过多种不同的方式来指示每个端口组中包含的端口。Network devices can indicate the ports included in each port group in many different ways.
在一种实现方式中,该第一信息对每个端口组中包含的端口的指示可以是字符串。网络设备可以通过字符串来指示每个端口组中包含的端口。示例性地,该字符串可以包括2T个比特,以与2T个端口对应。每个比特对应于一个端口。该2T个端口可按照预设规则按序排列,比如按照端口号由小到大或由大到小的顺序依次排列。每个端口所对应的比特可用于指示该端口所属的端口组。In an implementation manner, the indication of the ports included in each port group by the first information may be a character string. The network device can indicate the ports contained in each port group through a character string. Exemplarily, the character string may include 2T bits to correspond to 2T ports. Each bit corresponds to a port. The 2T ports can be arranged in sequence according to a preset rule, for example, according to the order of port numbers from small to large or from large to small. The bit corresponding to each port can be used to indicate the port group to which the port belongs.
比如T为4,则2T个端口为8个端口。该8个端口的端口号例如为0、1、2、3、4、 5、6、7。该8个端口可对应于字符串“11011101”。端口号为0、1、3、4、5、7发端口为一个端口组,端口号为2和6的端口为另一个端口组。可以看到,该字符串在用于指示每个端口组中包含的端口的同时,也隐式地指示了端口组数G和每个端口组中包含的端口数。For example, if T is 4, 2T ports are 8 ports. The port numbers of the eight ports are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7, for example. The 8 ports can correspond to the character string "11011101". Port numbers 0, 1, 3, 4, 5, and 7 send ports as a port group, and ports with port numbers 2 and 6 are another port group. It can be seen that while the string is used to indicate the ports included in each port group, it also implicitly indicates the number of port groups G and the number of ports included in each port group.
在另一种实现方式中,该第一信息对每个端口组中包含的端口的指示可以是对端口组划分方式的指示。网络设备可通过某一个端口组划分方式所对应的指示来通知终端设备如何对2T个端口分组。In another implementation manner, the indication of the ports included in each port group by the first information may be an indication of the way of dividing the port group. The network device can notify the terminal device how to group the 2T ports through an indication corresponding to a certain port group division method.
下表中示出了端口组与所包含的端口之间的映射关系。可以看到,表中每个指示可以与一种端口组划分方式对应。当网络设备指示了其中的某一种划分方式,终端设备便可以按照该划分方式对2T个端口分组。The following table shows the mapping relationship between the port group and the contained ports. It can be seen that each indication in the table can correspond to a port group division method. When the network device indicates one of the division methods, the terminal device can group the 2T ports according to the division method.
指示Instructions 端口组划分方式Port group division method
00 [端口a,端口b],[端口c,端口d,端口e],[端口f,端口g][Port a, port b], [port c, port d, port e], [port f, port g]
11 [端口a,端口b,端口c],[端口d,端口e],[端口f,端口g][Port a, port b, port c], [port d, port e], [port f, port g]
可以看到,该端口组划分方式的指示在用于指示如何划分端口的同时,也隐式地知识了端口组数G和每个端口组中包含的端口数。It can be seen that while the port group division method is used to indicate how to divide the ports, it also implicitly knows the number of port groups G and the number of ports contained in each port group.
应理解,上文列表仅为便于理解而示例,本申请对于端口组的数量以及具体的划分方式不作限定。It should be understood that the above list is only an example for ease of understanding, and this application does not limit the number of port groups and the specific division manner.
在又一种实现方式中,网络设备可以通过第一信息来指示以下至少一项:每个端口组中包含的端口数、每个端口组中的首个端口号和每个端口组中的末个端口号。In another implementation manner, the network device may indicate at least one of the following through the first information: the number of ports included in each port group, the first port number in each port group, and the last port in each port group. Port numbers.
在这种实现方式中,网络设备和终端设备可以按照相同的规则来对2T个端口进行排序。比如,按照端口号由小到大或由大到小的顺序来排序。本申请对于该排序的具体规则不作限定。该排序方式例如可以是双方协商好的,或者也可以是协议预定义的,本申请对此不作限定。In this implementation, the network device and the terminal device can sort the 2T ports according to the same rule. For example, sort the port numbers in ascending or descending order. This application does not limit the specific rules for this sorting. The ordering method may be negotiated between the two parties, or may also be pre-defined by the agreement, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,该第一信息对每个端口组中包含的端口的指示例如可以是:每个端口组中包含的端口数和每个端口组中的末个端口号。Optionally, the indication of the ports included in each port group by the first information may be, for example, the number of ports included in each port group and the last port number in each port group.
举例来说,假设端口数为8,即2T=8。该8个端口的端口号如可以是0至7这8个连续的端口号。若第一信息指示端口号0,4,6,则可以确定该8个端口可以按照[端口0],[端口1至端口4],[端口5至端口6],[端口7]的方式来分组。For example, suppose the number of ports is 8, that is, 2T=8. The port numbers of the eight ports can be, for example, eight consecutive port numbers from 0 to 7. If the first information indicates port numbers 0, 4, 6, then it can be determined that the 8 ports can follow the methods of [Port 0], [Port 1 to Port 4], [Port 5 to Port 6], [Port 7] Grouping.
由于终端设备预先确定端口数为8,则可以确定将端口7单独归为一个端口组。Since the terminal device pre-determined the number of ports as 8, it can be determined that port 7 is separately classified as a port group.
可选地,该第一信息对每个端口组中包含的端口的指示例如可以是:每个端口组中的端口数量和首个端口号。Optionally, the indication of the ports included in each port group by the first information may be, for example, the number of ports in each port group and the first port number.
举例来说,假设端口数为8,即,2T=8。该8个端口的端口号如可以是0至7这8个连续的端口号。若第一信息指示端口号0和4,并指示每个端口组中的端口数2,2。则终端设备可以确定将8个端口在每个极化方向上分为2组,每组包括2个端口。终端设备可以按照[端口0和端口1],[端口2和端口3],[端口4和端口5],[端口6和端口7]的方式来分组。For example, suppose that the number of ports is 8, that is, 2T=8. The port numbers of the eight ports can be, for example, eight consecutive port numbers from 0 to 7. If the first information indicates port numbers 0 and 4, and indicates the number of ports in each port group 2, 2. The terminal device can determine that the 8 ports are divided into 2 groups in each polarization direction, and each group includes 2 ports. Terminal devices can be grouped according to [Port 0 and Port 1], [Port 2 and Port 3], [Port 4 and Port 5], [Port 6 and Port 7].
可选地,该第一信息对每个端口组中包含的端口的指示例如可以是:其中一个端口组的首个端口号或末个端口号。Optionally, the indication of the ports included in each port group by the first information may be, for example, the first port number or the last port number of one of the port groups.
举例来说,假设协议预定义将2T个端口分为2个端口组,则该第一信息可以指示第一个端口组的末个端口号或第二个端口组的首个端口号。例如,该第一信息指示第一个端口组的末个端口号为M1,则终端设备可以按照[端口0至端口M1],[端口M1+1,端口2T-1]的方式来分组。For example, if the protocol predefines that 2T ports are divided into 2 port groups, the first information may indicate the last port number of the first port group or the first port number of the second port group. For example, the first information indicates that the last port number of the first port group is M1, and the terminal devices can be grouped in the manner of [port 0 to port M1], [port M1+1, port 2T-1].
其中M1的取值可以小于或等于2T-1,也可以大于2T-1。在M1>2T-1的情况下,可以将超出2T-1的端口号从端口0开始计数。The value of M1 can be less than or equal to 2T-1, or greater than 2T-1. In the case of M1>2T-1, the port numbers exceeding 2T-1 can be counted from port 0.
可选地,该第一信息对每个端口组中包含的端口的指示例如可以是:每个端口组中的首个端口号和末个端口号。Optionally, the indication of the ports included in each port group by the first information may be, for example, the first port number and the last port number in each port group.
举例来说,假设端口数为8,即,2T=8。该8个端口的端口号如可以是0至7这8个连续的端口号。若第一信息指示端口号(0,5)和(6,7),则终端设备可以确定将该8个端口分为2个端口组。终端设备可以按照[端口0至端口5],[端口6和端口7]的方式来分组。For example, suppose that the number of ports is 8, that is, 2T=8. The port numbers of the eight ports can be, for example, eight consecutive port numbers from 0 to 7. If the first information indicates the port numbers (0, 5) and (6, 7), the terminal device can determine that the 8 ports are divided into 2 port groups. Terminal devices can be grouped according to [Port 0 to Port 5], [Port 6 and Port 7].
应理解,上文所列举的第一信息对每个端口组中包含的端口的指示仅为便于理解而示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于该第一信息对每个端口组中包含的端口的指示的具体方式不作限定。It should be understood that the indication of the ports included in each port group by the first information listed above is only an example for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the specific manner of the first information indicating the ports included in each port group.
在一种可能的设计中,该第一信息例如可以携带在高层信令中。In a possible design, the first information may be carried in high-layer signaling, for example.
该高层信令例如可以是RRC消息。作为示例而非限定,该RRC消息具体可以是CSI上报配置(CSIReportConfig)。也就是说,网络设备可以针对每个CSI上报配置指示以下一项或多项信息:端口组数G、每个端口组中包含的端口数以及每个端口组中包含的端口。此情况下,该第一信息可以理解为是静态配置的端口组配置。The high-level signaling may be, for example, an RRC message. As an example and not a limitation, the RRC message may specifically be CSI report configuration (CSIReportConfig). That is, the network device may indicate one or more of the following information for each CSI report configuration: the number of port groups G, the number of ports included in each port group, and the ports included in each port group. In this case, the first information can be understood as a statically configured port group configuration.
该高层信令例如也可以是MAC-CE。作为一个示例,该MAC-CE可以包括小区标识、关联信息和上述第一信息。其中,关联信息用于指示分组对象,或者说,用于指示该第一信息的配置对象。该关联信息例如可以是CSI上报配置的索引。终端设备可以根据该CSI上报配置的索引,基于第一信息对该索引关联的CSI上报配置中配置的端口进行分组。此情况下,该第一信息可以理解为是半静态配置的端口组配置。The high-level signaling may also be MAC-CE, for example. As an example, the MAC-CE may include a cell identity, association information, and the foregoing first information. Wherein, the associated information is used to indicate the grouping object, or in other words, the configuration object of the first information. The associated information may be, for example, the index of the CSI report configuration. The terminal device may group the ports configured in the CSI reporting configuration associated with the index based on the index of the CSI reporting configuration based on the first information. In this case, the first information can be understood as a semi-statically configured port group configuration.
在另一种可能的设计中,该第一信息可以携带在物理层信令中。In another possible design, the first information may be carried in physical layer signaling.
该物理层信令例如可以是DCI。此情况下,该第一信息可以理解为是动态配置的端口组配置。The physical layer signaling may be DCI, for example. In this case, the first information can be understood as a dynamically configured port group configuration.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以自行对2T个端口分组,得到G个端口组。In another possible implementation manner, the terminal device can group 2T ports by itself to obtain G port groups.
如前所述,端口组数G可以是预先定义的,如协议预定义。终端设备可以根据预定义的规则将2T个端口分为G个端口组。上文中已经结合多个示例详细说明了终端设备根据预定义的规则对端口分组的具体过程,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。As mentioned above, the number of port groups G can be predefined, such as protocol predefined. The terminal device can divide 2T ports into G port groups according to predefined rules. The specific process of the terminal device grouping the ports according to the predefined rules has been described in detail above in conjunction with a number of examples. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
端口组数G也可以是终端设备确定的。The number of port groups G can also be determined by the terminal device.
终端设备在对2T个端口分组后,还可以将每个端口组中包含的端口上报给网络设备。After the terminal device groups the 2T ports, it can also report the ports included in each port group to the network device.
可选地,该方法还包括:终端设备向网络设备上报G个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口。相应地,网络设备接收来自终端设备的G个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口的指示。网络设备在接收到终端设备的上报后,便可以确定G个端口组。Optionally, the method further includes: the terminal device reports the ports included in each port group of the G port groups to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives an indication of the port included in each port group in the G port groups of the terminal device. After the network device receives the report from the terminal device, it can determine G port groups.
应理解,终端设备对G个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口的指示例如可以是:字符串,或端口组划分方式的指示,或端口组中包含的端口数、首个端口号和末个端口号中的至少 一项。由于上文已经结合这三种指示方式详细说明了网络设备对G个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口的指示的具体方式,终端设备对G个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口的指示的具体方式与之相似,为了简洁,这里不再重复。It should be understood that the indication of the port included in each port group in the G port groups by the terminal device may be, for example, a character string, or an indication of the port group division method, or the number of ports included in the port group, the first port number, and the last port number. At least one of the port numbers. Since the above three indication methods have been combined with the detailed description of the specific manners of the network equipment indicating the ports included in each port group in the G port groups, the terminal equipment has a detailed description of the ports included in each port group in the G port groups. The specific method of instruction is similar to that, for the sake of brevity, it is not repeated here.
在步骤230中,终端设备对G个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。In step 230, the terminal device performs gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the G port groups.
如前所述,在高频系统中,由于端口之间的相关性不好,对预编码矩阵的压缩效果并不理想,反馈精度可能会受到影响,造成较大的性能损失。因此在本申请实施例中,终端设备可以对G个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整,或者,对该G个端口组中的一个或多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整,例如对较强的一个或多个端口组和/或较弱的一个或多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。As mentioned above, in a high-frequency system, due to the poor correlation between ports, the compression effect of the precoding matrix is not ideal, and the feedback accuracy may be affected, resulting in a large performance loss. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the G port groups, or perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to one or more port groups in the G port groups, For example, gain adjustment is performed on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the stronger one or more port groups and/or the weaker one or more port groups.
应理解,较强、较弱仅为便于理解而引入,不应对本申请构成任何限定。协议中可能也不指定所配置的增益调整系数用于对哪个端口组的码本系数进行增益调整。终端设备对码本系数进行增益调整的过程为设备的内部实现行为,可以通过预先配置不同的算法或规则来实现。本申请对终端设备进行增益调整的具体实现方式不作限定。It should be understood that the stronger and the weaker are only introduced for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. The protocol may not specify the configured gain adjustment coefficient to be used for gain adjustment of the codebook coefficient of which port group. The process in which the terminal device adjusts the codebook coefficients is an internal implementation behavior of the device, which can be implemented by pre-configuring different algorithms or rules. This application does not limit the specific implementation manner of gain adjustment on the terminal device.
为方便理解和说明,下文假设端口数2T=8,端口组数G=2。第一个端口组包括的端口为:端口0至端口5;第二个端口组包括的端口包括端口6和端口7。其中第二个端口组较弱。For ease of understanding and explanation, the following assumes that the number of ports is 2T=8, and the number of port groups G=2. The first port group includes ports: port 0 to port 5; the second port group includes ports including port 6 and port 7. The second port group is weaker.
下面对端口组的强弱做简单说明。例如,与一个传输层、一个子带对应的预编码向量表示为:[v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 v 6 v 7] T。其中第t个元素对应端口t,t可以在0至7中遍历取值,且t为整数。第t个v t元素可用于表示端口t的码本系数。该8个端口所对应的8个码本系数中,对应于端口和第7个端口的码本系数小于其他端口的码本系数。则将对应于端口6和端口7归为一个端口组,即上述第二个端口组;将端口0至端口5归为一组,即上述第一个端口组。相比而言,第一个端口组较第二个端口组强,或者说,第二个端口组较第一个端口组弱。 The following is a brief description of the strength of the port group. For example, the precoding vector corresponding to one transmission layer and one subband is expressed as: [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 v 6 v 7 ] T. The t-th element corresponds to port t, t can be traversed from 0 to 7, and t is an integer. The t-th v t element can be used to represent the codebook coefficient of port t. Among the eight codebook coefficients corresponding to the eight ports, the codebook coefficients corresponding to the port and the seventh port are smaller than the codebook coefficients of other ports. Then the ports 6 and 7 are grouped into one port group, that is, the above-mentioned second port group; ports 0 to 5 are grouped into one group, that is, the above-mentioned first port group. In comparison, the first port group is stronger than the second port group, or in other words, the second port group is weaker than the first port group.
需注意,端口组的强弱仅为便于理解而引入的说明。在终端设备的实现过程中,终端设备It should be noted that the strength of the port group is only an introduction for ease of understanding. In the realization of terminal equipment, terminal equipment
在本申请实施例中,终端设备可以采用不同的增益调整系数对G个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。为便于理解,下文中首先以一个传输层、一个子带所对应的预编码向量[v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 v 6 v 7] T为例来说明增益调整的过程。可以理解,对于任何一个预编码向量,都可以按照下文所述相同或相似的方法来进行增益调整。 In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may use different gain adjustment coefficients to adjust the gain of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the G port groups. For ease of understanding, the following first takes the precoding vector [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 v 6 v 7 ] T corresponding to one transmission layer and one subband as an example to illustrate the process of gain adjustment. It can be understood that for any precoding vector, the gain adjustment can be performed according to the same or similar method described below.
例如,对第一个端口组对应的码本系数可以采用增益调整系数1,对第二个端口组对应的码本系数可以采用大于1的增益调整系数,以将第二个端口组对应的码本系数放大。For example, the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group can be a gain adjustment coefficient 1, and the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group can be a gain adjustment coefficient greater than 1, so as to change the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group. This factor is magnified.
假设对第二个端口组对应的码本系数采用的增益调整系数为α,α>1。则上述预编码向量中各端口组对应的码本系数经过增益调整后可以表示为[v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v  5αv 6 αv 7] TAssume that the gain adjustment coefficient used for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group is α, α>1. Then the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group in the aforementioned precoding vector can be expressed as [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 αv 6 αv 7 ] T after gain adjustment.
可以理解的是,由于对第一个端口组对应的码本系数采用了增益调整系数1,也可以理解为仅对第二个端口组对应的码本系数进行了增益调整。It can be understood that since the gain adjustment coefficient 1 is adopted for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group, it can also be understood that only the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group is gain adjusted.
又例如,对第一个端口组对应的码本系数可以采用小于1的增益调整系数,对第二个端口组对应的码本系数可以采用增益调整系数1,以将第一个端口组对应的码本系数缩小。For another example, the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group may use a gain adjustment coefficient less than 1, and the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group may use a gain adjustment coefficient of 1, so as to change the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group. The codebook coefficient is reduced.
假设对第一个端口组对应的码本系数采用的增益调整系数为β,β<1。则上述预编码向量经过增益调整后可以表示为[βv 0 βv 1 βv 2 βv 3 βv 4 βv 5 v 6 v 7] TAssume that the gain adjustment coefficient used for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group is β, β<1. Then the precoding vector can be expressed as [βv 0 βv 1 βv 2 βv 3 βv 4 βv 5 v 6 v 7 ] T after gain adjustment.
可以理解的是,由于对第二个端口组对应的码本系数采用了增益调整系数1,也可以理解为仅对第一个端口组对应的码本系数进行了增益调整。又例如,对第一个端口组对应的码本系数可以采用小于1的增益调整系数,对第二个端口组对应的码本系数采用大于1的增益调整系数。It can be understood that since the gain adjustment coefficient 1 is adopted for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group, it can also be understood that only the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group is gain adjusted. For another example, a gain adjustment coefficient less than 1 may be used for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group, and a gain adjustment coefficient greater than 1 may be used for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group.
假设对第一个端口组对应的码本系数采用的增益调整系数为β,β<1;对第二个端口组对应的码本系数采用的增益调整系数为α,α>1。则上述预编码向量经过增益调整后可以表示为[βv 0 βv 1 βv 2 βv 3 βv 4 βv 5 αv 6 αv 7] TSuppose that the gain adjustment coefficient used for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group is β, β<1; the gain adjustment coefficient used for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group is α, α>1. Then the precoding vector can be expressed as [βv 0 βv 1 βv 2 βv 3 βv 4 βv 5 αv 6 αv 7 ] T after gain adjustment.
应理解,上文中仅为便于理解,示出了对预编码向量进行增益调整后的几个示例。这些举例不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于增益调整系数的取值以及对预编码进行增益调整的具体操作不作限定。It should be understood that the above is only for ease of understanding, and shows several examples after gain adjustment on the precoding vector. These examples should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the value of the gain adjustment coefficient and the specific operation of gain adjustment for precoding.
例如,对于较弱的端口组,也可以设置小于1的增益调整系数,在对该端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整时,可以将码本系数除以该增益调整系数,以将该端口组对一个的码本系数放大。为了简洁,这里不一一举例说明。For example, for a weak port group, a gain adjustment coefficient less than 1 can also be set. When gain adjustment is performed on the codebook coefficient corresponding to the port group, the codebook coefficient can be divided by the gain adjustment coefficient to obtain the port The codebook coefficients of one group are enlarged. For the sake of brevity, I will not illustrate them one by one.
可以理解的是,将第一个端口组对应的码本系数缩小,相对于第二个端口组的码本系数来说,二者的码本系数的差距得以减小;将第二个端口组对应的码本系数放大,相对于第一个端口组来说,二者的码本系数的差距得以减小。因此,可以认为将第一个端口组对应的码本系数减小和将第二个端口组对应的码本系数放大所带来的效果是相同的。It is understandable that the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group is reduced, compared with the codebook coefficient of the second port group, the gap between the codebook coefficients of the two is reduced; the second port group The corresponding codebook coefficients are enlarged, and the gap between the codebook coefficients of the two is reduced compared to the first port group. Therefore, it can be considered that reducing the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group has the same effect as enlarging the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group.
需要说明的是,对于与多个传输层对应的预编码矩阵来说,其中的每个列向量按照上文所述的方式来进行增益调整,多个传输层之间可以进行独立的分组与增益调整。换言之,多个传输层之间的增益调整和量化可以是相互独立的。为了简洁,这里不再举例说明。It should be noted that for the precoding matrix corresponding to multiple transmission layers, each column vector therein is adjusted for gain in the manner described above, and independent grouping and gain can be performed between multiple transmission layers. Adjustment. In other words, the gain adjustment and quantization between multiple transmission layers can be independent of each other. For the sake of brevity, no examples are given here.
终端设备用来对码本系数进行增益调整所使用的增益调整系数例如可以是终端设备自行确定的,也可以是网络设备预先通过信令通知的,本申请对此不作限定。The gain adjustment coefficient used by the terminal device to adjust the codebook coefficients may be determined by the terminal device itself, or may be notified by the network device through signaling in advance, which is not limited in this application.
在一种实现方式中,网络设备可以预先通过信令向终端设备发送增益调整系数。In an implementation manner, the network device may send the gain adjustment coefficient to the terminal device through signaling in advance.
可选地,步骤230具体包括:终端设备从网络设备接收一个或多个增益调整系数;并根据该一个或多个增益调整系数对G个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。相应地,网络设备向终端设备发送一个或多个增益调整系数。Optionally, step 230 specifically includes: the terminal device receives one or more gain adjustment coefficients from the network device; and performs gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the G port groups according to the one or more gain adjustment coefficients. Correspondingly, the network device sends one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the terminal device.
网络设备向终端设备发送的增益调整系数可以是与G个端口组一一对应的增益调整系数;也可以是多个增益调整系数的候选值,由终端设备执行决定具体使用哪一个或多个增益调整系数,并将所使用的增益调整系数上报网络设备。可选地,该方法还包括:终端设备向网络设备上报所使用的一个或多个增益调整系数。The gain adjustment coefficient sent by the network device to the terminal device can be one-to-one corresponding to the G port groups; it can also be multiple candidate values of the gain adjustment coefficient, and the terminal device determines which one or more gains to use. Adjust the coefficient, and report the used gain adjustment coefficient to the network device. Optionally, the method further includes: the terminal device reports the used one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device.
在另一种实现方式中,终端设备可以预先存储有多个增益调整系数。或者,终端设备和网络设备预先都存储有多个增益调整系数。终端设备可以自行从中选择一个或多个增益调整系数来对G个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。In another implementation manner, the terminal device may pre-store multiple gain adjustment coefficients. Or, both the terminal device and the network device store multiple gain adjustment coefficients in advance. The terminal device can select one or more gain adjustment coefficients from them to adjust the gain of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the G port groups.
可选地,步骤230具体包括:终端设备基于预存储的一个或多个增益调整系数,对G个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。可选地,该方法还包括:终端设备向网络设备上报所使用的一个或多个增益调增系数。Optionally, step 230 specifically includes: the terminal device performs gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the G port groups based on one or more pre-stored gain adjustment coefficients. Optionally, the method further includes: the terminal device reports the used one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device.
对增益调整系数的指示例如可以是与增益调整系数对应的索引。网络设备和终端设备例如可以预先存储有增益调整系数与索引的多个映射关系,通过对索引的指示,便可以指示所对应的增益调整系数。下表示出了增益调整系数及其对应的索引的一例。The indication of the gain adjustment coefficient may be, for example, an index corresponding to the gain adjustment coefficient. The network device and the terminal device may, for example, pre-store multiple mapping relationships between gain adjustment coefficients and indexes, and the corresponding gain adjustment coefficients can be indicated by indicating the indexes. The following table shows an example of the gain adjustment coefficient and its corresponding index.
索引index 增益调整系数Gain adjustment factor
00 系数aCoefficient a
11 系数bCoefficient b
22 系数cCoefficient c
33 系数dCoefficient d
应理解,通过增益调整系数对应的索引来指示增益调整系数仅为一种可能的实现方式,不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,还可以直接该增益调整系数的大小。本申请对于增益调整系数的具体指示方式不作限定。It should be understood that indicating the gain adjustment coefficient by the index corresponding to the gain adjustment coefficient is only one possible implementation manner, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. For example, the magnitude of the gain adjustment coefficient can also be directly adjusted. This application does not limit the specific indication method of the gain adjustment coefficient.
需要说明的是,当某一端口组的增益调整系数为1时,可以不做指示或上报。当某一端口组的码本系数很小,不需要上报时,终端设备也可以不做增益调整,因此也不用对该端口组上报增益调整系数。It should be noted that when the gain adjustment coefficient of a certain port group is 1, there is no need to give an indication or report. When the codebook coefficient of a certain port group is very small and does not need to be reported, the terminal device may not perform gain adjustment, so there is no need to report the gain adjustment coefficient to the port group.
应理解,增益调整系数仅为便于说明而定义的名称,不应对本申请构成任何限定。该增益调整系数也可以称为缩放系数、修正系数等。本申请对此不作限定。It should be understood that the gain adjustment coefficient is only a name defined for ease of description, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. The gain adjustment coefficient may also be referred to as a scaling coefficient, a correction coefficient, and so on. This application does not limit this.
在步骤240中,终端设备对增益调整后的码本系数进行量化处理。In step 240, the terminal device performs quantization processing on the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
终端设备可以基于步骤230中增益调整后的码本系数进行量化处理。The terminal device may perform quantization processing based on the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment in step 230.
下文中为便于理解和说明,以对第二个端口组对应的码本系数采用大于1的增益调整系数α为例来说明终端设备对增益调整后的码本系数进行量化处理的过程。下面将结合两种不同的码本反馈方式来详细说明步骤240。In the following, for ease of understanding and explanation, the use of a gain adjustment coefficient α greater than 1 for the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group is taken as an example to illustrate the process of the terminal device quantizing the codebook coefficient after the gain adjustment. Step 240 will be described in detail below in combination with two different codebook feedback methods.
在R15的码本反馈方式中,终端设备可以对每个传输层上的宽带的预编码向量进行空域压缩,以获得能够近似地表征该预编码向量的码本系数。可用于近似地表征该预编码向量的码本系数也就是量化后的码本系数。In the codebook feedback mode of R15, the terminal device can perform spatial compression on the wideband precoding vector on each transmission layer to obtain codebook coefficients that can approximately characterize the precoding vector. The codebook coefficients that can be used to approximate the precoding vector are the quantized codebook coefficients.
为便于理解和说明,这里以与一个传输层、一个子带对应的预编码向量为例说明与各端口组对应的码本系数以及对各端口组对应的码本系数进行压缩的过程。其中,与一个传输层、一个子带对应的预编码向量的具体形式例如可以是上文中列举的[v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 v 6 v 7] T。应理解,这仅为便于理解而示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本领域的技术人员可以理解,在预编码矩阵中,每一行可对应于一个端口,每一列可对应于一个传输层,因此,每个预编码矩阵中可以包括与2T个端口对应的码本系数,每个端口对应的码本系数可以为多个,例如R个。 For ease of understanding and description, the precoding vector corresponding to one transmission layer and one subband is taken as an example to illustrate the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group and the process of compressing the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group. Among them, the specific form of the precoding vector corresponding to one transmission layer and one subband may be, for example, [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 v 6 v 7 ] T listed above. It should be understood that this is only an example for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. Those skilled in the art can understand that in the precoding matrix, each row can correspond to a port, and each column can correspond to a transmission layer. Therefore, each precoding matrix can include codebook coefficients corresponding to 2T ports. There can be multiple codebook coefficients corresponding to each port, such as R.
仍然基于上文的假设:2T=8,分为两个端口组,[端口0至端口5],[端口6,端口7],第二组端口相对于第一组端口较弱。则对该宽带预编码向量进行增益调整后得到的增益调整后的预编码向量为[v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 αv 6 αv 7] TStill based on the above assumption: 2T=8, divided into two port groups, [port 0 to port 5], [port 6, port 7], the second group of ports is weaker than the first group of ports. Then the gain-adjusted precoding vector obtained after gain adjustment on the wideband precoding vector is [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 αv 6 αv 7 ] T.
可以理解,该预编码向量包括2T个端口对应的码本系数。因此,对该预编码向量进行增益调整也就是对2T个端口对应的码本系数进行增益调整,所得到的增益调整后的预编码向量也就包括了增益调整后的码本系数。It can be understood that the precoding vector includes codebook coefficients corresponding to 2T ports. Therefore, performing gain adjustment on the precoding vector means performing gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the 2T ports, and the obtained precoding vector after gain adjustment also includes the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
此后,可以对增益调整后的预编码向量进行空域压缩。对增益调整后的预编码向量的空域压缩例如可以通过离散傅里叶变换(Discrete Fourier Transform,DFT)或离散余弦变换(discrete cosine transform,DCT)来实现。Thereafter, the precoding vector after the gain adjustment can be compressed in the space domain. The spatial compression of the gain-adjusted precoding vector can be implemented, for example, by discrete Fourier transform (DFT) or discrete cosine transform (DCT).
以DCT为例,终端设备可以将增益调整后的预编码向量投影到空域DCT基底,根据对空域向量的反馈个数的限制,例如L(L≥1且为整数)个,将前L个DCT向量及其对 应的线性叠加系数作为量化后的码本系数,并可上报该L个DCT向量的线性叠加系数。可选地,还可以上报DCT向量的个数L。或者,在另一种实现方式中,终端设备可以根据对网络设备所指示的DCT能量限制ρ,选择总能量占比不超过ρ的至少一个空域向量及其对应的线性叠加系数作为量化后的码本系数上报。Taking DCT as an example, the terminal device can project the gain-adjusted precoding vector to the spatial DCT base. According to the limitation on the number of feedbacks of the spatial vector, such as L (L≥1 and an integer), the first L DCT The vector and its corresponding linear superposition coefficient are used as the quantized codebook coefficient, and the linear superposition coefficient of the L DCT vectors can be reported. Optionally, the number L of DCT vectors can also be reported. Or, in another implementation manner, the terminal device can select at least one spatial vector whose total energy proportion does not exceed ρ and its corresponding linear superposition coefficient as the quantized code according to the DCT energy limit ρ indicated to the network device. This coefficient is reported.
应理解,这里所述的线性叠加系数具体可以是指宽带幅度系数。终端设备所确定的量化后的码本系数并不仅限于上述至少一个空域向量及其对应的宽带幅度系数。如前所述,在R15的码本反馈方式中,终端设备还可以进一步通过子带的预编码向量来确定与各子带对应的子带幅度系数和子带相位系数。各子带对应的子带幅度系数和子带相位系数也可以理解为是线性叠加系数的一部分。后文中涉及的宽带幅度系数,均可以理解为线性叠加系数的一种。下文中为了简洁,省略对相同或相似情况的说明。It should be understood that the linear superposition coefficient described herein may specifically refer to a broadband amplitude coefficient. The quantized codebook coefficients determined by the terminal device are not limited to the aforementioned at least one spatial vector and its corresponding wideband amplitude coefficient. As mentioned above, in the codebook feedback mode of R15, the terminal device may further determine the subband amplitude coefficient and subband phase coefficient corresponding to each subband through the precoding vector of the subband. The sub-band amplitude coefficient and sub-band phase coefficient corresponding to each sub-band can also be understood as a part of the linear superposition coefficient. The wideband amplitude coefficients involved in the following text can all be understood as a kind of linear superposition coefficient. In the following, for brevity, descriptions of the same or similar situations are omitted.
本申请实施例所涉及的增益调整主要涉及对宽带的空域向量和宽带幅度系数的确定。但也不排除在确定子带幅度系数和子带相位系数的过程中,对子带的预编码向量进行增益调整。对子带的预编码向量进行增益调整的具体操作与上文所述相似,为了简洁,这里不再重复。The gain adjustment involved in the embodiments of the present application mainly involves the determination of the broadband spatial vector and the broadband amplitude coefficient. However, it is not ruled out that gain adjustment is performed on the precoding vector of the subband in the process of determining the subband amplitude coefficient and the subband phase coefficient. The specific operation of performing gain adjustment on the precoding vector of the subband is similar to that described above. For brevity, it will not be repeated here.
应理解,DFT和DCT只是用于对码本系数进行空域压缩的一种可能的实现方式,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于终端设备对码本系数进行压缩的具体实现方式不作限定。关于空域压缩的具体实现方式可以参考现有技术,例如可以参考R15中的相关说明,为了简洁,这里不再举例详述。还应理解,上文描述的空域压缩的具体过程仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。终端设备基于预编码矩阵中的码本系数进行空域压缩的具体方式属于设备的内部实现行为,可以基于预先配置的不同的算法来实现。It should be understood that DFT and DCT are only a possible implementation for spatial compression of codebook coefficients, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the specific implementation manner of the terminal device compressing the codebook coefficients. Regarding the specific implementation of the spatial compression, reference may be made to the prior art, for example, reference may be made to the relevant description in R15. For the sake of brevity, examples are not described here. It should also be understood that the specific process of airspace compression described above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. The specific method for the terminal device to perform spatial compression based on the codebook coefficients in the precoding matrix belongs to the internal implementation behavior of the device, and can be implemented based on different pre-configured algorithms.
终端设备可以根据对增益调整后的码本系数的量化,生成第二信息。该第二信息可以用于指示对应于增益调整后的码本系数。The terminal device may generate the second information according to the quantization of the codebook coefficients after the gain adjustment. The second information may be used to indicate the codebook coefficients corresponding to the gain adjustment.
终端设备在确定了至少一个空域向量、至少一个宽带幅度系数以及与各子带对应的至少一个子带幅度系数和至少一个子带相位系数之后,便可以生成对该至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量、至少一个宽带幅度系数以及与各子带对应的至少一个子带幅度系数和至少一个子带相位系数的指示信息。After determining at least one spatial vector, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one subband amplitude coefficient and at least one subband phase coefficient corresponding to each subband, the terminal device can generate the at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency Indication information of a domain vector, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one subband amplitude coefficient and at least one subband phase coefficient corresponding to each subband.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以将该至少一个空域向量通过索引来指示,比如,指示与每个空域向量对应的索引,或者,指示与至少一个空域向量的组合对应的索引;终端设备还可以将该至少一个线性叠加系数的大小通过量化值来指示。终端设备指示上述至少一个空域向量、至少一个宽带幅度系数以及各子带对应的至少一个子带幅度系数和至少一个子带相位系数的具体方法可以参考现有技术,例如可以参考R15中的相关说明,为了简洁,这里不做详述。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device may indicate the at least one airspace vector through an index, for example, indicating an index corresponding to each airspace vector, or indicating an index corresponding to a combination of at least one airspace vector; the terminal; The device may also indicate the size of the at least one linear superimposition coefficient through a quantized value. The specific method for the terminal device to indicate the above at least one spatial vector, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one subband amplitude coefficient and at least one subband phase coefficient corresponding to each subband can refer to the prior art, for example, refer to the relevant description in R15 , For the sake of brevity, I will not elaborate here.
由此,终端设备完成了与对增益调整后的码本系数的量化。Thus, the terminal device completes the quantization of the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
在R16的码本反馈方式中,终端设备可以将同一个传输层上多个子带的预编码向量组合在一起,进行双域压缩,以获得能够近似地表征该多个子带的预编码向量的码本系数。可用于近似地表征该预编码向量的码本系数也就是量化后的码本系数。In the R16 codebook feedback mode, the terminal device can combine the precoding vectors of multiple subbands on the same transmission layer and perform dual-domain compression to obtain a code that can approximately characterize the precoding vectors of the multiple subbands. The coefficient. The codebook coefficients that can be used to approximate the precoding vector are the quantized codebook coefficients.
可用于近似地表征该预编码向量的码本系数也就是量化后的码本系数。The codebook coefficients that can be used to approximate the precoding vector are the quantized codebook coefficients.
为便于理解和说明,这里以与一个传输层、多个子带对应的预编码向量来说明与各端口组对应的码本系数以及对各端口组对应的码本系数进行压缩的过程。For ease of understanding and description, the precoding vectors corresponding to one transmission layer and multiple subbands are used to illustrate the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group and the process of compressing the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group.
具体来说,将同一个传输层上N 3个子带的2T×1维的预编码向量组合在一起,可以得到一个维度为2T×N 3的矩阵。下文中为便于区分和说明,将该矩阵记为空频矩阵。可以理解的是,该空频矩阵中的每个列可对应于一个传输层、一个子带的预编码向量,因此,该空频矩阵中的每个元素都是与端口对应的码本系数。更具体地说,该空频矩阵中的第t行可以是与端口t、N 3个子带对应的的码本系数。 Specifically, by combining 2T×1 dimensional precoding vectors of N 3 subbands on the same transmission layer, a matrix with a dimension of 2T×N 3 can be obtained. Hereinafter, for the convenience of distinction and explanation, this matrix is marked as a space-frequency matrix. It is understandable that each column in the space-frequency matrix may correspond to a precoding vector of one transmission layer and one sub-band. Therefore, each element in the space-frequency matrix is a codebook coefficient corresponding to a port. More specifically, the t-th row in the space-frequency matrix may be codebook coefficients corresponding to the 3 subbands of ports t and N.
终端设备在对该空频矩阵进行双域压缩之前,可以先对部分端口的码本系数进行增益调整。例如,仍然基于上文的假设:2T=8,分为两个端口组,[端口0至端口5],[端口6,端口7],第二组端口相对于第一组端口较弱。Before performing dual-domain compression on the space-frequency matrix, the terminal device may first perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients of some ports. For example, still based on the above assumption: 2T=8, divided into two port groups, [port 0 to port 5], [port 6, port 7], the second group of ports is weaker than the first group of ports.
假设该空频矩阵记为:Suppose the space-frequency matrix is denoted as:
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000013
其中,元素v t,n表示与子带n对应的预编码向量中与端口t对应的码本系数,t可以在0至7中遍历取值,n可以在1至N 3-1中遍历取值,且t和n均为整数。 Among them, the element v t,n represents the codebook coefficient corresponding to port t in the precoding vector corresponding to subband n, t can be traversed from 0 to 7, and n can be traversed from 1 to N 3 -1. Value, and both t and n are integers.
则,对两个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整后可以得到增益调整后的空频矩阵如下:Then, after gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups, the space-frequency matrix after gain adjustment can be obtained as follows:
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000014
可以理解,该空频矩阵中的每一列对应于一个子带的预编码向量,每个预编码向量包括2T个端口对应的码本系数。因此,对该空频矩阵进行增益调整,也就是对该空频矩阵中的每个码本系数进行增益调整。所得到的增益调整后的空频矩阵也就包括了增益调整后的码本系数。It can be understood that each column in the space-frequency matrix corresponds to a precoding vector of one subband, and each precoding vector includes codebook coefficients corresponding to 2T ports. Therefore, the gain adjustment is performed on the space frequency matrix, that is, the gain adjustment is performed on each codebook coefficient in the space frequency matrix. The obtained space-frequency matrix after gain adjustment also includes the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
此后,可以对增益调整后的空频矩阵分别进行空域和频域的压缩。对增益调整后的空频矩阵的双域压缩例如可以通过离散傅里叶变换(Discrete Fourier Transform,DFT)或离散余弦变换(discrete cosine transform,DCT)来实现。Thereafter, the space-frequency matrix after the gain adjustment can be compressed in the space domain and the frequency domain respectively. The dual-domain compression of the space-frequency matrix after the gain adjustment can be implemented, for example, by discrete Fourier transform (DFT) or discrete cosine transform (DCT).
以DFT为例,终端设备可以将增益调整后的空频矩阵投影到空域DFT基底和频域DFT基底。终端设备可以根据对空域向量的反馈个数的指示(例如L)和对频域向量的反馈个数的指示(例如M,M≥1且为整数),从空域DFT基底中选择L个较强的空域向量,从频域DFT基底中选择M个较强的频域向量。由此,终端设备确定出待反馈的至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量以及至少一个线性叠加系数。其中,每个线性叠加系数可对应一个空域向量和一个频域向量,该至少一个空频向量、至少一个频域向量及其对应的线性叠加系数可用于近似地表征上述空频矩阵。Taking DFT as an example, the terminal device can project the space-frequency matrix after gain adjustment to the space-domain DFT base and the frequency-domain DFT base. The terminal device can select L from the spatial DFT base according to the indication of the number of feedbacks to the spatial vector (for example, L) and the indication of the number of feedbacks to the frequency domain vector (for example, M, M≥1 and an integer). Select M strong frequency-domain vectors from the frequency-domain DFT base. Thus, the terminal device determines at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient to be fed back. Wherein, each linear superposition coefficient can correspond to a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector, and the at least one space-frequency vector, at least one frequency-domain vector and its corresponding linear superposition coefficient can be used to approximate the aforementioned space-frequency matrix.
可以理解,将增益调整后的空频矩阵投影到空域DFT基底和频域DFT基底所获得的至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量以及一个或多个线性叠加系数,与将未经过增益调整后的空频矩阵投影到空域DFT基底和频域DFT基底所获得的至少一个空域向量、至少 一个频域向量以及至少一个线性叠加系数是不同的。It can be understood that the at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency vector, and one or more linear superposition coefficients obtained by projecting the gain-adjusted space-frequency matrix onto the spatial DFT base and the frequency-domain DFT base are different from those obtained without gain adjustment. At least one spatial vector, at least one frequency vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient obtained by projecting the space-frequency matrix of, onto the spatial DFT base and the frequency domain DFT base are different.
应理解,DFT和DCT只是用于对码本系数进行双域压缩的一种可能的实现方式,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于终端设备对码本系数进行压缩的具体实现方式不作限定。关于双域压缩的具体实现方式可以参考现有技术,例如可以参考R16中的相关说明,为了简洁,这里不再举例详述。It should be understood that DFT and DCT are only a possible implementation for dual-domain compression of codebook coefficients, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the specific implementation manner of the terminal device compressing the codebook coefficients. For the specific implementation of dual-domain compression, reference can be made to the prior art, for example, reference can be made to the relevant description in R16. For the sake of brevity, no further examples are given here.
还应理解,上述双域压缩的具体过程仅为便于理解而示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。终端设备基于预编码矩阵中的码本系数进行双域压缩的具体方式属于设备的内部实现行为,可以基于预先配置的不同的算法来实现。It should also be understood that the specific process of the above-mentioned dual-domain compression is only an example for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. The specific way that the terminal device performs dual-domain compression based on the codebook coefficients in the precoding matrix belongs to the internal implementation behavior of the device, and can be implemented based on different pre-configured algorithms.
终端设备可以根据对增益调整后的码本系数的量化,生成第二信息。该第二信息可以用于指示对应于增益调整后的码本系数。The terminal device may generate the second information according to the quantization of the codebook coefficients after the gain adjustment. The second information may be used to indicate the codebook coefficients corresponding to the gain adjustment.
在本实施例中,终端设备在确定了上述至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量以及至少一个线性叠加系数之后,便可以生成对该至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量以及至少一个线性叠加系数的指示信息。在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以将该至少一个空域向量和至少一个频域向量可以通过索引来指示,比如,对与每个空域向量、每个频域向量对应的索引,或者,与至少一个空域向量的组合对应的索引,以及与至少一个频域向量的组合对应的索引等等;终端设备还可以将该至少一个线性叠加系数的大小通过量化值来指示,并将该至少一个线性叠加系数与空域向量和频域向量的对应关系通过位图来指示。终端设备指示上述至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量以及至少一个线性叠加系数的具体方法可以参考现有技术,例如可以参考TS38.214 R16中的相关说明,为了简洁,这里不做详述。In this embodiment, after determining the at least one spatial domain vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient, the terminal device can generate the at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient. The indication information of the coefficient. In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device may indicate the at least one spatial domain vector and the at least one frequency domain vector through an index, for example, an index corresponding to each spatial vector or each frequency domain vector, or, The index corresponding to the combination of at least one spatial domain vector, and the index corresponding to the combination of at least one frequency domain vector, etc.; the terminal device may also indicate the size of the at least one linear superposition coefficient through a quantized value, and set the at least one The corresponding relationship between the linear superposition coefficient and the spatial vector and the frequency vector is indicated by a bitmap. The specific method for the terminal device to indicate the above-mentioned at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient can refer to the prior art. For example, refer to the related description in TS38.214 R16. For brevity, it will not be detailed here.
由此,终端设备完成了与对增益调整后的码本系数的量化。Thus, the terminal device completes the quantization of the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
可选地,终端设备用于对同一个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整的增益调整系数可以为一个,也可以为多个。本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, the gain adjustment coefficient used by the terminal device for gain adjustment of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the same port group may be one or more. This application does not limit this.
若对同一个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整的增益调整系数为一个,也即是,终端设备基于同一个增益调增系数对一个端口组对应的所有的码本系数进行增益处理。这里所述的所有的码本系数具体可以是指,与该端口组对应且与测量带宽上所包含的多个子带对应的码本系数。If the gain adjustment coefficient for gain adjustment of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the same port group is one, that is, the terminal device performs gain processing on all the codebook coefficients corresponding to one port group based on the same gain adjustment coefficient. All the codebook coefficients mentioned here may specifically refer to the codebook coefficients corresponding to the port group and corresponding to multiple subbands included in the measurement bandwidth.
若对同一个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整的增益调整系数为多个,也即是,终端设备可以基于不同的增益调整系数对同一个端口组、不同子带所对应的码本系数进行增益调整。例如,对于同一个端口组对应的码本系数,可以将测量带宽分为多个子带组,对每个子带组可以基于同一个增益调整系数进行增益调整,对不同子带组可以基于不同的增益调整系数进行增益调整。If there are multiple gain adjustment coefficients for gain adjustment of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the same port group, that is, the terminal device can adjust the codebook coefficients corresponding to the same port group and different subbands based on different gain adjustment coefficients. Make gain adjustments. For example, for codebook coefficients corresponding to the same port group, the measurement bandwidth can be divided into multiple subband groups, and each subband group can be adjusted based on the same gain adjustment coefficient, and different subband groups can be based on different gains. Adjust the coefficient to adjust the gain.
可选地,该方法还包括步骤250:终端设备发送第二信息,该第二信息用于指示量化后的码本系数,以用于确定预编码矩阵。相应地,网络设备接收该第二信息。Optionally, the method further includes step 250: the terminal device sends second information, where the second information is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficients for determining the precoding matrix. Correspondingly, the network device receives the second information.
示例性地,该第二信息例如可以是包含在PMI中的信息,或者可以是PMI。进一步地,该第二信息例如可以携带在CSI报告中。Exemplarily, the second information may be information contained in PMI, or may be PMI, for example. Further, the second information may be carried in a CSI report, for example.
该CSI报告可以承载在物理上行资源传输给网络设备。该物理上行资源例如可以是物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)资源或物理上行共享信道(physical uplink share channel,PUSCH)资源。本申请对此不作限定。The CSI report can be carried on the physical uplink resource and transmitted to the network device. The physical uplink resource may be, for example, a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) resource or a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) resource. This application does not limit this.
应理解,终端设备向网络设备发送PMI或CSI报告的具体过程可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里省略对该具体过程的详细说明。It should be understood that the specific process for the terminal device to send the PMI or CSI report to the network device can refer to the prior art. For brevity, detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
可选地,该方法还包括步骤260:网络设备根据该第二信息,确定预编码矩阵。Optionally, the method further includes step 260: the network device determines a precoding matrix according to the second information.
上述该第二信息所指示的量化后的码本系数可用于构建预编码矩阵。下面仍然结合上述两种反馈方式来详细说明网络设备根据第二信息构建预编码矩阵的过程。The quantized codebook coefficients indicated by the above second information can be used to construct a precoding matrix. The process of constructing the precoding matrix by the network device according to the second information will be described in detail below in combination with the above two feedback methods.
在R15的码本反馈方式中,网络设备可以根据所接收到的第二信息,首先确定出分别对应的至少一个空域向量、至少一个宽带幅度系数以及与各子带对应的至少一个子带幅度系数和至少一个子带相位系数。然后可以根据各线性叠加系数与空域向量的对应关系,恢复每个子带的预编码向量。In the codebook feedback mode of R15, the network device can first determine the corresponding at least one spatial vector, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one subband amplitude coefficient corresponding to each subband according to the received second information. And at least one subband phase coefficient. Then, the precoding vector of each subband can be restored according to the corresponding relationship between each linear superposition coefficient and the spatial vector.
由于终端设备用作压缩的码本系数是经过增益调整的码本系数,故网络设备基于第二信息恢复出来的码本系数也与增益调整后的码本系数相同或相近。网络设备可以进一步根据该增益调增系数,恢复出未经过增益调整的码本系数。Since the codebook coefficients used by the terminal device for compression are gain-adjusted codebook coefficients, the codebook coefficients recovered by the network device based on the second information are also the same or similar to the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment. The network device may further recover the codebook coefficients that have not undergone gain adjustment according to the gain adjustment coefficient.
网络设备要恢复未经过增益调整的码本系数,就需要预先确定增益调整系数。如前所述,终端设备在对码本系数进行增益调整所使用的增益调整系数可以是网络设备预先通过信令指示的,或者,终端设备向网络设备上报的,因此网络设备可以预先确定G个端口组的增益调整系数。To restore the codebook coefficients without gain adjustment, the network equipment needs to determine the gain adjustment coefficient in advance. As mentioned above, the gain adjustment coefficients used by the terminal equipment to adjust the codebook coefficients can be indicated by the network equipment in advance through signaling, or the terminal equipment reports to the network equipment, so the network equipment can predetermine G The gain adjustment coefficient of the port group.
网络设备可以基于与终端设备的增益调整相对应的操作来恢复未经过增益调整的码本系数。The network device can restore the codebook coefficients without gain adjustment based on an operation corresponding to the gain adjustment of the terminal device.
例如,终端设备在进行增益调整时,将每个端口组对应的码本系数乘以增益调整系数,则网络设备在恢复该端口组的码本系数时,可以除以该增益调整系数。又例如,终端设备在进行增益调整时,将每个端口组对应的码本系数除以增益调整系数,则网络设备在恢复该端口组对应的码本系数时,可以乘以该增益调整系数。For example, when the terminal device performs gain adjustment, the codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group is multiplied by the gain adjustment coefficient, and the network device can divide by the gain adjustment coefficient when restoring the codebook coefficient of the port group. For another example, when the terminal device performs gain adjustment, the codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group is divided by the gain adjustment coefficient, and the network device can multiply the gain adjustment coefficient when restoring the codebook coefficient corresponding to the port group.
仍然基于上文步骤230中的示例,预编码向量经过增益调整后可以表示为[v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 αv 6 αv 7] T,网络设备根据第二信息的反馈所确定的码本系数可以表示为[v 0' v 1' v 2' v 3' v 4' v 5' (αv 6)' (αv 7)'] T。由于终端设备通过第二信息反馈的码本系数是经过压缩后的码本系数,因此网络设备基于第二信息所确定的与各端口组对应的码本系数与终端设备测量所确定的码本系数可能相同,也可能相近。为了便于区分,这里将网络设备所确定的码本系数与终端设备确定的码本系数通过上角标“'”来区分。 Still based on the example in step 230 above, the precoding vector can be expressed as [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 αv 6 αv 7 ] T after gain adjustment, which is determined by the network device according to the feedback of the second information The codebook coefficient of can be expressed as [v 0 'v 1 ' v 2 'v 3 ' v 4 'v 5 ' (αv 6 )'(αv 7 )'] T. Since the codebook coefficients fed back by the terminal device through the second information are compressed codebook coefficients, the network device determines the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group based on the second information and the codebook coefficients determined by the terminal device measurement. It may be the same or similar. In order to facilitate the distinction, the codebook coefficient determined by the network device and the codebook coefficient determined by the terminal device are distinguished by the superscript "'".
网络设备可以基于增益调整系数,进一步将根据第二信息所确定的增益调整后的码本系数确定未经过增益调整的码本系数。网络设备所确定的未经过增益调整的码本系数可以表示为[v 0' v 1' v 2' v 3' v 4' v 5' (αv 6)'/α (αv 7)'/α] T。由此,网络设备确定出未经过增益调整的码本系数。网络设备可以进一步确定出与一个传输层、一个子带对应的预编码向量为
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000015
其中,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000016
为归一化系数,>0。
Based on the gain adjustment coefficient, the network device may further determine the codebook coefficient without gain adjustment based on the codebook coefficient after the gain adjustment determined by the second information. The codebook coefficients determined by the network device without gain adjustment can be expressed as [v 0 'v 1 ' v 2 'v 3 ' v 4 'v 5 ' (αv 6 )'/α (αv 7 )'/α] T. Therefore, the network device determines the codebook coefficients that have not undergone gain adjustment. The network device can further determine that the precoding vector corresponding to a transmission layer and a subband is
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000015
among them,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000016
Is the normalization coefficient, >0.
应理解,由于本申请对于终端设备基于增益调整系数对每个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整的具体操作不作限定,因此本申请对于网络设备基于增益调整系数恢复每个端口组对应的码本系数的具体操作也不做限定。It should be understood that since this application does not limit the specific operation of the terminal device to adjust the gain of the codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group based on the gain adjustment coefficient, this application restores the code corresponding to each port group based on the gain adjustment coefficient for the network device. The specific operation of this coefficient is also not limited.
基于上述处理,网络设备可以确定与每个传输层、每个子带对应的预编码向量。此后, 网络设备可以基于每个传输层、每个子带对应的预编码向量,确定每个子带对应的预编码矩阵。Based on the above processing, the network device can determine the precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer and each subband. Thereafter, the network device may determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each subband based on the precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer and each subband.
例如,第r个传输层、第n个子带对应的预编码向量记为w r,n,则第n个子带对应的预编码矩阵可以表示为:
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000017
其中
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000018
为归一化系数,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000019
For example, the precoding vector corresponding to the rth transmission layer and the nth subband is denoted as w r,n , then the precoding matrix corresponding to the nth subband can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000017
among them
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000018
Is the normalization coefficient,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000019
应理解,这里仅为便于理解,示出了各传输层对应于同一个子带的预编码向量与该子带的预编码矩阵的关系,不应对本申请构成任何限定。还应理解,网络设备根据第二信息确定每个子带的预编码矩阵的具体方法并不限于上文所示例。例如,网络设备可以直接根据多个传输层上与每个子带对应的码本系数,直接确定与每个子带对应的预编码矩阵。网络设备基于第二信息确定预编码矩阵的过程可以参考现有技术,例如可以参考R15中的相关说明,为了简洁,这里不做详述。It should be understood that this is only for ease of understanding, and the relationship between the precoding vector of each transmission layer corresponding to the same subband and the precoding matrix of the subband is shown, which should not constitute any limitation in this application. It should also be understood that the specific method for the network device to determine the precoding matrix of each subband according to the second information is not limited to the above example. For example, the network device may directly determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each subband according to the codebook coefficients corresponding to each subband on the multiple transmission layers. The process for the network device to determine the precoding matrix based on the second information can refer to the prior art, for example, refer to the related description in R15. For brevity, it will not be detailed here.
在R16的码本反馈方式中,网络设备可以根据所接收到的第二信息,首先确定出分别对应的至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量和至少一个线性叠加系数。然后根据各线性叠加系数与空域向量、频域向量的对应关系,恢复空频矩阵。In the R16 codebook feedback mode, the network device may first determine the corresponding at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient according to the received second information. Then, the space-frequency matrix is restored according to the correspondence between each linear superposition coefficient and the spatial vector and the frequency domain vector.
由于终端设备用作压缩的空频矩阵是增益调整后的空频矩阵,故网络设备基于第二信息所恢复出来的空频矩阵也与增益调整后的空频矩阵相同或相近。网络设备可以进一步根据该增益调增系数,恢复出未经过增益调整的空频矩阵。该未经过增益调整的空频矩阵也就是终端设备基于待上报的预编码矩阵而确定的空频矩阵。Since the space-frequency matrix used by the terminal device for compression is the space-frequency matrix after gain adjustment, the space-frequency matrix recovered by the network device based on the second information is also the same or similar to the space-frequency matrix after gain adjustment. The network device may further recover the space-frequency matrix without gain adjustment according to the gain adjustment coefficient. The space-frequency matrix without gain adjustment is the space-frequency matrix determined by the terminal device based on the precoding matrix to be reported.
网络设备要恢复未经过增益调整的空频矩阵,就需要预先确定增益调整系数。如前所述,终端设备在对码本系数进行增益调整所使用的增益调整系数可以是网络设备预先通过信令指示的,或者,终端设备向网络设备上报的,因此网络设备可以预先确定G个端口组的增益调整系数。To restore the space-frequency matrix without gain adjustment, the network equipment needs to determine the gain adjustment coefficient in advance. As mentioned above, the gain adjustment coefficients used by the terminal equipment to adjust the codebook coefficients can be indicated by the network equipment in advance through signaling, or the terminal equipment reports to the network equipment, so the network equipment can predetermine G The gain adjustment coefficient of the port group.
网络设备可以基于与终端设备的增益调整相对应的操作来恢复未经过增益调整的空频矩阵。The network device can restore the space-frequency matrix without gain adjustment based on an operation corresponding to the gain adjustment of the terminal device.
例如,终端设备在进行增益调整时,将每个端口组对应的码本系数乘以增益调整系数,则网络设备在恢复该端口组的码本系数时,可以除以该增益调整系数。又例如,终端设备在进行增益调整时,将每个端口组对应的码本系数除以增益调整系数,则网络设备在恢复该端口组对应的码本系数时,可以乘以该增益调整系数。For example, when the terminal device performs gain adjustment, the codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group is multiplied by the gain adjustment coefficient, and the network device can divide by the gain adjustment coefficient when restoring the codebook coefficient of the port group. For another example, when the terminal device performs gain adjustment, the codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group is divided by the gain adjustment coefficient, and the network device can multiply the gain adjustment coefficient when restoring the codebook coefficient corresponding to the port group.
仍然基于上文步骤230中的示例,空频矩阵经过增益调整后可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000020
网络设备根据第二信息的反馈所确定的码本系数可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000021
由于由于终端设备通过第二信息反馈的码本系数是经过压缩后的码本系数,因此网络设备基于第二信息所确定的与各端口组对应的码本系数与 终端设备测量所确定的码本系数可能相同,也可能相近。为了便于区分,这里将网络设备所确定的码本系数与终端设备确定的码本系数通过上角标“'”来区分。
Still based on the example in step 230 above, the space frequency matrix after gain adjustment can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000020
The codebook coefficient determined by the network device according to the feedback of the second information can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000021
Since the codebook coefficients fed back by the terminal device through the second information are compressed codebook coefficients, the network device determines the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group based on the second information and the codebook determined by the terminal device measurement. The coefficients may be the same or similar. In order to facilitate the distinction, the codebook coefficient determined by the network device and the codebook coefficient determined by the terminal device are distinguished by the superscript "'".
网络设备可以基于增益调整系数,进一步根据该第二信息所确定的增益调整后的码本系数确定未经过增益调整的码本系数。网络设备所确定的未经过增益调整的码本系数可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000022
网络设备可以进一步确定出与一个传输层、一个子带对应的预编码向量。例如与一个传输层、第n个子带对应的预编码向量可以为
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000023
其中,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000024
为归一化系数,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000025
Based on the gain adjustment coefficient, the network device may further determine the codebook coefficient after gain adjustment determined by the second information. The codebook coefficients determined by the network equipment without gain adjustment can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000022
The network device may further determine the precoding vector corresponding to one transmission layer and one subband. For example, the precoding vector corresponding to a transmission layer and the nth subband can be
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000023
among them,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000024
Is the normalization coefficient,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000025
由于本申请对于终端设备基于增益调整系数对每个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整的具体操作不作限定,因此本申请对于网络设备基于增益调整系数恢复每个端口组对应的码本系数的具体操作也不做限定。Since this application does not limit the specific operation of the terminal device to adjust the gain of the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group based on the gain adjustment coefficients, this application does not limit the network equipment to recover the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group based on the gain adjustment coefficients. The specific operation is also not limited.
基于上述处理,网络设备可以恢复出未经过增益调整的空频矩阵。网络设备可以根据该未经过增益调整的空频矩阵,恢复出各子带的预编码向量,进而确定各子带的预编码矩阵。Based on the above processing, the network device can recover the space-frequency matrix without gain adjustment. The network device can recover the precoding vector of each subband according to the space-frequency matrix without gain adjustment, and then determine the precoding matrix of each subband.
例如,第r个传输层对应的空频矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000026
则第n个子带对应的预编码矩阵可以表示为:
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000027
其中w r,n表示与第r个传输层第n个子带对应的预编码向量;
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000028
为归一化系数。
For example, the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the rth transmission layer is
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000026
Then the precoding matrix corresponding to the nth subband can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000027
Where w r,n represents the precoding vector corresponding to the nth subband of the rth transmission layer;
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000028
Is the normalization coefficient.
应理解,这里仅为便于理解,示出了空频矩阵与预编码矩阵的关系,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。还应理解,网络设备基于空频矩阵恢复预编码矩阵的具体过程为现有技术,例如可以参考R16中的相关说明,为了简洁,这里不做详述。It should be understood that this is only for ease of understanding, and the relationship between the space-frequency matrix and the precoding matrix is shown, but this should not constitute any limitation to the application. It should also be understood that the specific process of restoring the precoding matrix by the network device based on the space-frequency matrix is in the prior art. For example, reference may be made to the relevant description in R16. For brevity, it will not be detailed here.
应理解,在R16的码本反馈方式中,为了便于理解引入了空频矩阵的概念。事实上,空频矩阵也是由多个预编码向量确定的,可以理解为是频域上的预编码矩阵。本申请并不对预编码矩阵的具体形式作出限定。同时也不排除采用其他名称来定义与空频矩阵相同或相似的矩阵。It should be understood that in the codebook feedback mode of R16, the concept of space-frequency matrix is introduced to facilitate understanding. In fact, the space-frequency matrix is also determined by multiple precoding vectors, which can be understood as a precoding matrix in the frequency domain. This application does not limit the specific form of the precoding matrix. At the same time, it is not ruled out that other names are used to define the same or similar matrix as the space frequency matrix.
还应理解,网络设备根据第三信息确定预编码矩阵属于设备内部实现行为,可以基于预先配置的不同的算法来实现。本申请对于网络设备根据第三信息确定预编码矩阵的具体方式不作限定。It should also be understood that the network device determines that the precoding matrix belongs to the internal implementation behavior of the device according to the third information, and can be implemented based on different pre-configured algorithms. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the network device determines the precoding matrix according to the third information.
需要说明的是,如前所述,终端设备用于对同一个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整的增益调整系数可以为一个,也可以为多个。若终端设备可以基于不同的增益调整系数对同一个端口组、不同子带所对应的码本系数进行增益调整,则网络设备在恢复预编码矩阵的时候,也需要基于各子带所对应的码本系数对不同子带对应的增益调整系数来恢复未经过增益调整的预编码向量。It should be noted that, as mentioned above, the gain adjustment coefficient used by the terminal device for gain adjustment of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the same port group may be one or more. If the terminal device can adjust the gain of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the same port group and different subbands based on different gain adjustment coefficients, when the network device restores the precoding matrix, it also needs to be based on the code corresponding to each subband. This coefficient is a gain adjustment coefficient corresponding to different subbands to restore the precoding vector without gain adjustment.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备通过在对预编码矩阵的码本系数进行量化之前,对码本系数进行增益调整,使得端口的能量分布差异较大的情况下,可以将一部分端口的码本系 数放大,和/或,将另一部分端口的码本系数缩小,减小各端口之间的能量分布差异,以避免量化过程对部分端口的码本系数的丢失所造成的码本反馈精度下降。网络设备可以根据用于增益调整的增益调整系数,在恢复预编码矩阵的过程通过与终端设备侧相对的操作来获得增益调整前的各端口的码本系数。并且,通过对端口分组的方式来对不同端口组对应的码本系数采用不同的增益调整系数进行增益调整,便于终端设备和网络设备确定各端口与增益调整系数的对应关系,有利于网络设备准确地恢复出预编码矩阵。因此,本申请实施例所提供的预编码矩阵处理方法,可以获得较高的反馈精度,有利于提高系统的传输性能。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device performs gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients before quantizing the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix, so that when the energy distribution of the ports differs greatly, the codebook coefficients of some ports can be amplified , And/or, reduce the codebook coefficients of another part of the ports to reduce the energy distribution difference between the ports, so as to avoid the loss of codebook feedback accuracy of some ports caused by the loss of the codebook coefficients of some ports in the quantization process. The network device may obtain the codebook coefficients of each port before the gain adjustment by operating opposite to the terminal device side in the process of restoring the precoding matrix according to the gain adjustment coefficient used for gain adjustment. In addition, the codebook coefficients corresponding to different port groups are adjusted by different gain adjustment coefficients by grouping ports, which is convenient for terminal equipment and network equipment to determine the corresponding relationship between each port and gain adjustment coefficient, which is conducive to the accuracy of network equipment. To recover the precoding matrix. Therefore, the precoding matrix processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
图3是本申请另一实施例提供的预编码矩阵的处理方法300的示意性流程图。如图3所示,该方法300可以包括步骤310至步骤350。FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method 300 for processing a precoding matrix provided by another embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 3, the method 300 may include step 310 to step 350.
在步骤310中,终端设备确定预编码矩阵的码本系数。In step 310, the terminal device determines the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix.
在步骤320中,终端设备对该预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,得到G个端口组。In step 320, the terminal device groups the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain G port groups.
步骤310和步骤320的具体过程与上文方法200中的步骤210和步骤220的具体过程相同,可以参考上文关于步骤210和步骤220的相关描述。为了简洁,这里不再重复。The specific processes of step 310 and step 320 are the same as the specific processes of step 210 and step 220 in the above method 200, and reference may be made to the related description of step 210 and step 220 above. For the sake of brevity, I will not repeat it here.
在步骤330中,终端设备对该G个端口组中每个端口组对应的码本系数分别进行量化处理。In step 330, the terminal device respectively quantizes the codebook coefficients corresponding to each of the G port groups.
为便于理解,这里首先假设端口数2T=8,端口组数G=2。第一个端口组包括的端口为:端口0至端口5;第二个端口组包括的端口包括端口6和端口7。For ease of understanding, first assume that the number of ports 2T=8 and the number of port groups G=2. The first port group includes ports: port 0 to port 5; the second port group includes ports including port 6 and port 7.
终端设备可以对第一个端口组对应的码本系数和第二个端口组对应的码本系数分别进行压缩。例如,由于第一个端口组包括端口0至端口5,所对应的码本系数可以为预编码矩阵中的前六行码本系数;第二个端口组包括端口6和端口7,所对应的码本系数可以为预编码矩阵中的后两行码本系数。The terminal device can separately compress the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group and the codebook coefficients corresponding to the second port group. For example, since the first port group includes ports 0 to 5, the corresponding codebook coefficients can be the first six rows of codebook coefficients in the precoding matrix; the second port group includes ports 6 and 7, corresponding to The codebook coefficients may be the last two rows of codebook coefficients in the precoding matrix.
下面结合不同的码本反馈方式来说明分别对的一个端口组和第二个端口对应的码本系数进行压缩的具体过程。The following describes the specific process of respectively compressing the codebook coefficients corresponding to a port group and a second port in combination with different codebook feedback methods.
在R15的码本反馈方式中,终端设备可以对每个传输层上的宽带的预编码向量进行空域压缩,以获得能够近似地表征该预编码向量的码本系数。可用于近似地表征该预编码向量的码本系数也就是量化后的码本系数。In the codebook feedback mode of R15, the terminal device can perform spatial compression on the wideband precoding vector on each transmission layer to obtain codebook coefficients that can approximately characterize the precoding vector. The codebook coefficients that can be used to approximate the precoding vector are the quantized codebook coefficients.
为便于理解和说明,这里以与一个传输层、一个子带对应的预编码向量为例说明与各端口组对应的码本系数以及对各端口组对应的码本系数进行压缩的过程。其中,与一个传输层、一个子带对应的预编码向量的具体形式例如可以是上文中列举的[v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 v 6 v 7] T。应理解,这仅为便于理解而示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本领域的技术人员可以理解,在预编码矩阵中,每一行可对应于一个端口,每一列可对应于一个传输层,因此,每个预编码矩阵中可以包括与2T个端口对应的码本系数,每个端口对应的码本系数可以为多个,例如R个。 For ease of understanding and description, the precoding vector corresponding to one transmission layer and one subband is taken as an example to illustrate the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group and the process of compressing the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group. Among them, the specific form of the precoding vector corresponding to one transmission layer and one subband may be, for example, [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 v 6 v 7 ] T listed above. It should be understood that this is only an example for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. Those skilled in the art can understand that in the precoding matrix, each row can correspond to a port, and each column can correspond to a transmission layer. Therefore, each precoding matrix can include codebook coefficients corresponding to 2T ports. There can be multiple codebook coefficients corresponding to each port, such as R.
基于上文中对端口组的假设和对预编码向量的假设,可以得到:与第一个端口组对应的码本系数包括v 0、v 1、v 2、v 3、v 4、v 5,可以构造向量[v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5] T;与第一个端口组对应的码本系数包括v 6、v 7,可以构造向量[v 6 v 7] T。为方便区分和说明,将与第一个端口组对应的码本系数构造的向量记为第一向量,与第二个端口组对应的码本系数构造的向量记为第二向量。 Based on the above assumptions on the port group and the precoding vector, it can be obtained: the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group include v 0 , v 1 , v 2 , v 3 , v 4 , v 5 , Construct a vector [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 ] T ; the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group include v 6 and v 7 , and a vector [v 6 v 7 ] T can be constructed. For the convenience of distinction and description, the vector of codebook coefficient structure corresponding to the first port group is recorded as the first vector, and the vector of codebook coefficient structure corresponding to the second port group is recorded as the second vector.
终端设备可以分别对第一向量和第二向量进行压缩以获得量化后的码本系数。终端设备对第一向量和第二向量分别进行压缩的具体过程与上文方法200中对增益调整后的码本系数进行压缩的具体过程相似。需要注意的是,由于第一个端口组中的端口数和第二个端口组中的端口数不一定相同,故第一向量和第二向量的维度也不一定是相同。在压缩过程中,需要选择相应维度的空域基底,对码本系数进行压缩,以获得量化后的码本系数。由于空域压缩的具体过程在上文方法200中已经做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再重复。The terminal device can respectively compress the first vector and the second vector to obtain quantized codebook coefficients. The specific process of the terminal device respectively compressing the first vector and the second vector is similar to the specific process of compressing the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment in the method 200 above. It should be noted that since the number of ports in the first port group and the number of ports in the second port group are not necessarily the same, the dimensions of the first vector and the second vector are not necessarily the same. In the compression process, it is necessary to select the spatial base of the corresponding dimension and compress the codebook coefficients to obtain the quantized codebook coefficients. Since the specific process of airspace compression has been described in detail in the above method 200, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
终端设备可以根据分别对每个端口组对应的码本系数的量化,生成第三信息。该第三信息可以用于指示对应于G个端口组中每个端口组的量化后的码本系数。The terminal device may generate the third information according to the quantization of the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group. The third information may be used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to each of the G port groups.
终端设备可以基于对第一向量压缩所得到的至少一个空域向量、至少一个宽带幅度系数以及与该子带对应的至少一个子带幅度系数和子带相位系数,生成对该至少一个空域向量、至少一个宽带幅度系数以及与该子带对应的至少一个子带幅度系数和子带相位系数的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示与第一个端口组对应的量化后的码本系数;并可以基于对第二向量压缩所得到的至少一个空域向量、至少一个宽带幅度系数以及与该子带对应的至少一个子带幅度系数和子带相位系数的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示与第二个端口组对应的量化后的码本系数。终端设备可以在同一信令中将上述与两个端口组对应的量化后的码本系数上报给网络设备。该两个指示信息例如可以是同一信令中的两个信元。另外,上文方法200中也举例说明了终端设备指示上述至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量以及至少一个线性叠加系数的可能的实现方式,为了简洁,这里不再重复。本申请对于终端设备指示与该两个端口组对应的量化后的码本系数的具体方式不作限定。The terminal device may generate the at least one spatial vector, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one subband amplitude coefficient and subband phase coefficient corresponding to the subband based on the at least one spatial vector, at least one broadband amplitude coefficient obtained by compressing the first vector. Broadband amplitude coefficients and indication information of at least one subband amplitude coefficient and subband phase coefficient corresponding to the subband, where the indication information is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group; and may be based on the At least one spatial vector obtained by the two-vector compression, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one subband amplitude coefficient and subband phase coefficient corresponding to the subband indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that it corresponds to the second port group The quantized codebook coefficients. The terminal device may report the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups to the network device in the same signaling. The two indication information may be, for example, two information elements in the same signaling. In addition, the above method 200 also exemplifies possible implementations in which the terminal device indicates the above-mentioned at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the terminal device indicates the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups.
由此,终端设备完成了分别对两个端口组对应的码本系数的量化。Thus, the terminal device completes the quantization of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups respectively.
在R16的码本反馈方式中,终端设备可以将同一个传输层上多个子带的预编码向量组合在一起,进行双域压缩,以获得能够近似地表征该多个子带的预编码向量的码本系数。可用于近似地表征该预编码向量的码本系数也就是量化后的码本系数。In the R16 codebook feedback mode, the terminal device can combine the precoding vectors of multiple subbands on the same transmission layer and perform dual-domain compression to obtain a code that can approximately characterize the precoding vectors of the multiple subbands. The coefficient. The codebook coefficients that can be used to approximate the precoding vector are the quantized codebook coefficients.
为便于理解和说明,这里以与一个传输层、多个子带对应的预编码向量来说明与各端口组对应的码本系数以及对各端口组对应的码本系数进行压缩的过程。其中,与一个传输层、多个子带的预编码向量组合在一起,可以得到与一个传输层对应的空频矩阵如下所示:For ease of understanding and description, the precoding vectors corresponding to one transmission layer and multiple subbands are used to illustrate the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group and the process of compressing the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group. Among them, combined with the precoding vectors of one transmission layer and multiple subbands, the space-frequency matrix corresponding to one transmission layer can be obtained as shown below:
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000029
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000029
基于上文对端口组的假设和对空频矩阵的假设,可以得到:与第一个端口组对应的码本系数包括该空频矩阵中的前六行的元素,可以构造矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000030
以及与第二个端口组对应的码本系数包括该空频矩阵中的后两行的元素,可以构造矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000031
为方便区分和说明,将与第一个端口组对应的码本系数构造的矩 阵记为第一矩阵,与第二个端口组对应的码本系数构造的矩阵记为第二矩阵。
Based on the above assumptions on the port group and the space-frequency matrix, it can be obtained: the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group include the elements of the first six rows in the space-frequency matrix, and the matrix can be constructed
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000030
And the codebook coefficients corresponding to the second port group include the elements of the last two rows in the space-frequency matrix, and the matrix can be constructed
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000031
To facilitate the distinction and description, the matrix constructed by the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group is denoted as the first matrix, and the matrix constructed by the codebook coefficients corresponding to the second port group is denoted as the second matrix.
终端设备可以分别对第一矩阵和第二矩阵进行压缩以获得量化后的码本系数。终端设备对第一向量和第二向量分别进行压缩的具体过程与上文方法200中对增益调整后的码本系数进行压缩的具体过程相似。需要注意的是,由于第一个端口组中的端口数和第二个端口组中的端口数不一定相同,故第一矩阵和第二矩阵的维度也不一定是相同。在压缩过程中,需要选择相应维度的空域基底(可以理解的是,该第一矩阵和第二矩阵在空域的维度发生了变换,但在频域上的维度不变,仍为N 3-1),对码本系数进行压缩,以获得量化后的码本系数。由于双域压缩的具体过程在上文方法200中已经做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再重复。 The terminal device may respectively compress the first matrix and the second matrix to obtain quantized codebook coefficients. The specific process of the terminal device respectively compressing the first vector and the second vector is similar to the specific process of compressing the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment in the method 200 above. It should be noted that since the number of ports in the first port group and the number of ports in the second port group are not necessarily the same, the dimensions of the first matrix and the second matrix are not necessarily the same. In the compression process, the spatial base of the corresponding dimension needs to be selected (it is understandable that the dimensions of the first matrix and the second matrix are transformed in the spatial domain, but the dimension in the frequency domain remains unchanged, which is still N 3 -1 ) To compress the codebook coefficients to obtain quantized codebook coefficients. Since the specific process of dual-domain compression has been described in detail in the above method 200, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
终端设备可以根据分别对每个端口组对应的码本系数的量化,生成第三信息。该第三信息可以用于指示对应于G个端口组中每个端口组的量化后的码本系数。The terminal device may generate the third information according to the quantization of the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group. The third information may be used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to each of the G port groups.
在本实施例中,终端设备可以基于对第一矩阵压缩所得到的至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量以及至少一个线性叠加系数,生成对该至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量以及至少一个线性叠加系数的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示与第一个端口组对应的量化后的码本系数;并可以基于对第二矩阵压缩所得到的至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量以及至少一个线性叠加系数,生成对该至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量以及至少一个线性叠加系数的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示与第二个端口组对应的量化后的码本系数。终端设备可以在同一信令中将上述与两个端口组对应的量化后的码本系数上报给网络设备。In this embodiment, the terminal device may generate the at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one spatial domain vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one spatial domain vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient obtained by compressing the first matrix. Indication information of a linear superposition coefficient, which is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group; and may be based on at least one spatial vector and at least one frequency domain vector obtained by compressing the second matrix And at least one linear superposition coefficient, generating indication information for the at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient, where the indication information is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group . The terminal device may report the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups to the network device in the same signaling.
终端设备所生成的与该两个端口组对应的量化后的码本系数的指示信息例如可以成为第三信息。该第三信息中例如可以包括两个信元,分别与两个端口组对应。The indication information of the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups generated by the terminal device may become the third information, for example. The third information may include, for example, two information elements, which correspond to two port groups respectively.
另外,上文方法200中也举例说明了终端设备指示上述至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量以及至少一个线性叠加系数的可能的实现方式,为了简洁,这里不再重复。本申请对于终端设备指示与该两个端口组对应的量化后的码本系数的具体方式不作限定。In addition, the above method 200 also exemplifies possible implementations in which the terminal device indicates the foregoing at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient. For brevity, it will not be repeated here. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the terminal device indicates the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups.
由此,终端设备完成了分别对两个端口组对应的码本系数的量化。Thus, the terminal device completes the quantization of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the two port groups respectively.
应理解,上文仅为便于理解示出了两个端口组,但端口组数G并不限于2,终端设备也可将2T个端口分为更多个端口组,并对每个端口组对应的码本系数进行压缩,以获得分别与每个端口组对应的量化后的码本系数。It should be understood that the above shows two port groups only for ease of understanding, but the number of port groups G is not limited to 2. The terminal device can also divide 2T ports into more port groups, and correspond to each port group. The codebook coefficients of are compressed to obtain the quantized codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group.
可选地,该方法还包括步骤340:终端设备发送第三信息,该第三信息用于指示量化后的码本系数,以用于确定预编码矩阵。相应地,网络设备接收该第三信息。Optionally, the method further includes step 340: the terminal device sends third information, where the third information is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficients for determining the precoding matrix. Correspondingly, the network device receives the third information.
示例性地,该第三信息例如可以是包含在PMI中的信息,或者可以是PMI。进一步地,该第三信息例如可以携带在CSI报告中。Exemplarily, the third information may be information contained in PMI, or may be PMI, for example. Further, the third information may be carried in a CSI report, for example.
应理解,第三信息与上文方法200中的第二信息可以理解为相同类型的信息,由于对预编码矩阵中各端口组对应的码本系数的量化方式不同,故所指示的信息也可能不同,所以通过不同名称来区分。关于步骤340的具体过程可以参考上文方法200中步骤250的相关描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。It should be understood that the third information and the second information in the above method 200 can be understood as the same type of information. Since the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group in the precoding matrix are quantized differently, the indicated information may also be possible. They are different, so they are distinguished by different names. For the specific process of step 340, reference may be made to the related description of step 250 in the method 200 above, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
需注意,由于该两个端口组存在较大的能量差异,而终端设备单独进行压缩后所得到的量化后的码本系数可能并不能够将此部分差异体现出来。可选地,该方法还包括:终端设备向网络设备上报一个或多个增益调整系数,该一个或多个增益调整系数可用于指示多 个端口组对应的码本系数之间的权值关系。相应地,网络设备从终端设备接收该一个或多个增益调整系数。进而网络设备可以根据该一个或多个增益调整系数来确定预编码矩阵。It should be noted that due to the large energy difference between the two port groups, the quantized codebook coefficients obtained by the terminal device after compression alone may not be able to reflect this part of the difference. Optionally, the method further includes: the terminal device reports one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device, and the one or more gain adjustment coefficients may be used to indicate the weight relationship between the codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups. Correspondingly, the network device receives the one or more gain adjustment coefficients from the terminal device. Furthermore, the network device may determine the precoding matrix according to the one or more gain adjustment coefficients.
可以理解的是,该多个端口组之间的能量差异例如可以通过该多个端口组对应的码本系数之间的权值比例关系来表征,而该多个端口组对应的码本系数之间的权值比例关系可以上述一个或多个增益调整系数来表示。It is understandable that the energy difference between the multiple port groups can be characterized by, for example, the weight ratio relationship between the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups, and the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups are different from each other. The proportional relationship between the weights can be represented by one or more of the above-mentioned gain adjustment coefficients.
可选地,该方法还包括步骤350:网络设备根据该第三信息,确定预编码矩阵。Optionally, the method further includes step 350: the network device determines a precoding matrix according to the third information.
上述该第三信息所指示的量化后的码本系数可用于构建预编码矩阵。下面仍然结合上述两种码本反馈方式来详细说明网络设备根据第三信息确定预编码矩阵的过程。The quantized codebook coefficients indicated by the third information can be used to construct a precoding matrix. In the following, the process of determining the precoding matrix by the network device according to the third information will be described in detail in combination with the above two codebook feedback methods.
在R15的码本反馈方式中,网络设备可以根据所接收到的第三信息,首先确定与第一个端口组对应的至少一个空域向量、至少一个宽带幅度系数以及与各子带对应的至少一个子带幅度系数和至少一个子带相位系数,以及与第二个端口组对应的至少一个空域向量、至少一个宽带幅度系数以及与各子带对应的至少一个子带幅度系数和至少一个子带相位系数。然后可以根据各线性叠加系数与空域向量的对应关系,确定各端口组对应的码本系数,并按照各端口组在2T个端口中的排序,构建与每个子带对应的预编码向量。In the codebook feedback mode of R15, the network device can first determine at least one spatial vector corresponding to the first port group, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one corresponding to each subband according to the received third information. Subband amplitude coefficient and at least one subband phase coefficient, and at least one spatial vector corresponding to the second port group, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one subband amplitude coefficient and at least one subband phase corresponding to each subband coefficient. Then, the codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group can be determined according to the corresponding relationship between each linear superposition coefficient and the space vector, and the precoding vector corresponding to each subband can be constructed according to the order of each port group in the 2T ports.
仍然结合上文步骤330中的举例来说,由与第一个端口组对应的至少一个空域向量、至少一个宽带幅度系数以及与各子带对应的至少一个子带幅度系数和至少一个子带相位系数,可以确定与第一个端口组对应的码本系数为[v 0' v 1' … v 5'] T,由与第一个端口组对应的至少一个空域向量、至少一个宽带幅度系数以及与各子带对应的至少一个子带幅度系数和至少一个子带相位系数,可以确定与第二个端口组对应的码本系数为[v 6' v 7'] T、v 7'。由于终端设备通过第三信息反馈的码本系数是经过压缩后的码本系数,因此网络设备基于第三信息所确定的与各端口组对应的码本系数与终端设备测量所确定的码本系数可能相同,也可能相近。为了便于区分,这里将网络设备所确定的码本系数与终端设备所确定的码本系数通过上角标“'”区分。 Still in combination with the example in step 330 above, at least one spatial vector corresponding to the first port group, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and at least one subband amplitude coefficient and at least one subband phase corresponding to each subband Coefficient, it can be determined that the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group is [v 0 'v 1 '… v 5 '] T , which is composed of at least one spatial vector corresponding to the first port group, at least one wideband amplitude coefficient, and At least one sub-band amplitude coefficient and at least one sub-band phase coefficient corresponding to each sub-band, the codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group can be determined to be [v 6 'v 7 '] T , v 7 '. Since the codebook coefficients fed back by the terminal device through the third information are compressed codebook coefficients, the network device determines the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group based on the third information and the codebook coefficients determined by the terminal device measurement. It may be the same or similar. In order to facilitate the distinction, the codebook coefficient determined by the network device and the codebook coefficient determined by the terminal device are distinguished by the superscript "'".
如前所述,终端设备可以进一步向网络设备上报一个或多个增益调整系数,来表征多个端口组之间的能量差异。在本实施例中,假设终端设备确定第一个端口组与第二个端口组分别对应的码本系数的比值为α:1,则终端设备可以上报与第一个端口组和第二个端口组分别对应的增益调整系数为α和1,或者,终端设备也可以仅上报α。本申请对此不作限定。终端设备上报增益调整系数的具体方法与上文方法200中网络设备指示增益调整系数或终端设备上报增益调整系数的具体方法相似,为了简洁,这里不再重复。As mentioned above, the terminal device may further report one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device to characterize the energy difference between multiple port groups. In this embodiment, assuming that the terminal device determines that the ratio of the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group and the second port group is α:1, the terminal device can report the difference between the first port group and the second port group. The gain adjustment coefficients corresponding to the groups are α and 1, or the terminal device may only report α. This application does not limit this. The specific method for the terminal device to report the gain adjustment coefficient is similar to the specific method for the network device to indicate the gain adjustment coefficient or the specific method for the terminal device to report the gain adjustment coefficient in the above method 200. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
网络设备可以基于所确定的与各端口组对应的码本系数和终端设备上报的增益调整系数,构建与子带对应的预编码向量。例如由上述与第一个端口组对应的码本系数v 0'、v 1'、v 2'、v 3'、v 4'、v 5'和与第二个端口组对应的码本系数v 6'、v 7',以及终端设备上报的增益调整系数α和1,构建预编码向量如下:
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000032
其中,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000033
为归一化系数,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000034
The network device may construct a precoding vector corresponding to the subband based on the determined codebook coefficient corresponding to each port group and the gain adjustment coefficient reported by the terminal device. For example, from the above codebook coefficients v 0 ', v 1 ', v 2 ', v 3 ', v 4 ', v 5 'corresponding to the first port group, and the codebook coefficient v corresponding to the second port group 6 ', v 7 ', and the gain adjustment coefficients α and 1 reported by the terminal equipment, the precoding vector is constructed as follows:
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000032
among them,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000033
Is the normalization coefficient,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000034
基于上述处理,网络设备可以确定与每个传输层、每个子带对应的预编码向量。此后,网络设备可以基于每个传输层、每个子带对应的预编码向量,确定每个子带对应的预编码矩阵。Based on the above processing, the network device can determine the precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer and each subband. Thereafter, the network device may determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each subband based on the precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer and each subband.
应理解,网络设备根据与每个传输层、每个子带对应的预编码向量,确定每个子带的预编码矩阵的具体过程在上文做了简单说明,这里不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process for the network device to determine the precoding matrix of each subband according to the precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer and each subband has been briefly described above, and will not be repeated here.
还应理解,网络设备根据第二信息确定每个子带的预编码矩阵的具体方法并不限于上文所示例。例如,网络设备可以直接根据多个传输层上与每个子带对应的码本系数,直接确定与每个子带对应的预编码矩阵。网络设备基于第二信息确定预编码矩阵的过程可以参考现有技术,例如可以参考R15中的相关说明,为了简洁,这里不做详述。It should also be understood that the specific method for the network device to determine the precoding matrix of each subband according to the second information is not limited to the above example. For example, the network device may directly determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each subband according to the codebook coefficients corresponding to each subband on the multiple transmission layers. The process for the network device to determine the precoding matrix based on the second information can refer to the prior art, for example, refer to the related description in R15. For brevity, it will not be detailed here.
在R16的码本反馈方式中,网络设备可以根据所接收到的第二信息,首先确定出与第一个端口组对应的至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量和至少一个线性叠加系数,以及与第二个端口组对应的至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量和至少一个线性叠加系数。In the codebook feedback mode of R16, the network device can first determine at least one spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient corresponding to the first port group according to the received second information, and At least one spatial domain vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one linear superposition coefficient corresponding to the second port group.
网络设备可以根据各端口组对应的线性叠加系数与空域向量、频域向量的对应关系,恢复各端口组对应的码本系数;并按照各端口组在2T个端口中的排序,构建与每个子带对应的预编码向量。The network equipment can restore the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group according to the corresponding relationship between the linear superposition coefficients corresponding to each port group and the spatial vector and frequency domain vector; and construct the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group according to the order of each port group in the 2T ports. With the corresponding precoding vector.
与R15所不同的是,R16中所反馈的与每个端口组对应的码本系数可以包含多个子带的码本系数,因此网络设备所确定的与每个端口组对应的码本系数可以包括与该端口组、N 3个子带对应的码本系数。 The difference from R15 is that the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group fed back in R16 can include the codebook coefficients of multiple subbands. Therefore, the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group determined by the network device can include The codebook coefficients corresponding to the port group and N 3 subbands.
假设网络设备所确定的与第一个端口组对应的码本系数为
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000035
与第二个端口组对应的码本系数为
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000036
终端设备上报的增益调整系数为α和1。则网络设备可以确定与子带0对应的预编码向量
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000037
与子带1对应的预编码向量为
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000038
以此类推,这里不一一列举。其中,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000039
为归一化系数,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000040
Assume that the codebook coefficient corresponding to the first port group determined by the network device is
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000035
The codebook coefficient corresponding to the second port group is
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000036
The gain adjustment coefficients reported by the terminal equipment are α and 1. Then the network device can determine the precoding vector corresponding to subband 0
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000037
The precoding vector corresponding to subband 1 is
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000038
By analogy, I will not list them all here. among them,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000039
Is the normalization coefficient,
Figure PCTCN2020124105-appb-000040
由此,网络设备可以确定与各子带对应的预编码向量。进而确定各子带的预编码矩阵。Thus, the network device can determine the precoding vector corresponding to each subband. Then determine the precoding matrix of each subband.
当然,网络设备也可以基于与第一个端口组对应的码本系数和与第二个端口组对应的码本系数,确定空频矩阵,然后由空频矩阵确定与各子带对应的预编码向量。Of course, the network device can also determine the space-frequency matrix based on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the first port group and the codebook coefficients corresponding to the second port group, and then the space-frequency matrix determines the precoding corresponding to each subband vector.
应理解,上文仅为便于理解引入了空频矩阵的概念。事实上,空频矩阵也是由多个预编码向量确定的,可以理解为是频域上的预编码矩阵。本申请并不对预编码矩阵的具体形 式作出限定。同时也不排除采用其他名称来定义与空频矩阵相同或相似的矩阵。It should be understood that the above introduces the concept of space-frequency matrix only for ease of understanding. In fact, the space-frequency matrix is also determined by multiple precoding vectors, which can be understood as a precoding matrix in the frequency domain. This application does not limit the specific form of the precoding matrix. At the same time, it is not ruled out that other names are used to define the same or similar matrix as the space frequency matrix.
还应理解,网络设备根据第三信息确定预编码矩阵属于设备内部实现行为,可以基于预先配置的不同的算法来实现。本申请对于网络设备根据第三信息确定预编码矩阵的具体方式不作限定。It should also be understood that the network device determines that the precoding matrix belongs to the internal implementation behavior of the device according to the third information, and can be implemented based on different pre-configured algorithms. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the network device determines the precoding matrix according to the third information.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备通过在对预编码矩阵的码本系数按照所对应的端口组来单独进行压缩和量化,将能量分布较为相近的端口归为一个组来进行压缩,这可以使得端口的能量分布差异较大的码本系数被分开来单独压缩。因此,可以避免压缩过程对部分端口的码本系数的丢失所造成的码本反馈精度下降。网络设备可以根据相同各端口组间的关系,以及终端设备反馈的与各端口组对应的码本系数,确定预编码矩阵。如此一来,网络设备所恢复的预编码矩阵综合了各个端口的码本系数,对码本系数的丢失较少,这有利于网络设备准确地恢复出预编码矩阵。因此,本申请实施例所提供的预编码矩阵处理方法,可以获得较高的反馈精度,有利于提高系统的传输性能。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device compresses and quantizes the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix separately according to the corresponding port group, and groups ports with similar energy distributions into a group for compression, which can make the port Codebook coefficients with large differences in energy distribution are separated and compressed individually. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the reduction of the codebook feedback accuracy caused by the loss of the codebook coefficients of some ports in the compression process. The network device may determine the precoding matrix according to the relationship between the same port groups and the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group fed back by the terminal device. In this way, the precoding matrix recovered by the network device integrates the codebook coefficients of each port, and the loss of the codebook coefficients is less, which is beneficial to the network device to accurately recover the precoding matrix. Therefore, the precoding matrix processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
图4是本申请又一实施例提供的预编码矩阵的处理方法400的示意性流程图。如图4所示,该方法400可以包括步骤410至步骤450。FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a method 400 for processing a precoding matrix according to another embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4, the method 400 may include step 410 to step 450.
在步骤410中,终端设备确定预编码矩阵的码本系数。In step 410, the terminal device determines the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix.
步骤410的具体过程与上文方法200中的步骤210的具体过程相同,可以参考上文关于步骤210的相关描述。为了简洁,这里不再重复。The specific process of step 410 is the same as the specific process of step 210 in the above method 200, and reference may be made to the related description of step 210 above. For the sake of brevity, I will not repeat it here.
在步骤420中,终端设备对码本系数进行第一量化处理,得到第一量化信息,该第一量化信息用于指示多个线性叠加系数中的至少一个线性叠加系数。In step 420, the terminal device performs a first quantization process on the codebook coefficients to obtain first quantization information, where the first quantization information is used to indicate at least one linear superposition coefficient among the multiple linear superposition coefficients.
如前所述,基于不同的码本反馈方式,线性叠加系数可以与波束对应,也就是与空域向量对应;线性叠加系数也可以与波束和子带对应,也就是和空域向量和频域向量对应。As mentioned above, based on different codebook feedback methods, linear superposition coefficients can correspond to beams, that is, to spatial vectors; linear superposition coefficients can also correspond to beams and subbands, that is, to correspond to spatial vectors and frequency domain vectors.
为了减小反馈开销,终端设备通常将经过变换后能量较大的线性叠加系数使用较高的精度上报,而能量较小的线性叠加系数使用较小的精度上报或者不上报。因此,基于终端设备压缩后的码本系数所恢复的预编码矩阵与实际待上报的预编码矩阵可能还存在一定的差异。也就是说,反馈精度有限。鉴于此,本申请提出二次量化处理的方案,对未被上报的线性叠加系数进行二次压缩并上报。In order to reduce the feedback overhead, the terminal device usually reports the linear superposition coefficients with higher energy after transformation with higher accuracy, and the linear superposition coefficients with lower energy are reported with lower accuracy or not reported. Therefore, there may still be a certain difference between the precoding matrix restored based on the codebook coefficients compressed by the terminal device and the actual precoding matrix to be reported. In other words, the feedback accuracy is limited. In view of this, this application proposes a solution for secondary quantization processing, which performs secondary compression on the unreported linear superposition coefficients and reports them.
在步骤430中,终端设备对未通过第一量化信息量化的部分或全部的线性叠加系数进行第二量化处理,得到第二量化信息,该第二量化信息用于指示上述部分或全部线性叠加系数。In step 430, the terminal device performs a second quantization process on part or all of the linear superimposition coefficients that are not quantized by the first quantization information to obtain second quantization information. The second quantization information is used to indicate some or all of the linear superposition coefficients .
假设终端设备对码本系数进行压缩可以得到K个线性叠加系数,而终端设备通过第一量化信息所量化的线性叠加系数仅为其中的一部分,例如G个。其中,K>G≥1,K、G均为整数。在本实施例中,终端设备可以对未被第一量化信息量化的K-G个线性叠加系数中的部分或全部进行二次压缩,以将K-G个线性叠加系数中的部分或全部上报给网络设备。It is assumed that the terminal device compresses the codebook coefficients to obtain K linear superimposition coefficients, and the linear superimposition coefficients quantized by the terminal device through the first quantization information are only a part of them, for example, G. Among them, K>G≥1, and both K and G are integers. In this embodiment, the terminal device may perform secondary compression on part or all of the K-G linear superimposition coefficients that are not quantized by the first quantization information, so as to report part or all of the K-G linear superimposition coefficients to the network device.
下面结合两种不同的码本反馈方式来详细说明步骤420和步骤430。应理解,下文示例的DCT基底或空域DFT基底可以替换为其他基底,例如Sinc函数生成的基底等。The following describes step 420 and step 430 in detail in combination with two different codebook feedback methods. It should be understood that the DCT substrate or the spatial DFT substrate exemplified below can be replaced with other substrates, such as a substrate generated by a Sinc function.
例如,在R15的码本反馈方式中,终端设备可以对每个传输层上的宽带的预编码向量进行空域压缩,以获得能够近似地表征该预编码向量的码本系数。For example, in the codebook feedback mode of R15, the terminal device may perform spatial compression on the wideband precoding vector on each transmission layer to obtain codebook coefficients that can approximately characterize the precoding vector.
仍然沿用上文中的示例,与一个传输层对应的宽带的预编码向量可以表示为 [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 v 6 v 7] T。终端设备对该预编码向量进行空域压缩,例如投影到空域DCT基底或空域DFT基底,可以得到至少一个空域向量及其对应的宽带幅度系数。终端设备对码本系数进行第一量化处理的具体过程可以与现有技术一致。为了简洁,这里不做详述。 Still using the above example, the wideband precoding vector corresponding to a transmission layer can be expressed as [v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5 v 6 v 7 ] T. The terminal device performs spatial compression on the precoding vector, such as projecting to a spatial DCT base or a spatial DFT base, to obtain at least one spatial vector and its corresponding broadband amplitude coefficient. The specific process of the terminal device performing the first quantization processing on the codebook coefficients may be consistent with the prior art. For the sake of brevity, I will not go into details here.
在第一量化处理过程中,为了减小反馈开销,可以对终端设备上报的宽带幅度系数的个数做出限制。比如网络设备可以指示该终端设备上报的宽度幅度系数的最大个数,或者,协议可以预定义终端设备上报的宽度幅度系数的最大个数。终端设备可能在第一量化处理过程中丢弃掉一部分宽带幅度系数,例如根据对宽带幅度系数的最大个数,将超出该最大个数的一个或多个能量较小的宽带幅度系数丢弃。In the first quantization process, in order to reduce the feedback overhead, the number of broadband amplitude coefficients reported by the terminal device may be limited. For example, the network device can indicate the maximum number of width and amplitude coefficients reported by the terminal device, or the protocol can predefine the maximum number of width and amplitude coefficients reported by the terminal device. The terminal device may discard a part of the broadband amplitude coefficients in the first quantization process. For example, according to the maximum number of broadband amplitude coefficients, one or more broadband amplitude coefficients with lower energy exceeding the maximum number are discarded.
例如,终端设备基于空域压缩确定了L个宽带空域向量和L个宽带幅度系数。但终端设备上报的宽带幅度系数的最大个数为H,H<L。则终端设备在第一量化过程中,可以仅对该L个宽带幅度系数中能量较大的H个宽带幅度系数进行量化,而能量较小的L-H个宽带幅度系数并没有量化,也就是没有通过第一量化信息上报。因此,网络设备如果仅基于第一量化信息中上报的L个空域向量和H个宽带幅度系数来确定预编码向量,所确定的预编码矩阵可能与终端设备实际希望上报的预编码向量还有一定的差异。For example, the terminal device determines L wideband spatial vectors and L wideband amplitude coefficients based on spatial compression. However, the maximum number of broadband amplitude coefficients reported by the terminal equipment is H, H<L. In the first quantization process, the terminal device can only quantize the H wideband amplitude coefficients with larger energy among the L wideband amplitude coefficients, while the LH wideband amplitude coefficients with smaller energy are not quantized, that is, they fail to pass. The first quantitative information is reported. Therefore, if the network device only determines the precoding vector based on the L spatial vectors and H wideband amplitude coefficients reported in the first quantization information, the determined precoding matrix may be different from the precoding vector that the terminal device actually wants to report. The difference.
在本实施例中个,终端设备对剩余的L-H个宽带幅度系数中的部分或全部宽带幅度系数进行第二量化处理。终端设备针对剩余的K-H个宽带幅度系数中的部分还是全部进行第二量化处理,可以由协议预定义、网络设备预先指示或者由终端设备自行决定并上报。本申请对此不作限定。这里为方便理解和说明,假设终端设备对剩余的K-H个宽带幅度系数中的J(K-H≥J,J为正整数)个宽带幅度系数进行第二量化处理,并假设终端设备进行第二量化处理所上报的分量的个量为I,I≥1且为整数。In this embodiment, the terminal device performs the second quantization process on part or all of the wideband amplitude coefficients among the remaining L-H wideband amplitude coefficients. The terminal device performs the second quantization process for some or all of the remaining K-H broadband amplitude coefficients, which may be predefined by the protocol, instructed in advance by the network device, or determined and reported by the terminal device itself. This application does not limit this. For ease of understanding and explanation, suppose that the terminal device performs the second quantization process on J (KH≥J, J is a positive integer) of the remaining KH broadband amplitude coefficients, and assumes that the terminal device performs the second quantization process The number of reported components is I, I≥1 and is an integer.
在一种实现方式中,终端设备可以将该J个宽带幅度系数进行DCT,以通过压缩得到可用于近似地表征该J个宽带幅度系数的多个分量及其对应的加权系数。其中,终端设备进行第二量化处理所上报的分量的个量可以是网络设备预先指示或协议预定义的,本申请对此不作限定。终端设备可以对经DCT压缩得到的前I个分量的加权系数进行量化。也就是说,终端设备可以通过该I个分量的加权和来近似地表示上述J个宽带幅度系数。在此实现方式中,该I个分量例如可以是DCT基底中的前I个DCT向量。In an implementation manner, the terminal device may perform DCT on the J wideband amplitude coefficients to obtain multiple components that can be used to approximate the J wideband amplitude coefficients and their corresponding weighting coefficients through compression. The number of components reported by the terminal device for the second quantization process may be pre-indicated by the network device or predefined by the protocol, which is not limited in this application. The terminal device can quantize the weighting coefficient of the first I component obtained by DCT compression. In other words, the terminal device can approximately express the aforementioned J wideband amplitude coefficients through the weighted sum of the I components. In this implementation, the I component may be, for example, the first I DCT vector in the DCT base.
在另一种实现方式中,终端设备可以将该J个宽带幅度系数进行DFT,以通过压缩得到可用于近似地表征该J个宽带幅度系数的多个分量及其对应的加权系数。终端设备可以对将DFT压缩得到的较强的I个分量及其对应的加权系数进行量化。也就是说,终端设备可以通过该I个分量的加权和来近似地表示上述J个宽带幅度系数。在此实现方式中,该I个分量例如可以是指从DFT基底中选择的I个DFT向量。In another implementation manner, the terminal device may perform DFT on the J wideband amplitude coefficients to obtain multiple components that can be used to approximate the J wideband amplitude coefficients and their corresponding weighting coefficients through compression. The terminal device can quantize the stronger I components obtained by DFT compression and their corresponding weighting coefficients. In other words, the terminal device can approximately express the aforementioned J wideband amplitude coefficients through the weighted sum of the I components. In this implementation, the I component may refer to, for example, I DFT vectors selected from the DFT base.
在R16的码本反馈方式中,终端设备可以将同一个传输层上多个子带的预编码向量组合在一起,可以得到维度为2T×N 3的空频矩阵。终端设备可以对该空频矩阵进行双域压缩,以获得能够近似地表征该多个子带的预编码向量的至少一个(例如L个)空域向量、至少一个(例如M个)频域向量以及至少一个(例如K个)线性叠加系数。该L个空域向量和M个频域向量的加权和可用于近似地表示上述空频矩阵。终端设备对码本系数进行第一量化处理的具体过程可以与现有技术一致。为了简洁,这里不做详述。 In the R16 codebook feedback mode, the terminal device can combine the precoding vectors of multiple subbands on the same transmission layer to obtain a space-frequency matrix with a dimension of 2T×N 3. The terminal device may perform dual-domain compression on the space-frequency matrix to obtain at least one (for example, L) spatial vector, at least one (for example, M) frequency domain vector, and at least one (for example, M) frequency domain vector that can approximately characterize the precoding vectors of the multiple subbands. One (for example, K) linear superposition coefficients. The weighted sum of the L space-domain vectors and the M frequency-domain vectors can be used to approximately represent the above-mentioned space-frequency matrix. The specific process of the terminal device performing the first quantization processing on the codebook coefficients may be consistent with the prior art. For the sake of brevity, I will not go into details here.
在第一量化处理过程中,为了减小反馈开销,终端设备仅将该K个线性叠加系数中能 量较大的H个线性叠加系数进行了量化,而能量较小的K-H个线性叠加系数并没有量化,也就是没有通过第一量化信息上报。因此,网络设备如果仅基于终端设备经第一量化处理而上报的L个空域向量、M个频域向量和H个线性叠加系数来确定空频矩阵,所确定的空频矩阵可能与终端设备实际希望上报的空频矩阵还有一定的差异。In the first quantization process, in order to reduce the feedback overhead, the terminal device only quantizes the H linear superimposition coefficients with the larger energy among the K linear superimposition coefficients, while the KH linear superimposition coefficients with the smaller energy do not Quantification, that is, not reporting through the first quantitative information. Therefore, if the network device determines the space-frequency matrix only based on the L space-domain vectors, M frequency-domain vectors, and H linear superimposition coefficients reported by the terminal device through the first quantization process, the determined space-frequency matrix may be the same as the actual terminal device. It is hoped that there are still some differences in the space-frequency matrix reported.
在本实施例中,终端设备对剩余的K-H个线性叠加系数中的部分或全部线性叠加系数进行第二量化处理。终端设备针对剩余的K-H个线性叠加系数中的部分还是全部进行第二量化处理,可以由协议预定义、网络设备预先指示或者由终端设备自行决定并上报。本申请对此不作限定。这里为方便理解和说明,假设终端设备对剩余的K-H个线性叠加系数中的J(K-H≥J,J为正整数)个线性叠加系数进行第二量化处理。In this embodiment, the terminal device performs the second quantization process on part or all of the remaining K-H linear superimposition coefficients. The terminal device performs the second quantization process for part or all of the remaining K-H linear superposition coefficients, which may be predefined by the protocol, instructed in advance by the network device, or determined and reported by the terminal device itself. This application does not limit this. For the convenience of understanding and explanation, it is assumed that the terminal device performs the second quantization process on J (K-H≥J, J is a positive integer) linear superimposition coefficients among the remaining K-H linear superimposition coefficients.
或者,终端设备也可以从与L个空域向量和M个频域向量对应的L×M(可以理解,L×M≥K)个线性叠加系数中除去第一量化信息指示的H个线性叠加系数后剩余的L×M-H个线性叠加系数中的部分或全部(如J’个,L×M-H≥J’为正整数)进行第二量化处理。本申请对此不作限定。Alternatively, the terminal device may also remove the H linear superimposition coefficients indicated by the first quantization information from the L×M (understandably, L×M≥K) linear superimposition coefficients corresponding to the L spatial domain vectors and the M frequency domain vectors. Part or all of the remaining L×MH linear superposition coefficients (such as J′, L×MH≥J′ are positive integers) are subjected to the second quantization process. This application does not limit this.
在一种实现方式中,终端设备可以将该J个线性叠加系数进行DCT,以通过压缩得到可用于近似地表征该J个线性叠加系数的多个分量及其对应的加权系数。其中,终端设备进行第二量化处理所上报的分量的数量可以是网络设备预先指示或协议预定义的,本申请对此不作限定。为便于理解和说明,这里假设终端设备进行第二量化处理所上报的分量的数量为I,I≥1且为整数。终端设备可以对经DCT压缩得到的前I个分量的加权系数进行量化。也就是说,终端设备可以通过该I个分量的加权和来近似地表示上述J个线性叠加系数。在此实现方式中,该I个分量例如可以是DCT基底中的前I个DCT向量。In an implementation manner, the terminal device may perform DCT on the J linear superimposition coefficients to obtain multiple components that can be used to approximate the J linear superimposition coefficients and their corresponding weighting coefficients through compression. The number of components reported by the terminal device for the second quantization process may be pre-indicated by the network device or predefined by the protocol, which is not limited in this application. For ease of understanding and explanation, it is assumed here that the number of components reported by the terminal device for the second quantization process is I, and I≥1 and is an integer. The terminal device can quantize the weighting coefficient of the first I component obtained by DCT compression. In other words, the terminal device can approximately express the aforementioned J linear superposition coefficients through the weighted sum of the I components. In this implementation, the I component may be, for example, the first I DCT vector in the DCT base.
在另一种实现方式中,终端设备可以将该J个线性叠加系数进行DFT,以通过压缩得到可用于近似地表征该J个线性叠加系数的多个分量及其对应的加权系数。终端设备可以对将DFT压缩得到的较强的I个分量及其对应的加权系数进行量化。也就是说,终端设备可以通过该I个分量的加权和来近似地表示上述J个线性叠加系数。在此实现方式中,该I个分量例如可以是指从DFT基底中选择的I个DFT向量。In another implementation manner, the terminal device may perform DFT on the J linear superimposition coefficients to obtain multiple components that can be used to approximately characterize the J linear superimposition coefficients and their corresponding weighting coefficients through compression. The terminal device can quantize the stronger I components obtained by DFT compression and their corresponding weighting coefficients. In other words, the terminal device can approximately express the aforementioned J linear superposition coefficients through the weighted sum of the I components. In this implementation, the I component may refer to, for example, I DFT vectors selected from the DFT base.
为便于理解,图5示出了对空频矩阵进行DFT的示意图。图5所示的空域向量数L=3,频域向量数M=2。如图5所示,该空频矩阵经过空域压缩后,可以得到3个较强的空域向量,该3个较强的空域向量与和2个较强的频域向量。该3个空域向量与2个频域向量对应的线性叠加系数的个数为6,如图中带有阴影的方格所示。假设K=L×M,则K=6。但该6个线性叠加系数中仅有4个能量较大的线性叠加系数,如图中带有深色阴影的方格所示,另2个线性叠加系数能量较小,如图中带有浅色阴影的方格所示。故第一量化处理可以对上述4个能量较大的线性叠加系数进行量化,第二量化处理可以对另2个能量较小的线性叠加系数中的1个或2个进行量化。例如,若J=2,则第二量化处理可以对另2个能量较小的线性叠加系数进行量化处理。可选地,如果终端设备仅仅对K-H中的部分分量进行二次压缩,则可以进一步上报J个分量对应的K-H中的哪些分量。上报方式可以是字符串、端口索引号等。本申请对此不作限定。For ease of understanding, FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of performing DFT on the space-frequency matrix. As shown in Fig. 5, the number of spatial domain vectors is L=3, and the number of frequency domain vectors is M=2. As shown in Fig. 5, after the space-frequency matrix is compressed in the space, three strong space vectors can be obtained, the three strong space vectors and the two strong frequency vectors. The number of linear superposition coefficients corresponding to the three spatial domain vectors and the two frequency domain vectors is 6, as shown by the shaded squares in the figure. Assuming K=L×M, then K=6. However, among the 6 linear superimposition coefficients, only 4 linear superimposition coefficients with larger energy are shown in the grid with dark shades, and the other 2 linear superimposition coefficients have lower energy, as shown in the figure with lighter ones. Color shaded squares are shown. Therefore, the first quantization process can quantize the four linear superposition coefficients with larger energy, and the second quantization process can quantize one or two of the other two linear superposition coefficients with smaller energy. For example, if J=2, the second quantization processing can perform quantization processing on the other two linear superposition coefficients with smaller energy. Optionally, if the terminal device only performs secondary compression on part of the components in the K-H, it may further report which components in the K-H correspond to the J components. The reporting method can be character string, port index number, etc. This application does not limit this.
应理解,图5仅为便于理解而示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于压缩的具体方式以及各参数的具体取值均不做限定。It should be understood that FIG. 5 is only an example for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. This application does not limit the specific method of compression and the specific value of each parameter.
其中,上述第二量化处理所量化的线性叠加系数的个数J例如可以是网络设备预先通 过信令指示的。可选地,该方法还包括:终端设备从网络设备接收第五信息,该第五信息用于指示第二量化信息所量化的线性叠加系数的个数。相应地,网络设备向终端设备发送该第五信息。Wherein, the number J of linear superimposition coefficients quantized by the second quantization process may be indicated by the network device in advance through signaling, for example. Optionally, the method further includes: the terminal device receives fifth information from the network device, where the fifth information is used to indicate the number of linear superposition coefficients quantized by the second quantization information. Correspondingly, the network device sends the fifth information to the terminal device.
或者,上述第二量化处理所量化的线性叠加系数的个数J也可以是终端设备自行确定,并上报给网络设备的。可选地,该方法还包括:终端设备向网络设备上报第二量化信息所量化的线性叠加系数的个数。Alternatively, the number J of linear superposition coefficients quantized by the second quantization process may also be determined by the terminal device itself and reported to the network device. Optionally, the method further includes: the terminal device reports the number of linear superposition coefficients quantized by the second quantization information to the network device.
又或者,上述第二量化处理所量化的线性叠加系数的个数J也可以是协议预定义的。本申请对此不作限定。Alternatively, the number J of linear superposition coefficients quantized by the second quantization process may also be predefined by the protocol. This application does not limit this.
此外,上报上述剩余的部分或全部线性叠加系数(即,剩余的K-H个中的J个线性叠加系数)所使用的分量个数(如上文列举的I)也可以是网络设备预先通过信令指示的。可选地,该方法还包括:终端设备从网络设备接收第六信息,该第六信息用于指示上报第二量化信息所使用的分量个数。相应地,终端设备从网络设备接收该第六信息。In addition, the number of components (such as I listed above) used to report the remaining part or all of the linear superimposition coefficients (ie, the J linear superimposition coefficients in the remaining KH) can also be indicated by the network device in advance through signaling of. Optionally, the method further includes: the terminal device receives sixth information from the network device, where the sixth information is used to indicate the number of components used to report the second quantized information. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the sixth information from the network device.
或者,上报上述部分或全部线性叠加系数所使用的分量个数也可以是终端设备执行确定,并上报给网络设备的。可选地,该方法还包括:终端设备向网络设备上报第二量化信息所使用的分量个数。相应地,网络设备从终端设备接收对上报上述部分或全部线性叠加系数所使用的分量个数的指示。Alternatively, the number of components used for reporting some or all of the linear superposition coefficients may also be determined by the terminal device and reported to the network device. Optionally, the method further includes: the terminal device reports the number of components used by the second quantized information to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives an indication of the number of components used for reporting some or all of the linear superposition coefficients from the terminal device.
又或者,上报上述部分或全部线性叠加系数所使用的分量个数也可以是协议预定义的。本申请对此不作限定。Alternatively, the number of components used to report some or all of the linear superposition coefficients may also be predefined by the protocol. This application does not limit this.
应理解,终端设备进行第二量化处理的具体方法与第一量化处理的具体方法可以是相似的。为了简洁,这里不做详述。还应理解,终端设备进行压缩的具体方法仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。由于终端设备进行压缩的具体过程属于设备的内部实现,可以通过预先配置不同的算法来实现,本申请对终端设备进行压缩的具体方式不作限定。It should be understood that the specific method for the terminal device to perform the second quantization processing may be similar to the specific method for the first quantization processing. For the sake of brevity, I will not go into details here. It should also be understood that the specific method of compression by the terminal device is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. Since the specific process of compression performed by the terminal device belongs to the internal implementation of the device, it can be implemented by configuring different algorithms in advance, and this application does not limit the specific method for compressing the terminal device.
需要说明的是,终端设备进行第二量化处理时,可以按照预定义的规则,将J个线性叠加系数构建为一个向量或矩阵的形式,然后对所构建的向量后矩阵进行压缩处理。举例来说,终端设备可以按照该J个线性叠加系数所对应的空域向量和频域向量在L个空域向量和M个频域向量中的位置依次排列,得到一长度为J的向量。It should be noted that, when the terminal device performs the second quantization process, it can construct the J linear superposition coefficients in the form of a vector or matrix according to a predefined rule, and then perform compression processing on the constructed vector post matrix. For example, the terminal device may sequentially arrange the spatial vectors and frequency domain vectors corresponding to the J linear superposition coefficients in the L spatial vectors and M frequency domain vectors to obtain a vector of length J.
例如以图5为例,J=2。终端设备可以按照先遍历行再遍历列的顺序,将该2个线性叠加系数依次排列,则图5中第4行第2列的线性叠加系数位于第5行第3列的线性叠加系数之前。上述按照先遍历行再遍历列的顺序来对J个线性叠加系数依次排列的方式可以是预定义的规则。但应理解,这里仅为便于理解而示例,本申请对于该预定义的规则的具体内容不作限定。For example, taking Figure 5 as an example, J=2. The terminal device can arrange the two linear superposition coefficients in the order of traversing the rows first and then traversing the columns. The linear superposition coefficient in the fourth row and the second column in FIG. 5 is located before the linear superposition coefficient in the fifth row and the third column. The foregoing manner of sequentially arranging the J linear superposition coefficients according to the order of traversing the rows and then traversing the columns may be a predefined rule. However, it should be understood that this is only an example for ease of understanding, and this application does not limit the specific content of the predefined rule.
需注意,终端设备之所以进行二次量化处理,是因为在第一量化处理时将一部分能量较小的线性叠加系数丢弃了。这也就相当于将该多个线性叠加系数分成了两个组,第一量化处理针对第一组线性叠加系数进行量化处理,第二量化处理针对第二组线性叠加系数进行量化处理。而两组线性叠加系数之间存在的能量差异较大。终端设备可以将该两次量化处理所对应的线性叠加系数之间的比例关系上报给网络设备。It should be noted that the reason why the terminal device performs the secondary quantization processing is because in the first quantization processing, a part of the linear superposition coefficients with smaller energy are discarded. This is equivalent to dividing the multiple linear superposition coefficients into two groups. The first quantization process performs quantization processing on the first group of linear superposition coefficients, and the second quantization process performs quantization processing on the second group of linear superposition coefficients. The energy difference between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients is relatively large. The terminal device may report the proportional relationship between the linear superposition coefficients corresponding to the two quantization processes to the network device.
可选地,该方法还包括:终端设备向网络设备上报一个或多个增益调整系数,该一个或多个增益调整系数可用于指示多个线性叠加系数之间的权值关系。相应地,网络设备从终端设备接收该一个或多个增益调整系数。进而网络设备可以根据该一个或多个增益调整 系数来确定预编码矩阵。Optionally, the method further includes: the terminal device reports one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device, and the one or more gain adjustment coefficients may be used to indicate the weight relationship between the multiple linear superimposition coefficients. Correspondingly, the network device receives the one or more gain adjustment coefficients from the terminal device. Furthermore, the network device can determine the precoding matrix according to the one or more gain adjustment coefficients.
在步骤440中,终端设备发送第四信息,该第四信息包括第一量化信息和第二量化信息。相应地,网络设备接收该第四信息。In step 440, the terminal device sends fourth information, where the fourth information includes the first quantization information and the second quantization information. Correspondingly, the network device receives the fourth information.
示例性地,该第四信息例如可以是包含在PMI中的信息,或者可以是PMI。进一步地,该第四信息例如可以携带在CSI报告中。Exemplarily, the fourth information may be information contained in PMI, or may be PMI, for example. Further, the fourth information may be carried in a CSI report, for example.
应理解,第四信息与上文方法200中的第二信息可以理解为相同类型的信息,由于对预编码矩阵中各端口组对应的码本系数进行了二次量化处理,故所指示的信息也可能不同,所以通过不同名称来区分。关于步骤440的具体过程可以参考上文方法200中步骤250的相关描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。It should be understood that the fourth information and the second information in the above method 200 can be understood as the same type of information. Since the codebook coefficients corresponding to each port group in the precoding matrix are re-quantized, the indicated information They may also be different, so they are distinguished by different names. For the specific process of step 440, reference may be made to the related description of step 250 in the method 200 above, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
在步骤450中,网络设备根据第四信息,确定预编码矩阵。In step 450, the network device determines a precoding matrix according to the fourth information.
上述第四信息所指示的量化后的码本系数可用于构建预编码矩阵。具体来说,网络设备首先可以基于第二量化信息确定第二组线性叠加系数,并基于第一量化信息确定第一组线性叠加系数。此后,网络设备可以基于终端设备上报的增益调整系数,将第一组线性叠加系数和第二组线性叠加系数进行归一化处理。此后,网络设备便可以根据各线性叠加系数确定预编码矩阵。The quantized codebook coefficients indicated by the foregoing fourth information can be used to construct a precoding matrix. Specifically, the network device may first determine the second set of linear superposition coefficients based on the second quantization information, and determine the first set of linear superposition coefficients based on the first quantization information. Thereafter, the network device may perform normalization processing on the first set of linear superposition coefficients and the second set of linear superposition coefficients based on the gain adjustment coefficient reported by the terminal device. Thereafter, the network device can determine the precoding matrix according to the linear superposition coefficients.
下面仍然结合上述两种码本反馈方式来说明网络设备根据第四信息确定预编码矩阵的过程。The following describes the process of determining the precoding matrix by the network device according to the fourth information in combination with the above two codebook feedback methods.
在R15的码本反馈方式中,网络设备首先可以基于第一量化信息确定第一组线性叠加系数及其对应的空域向量,并基于第二量化信息确定第二组线性叠加系数。此后,网络设备可以基于终端设备上报的一个或多个增益调整系数,将第一组线性叠加系数和第二组线性叠加系数进行归一化处理。然后,网络设备可以按照预定义的规则,确定该第二组线性叠加系数中各线性叠加系数对应的空域向量,由此可以根据各线性叠加系数与空域向量的一一对应关系,进而可以确定预编码矩阵。In the codebook feedback mode of R15, the network device can first determine the first set of linear superimposition coefficients and their corresponding spatial vectors based on the first quantization information, and determine the second set of linear superimposition coefficients based on the second quantization information. Thereafter, the network device may perform normalization processing on the first set of linear superposition coefficients and the second set of linear superposition coefficients based on one or more gain adjustment coefficients reported by the terminal device. Then, the network device can determine the spatial vector corresponding to each linear superposition coefficient in the second set of linear superposition coefficients according to a predefined rule, and thus can determine the pre-determined space vector based on the one-to-one correspondence between each linear superposition coefficient and the space vector. Encoding matrix.
在R16的码本反馈方式中,网络设备首先可以基于第二量化信息确定第二组线性叠加系数,并基于第一量化信息确定第一组线性叠加系数及其对应的空域向量和频域向量。此后,网络设备可以基于终端设备上报的一个或多个增益调整系数,将第一组线性叠加系数和第二线性叠加系数进行归一化处理。然后,网络设备可以按照预定义的规则,或者,根据终端上报上报的第二线性叠加系数对应的空域向量和频域向量的索引,确定各线性叠加系数与空域向量、频域向量的一一对应关系,进而可以确定空频矩阵。In the R16 codebook feedback mode, the network device can first determine the second set of linear superimposition coefficients based on the second quantization information, and determine the first set of linear superimposition coefficients and their corresponding spatial and frequency domain vectors based on the first quantization information. Thereafter, the network device may perform normalization processing on the first set of linear superposition coefficients and the second linear superposition coefficients based on one or more gain adjustment coefficients reported by the terminal device. Then, the network device can determine the one-to-one correspondence between each linear superposition coefficient and the space vector and frequency domain vector according to the predefined rules, or according to the index of the space vector and the frequency domain vector corresponding to the second linear superposition coefficient reported by the terminal. Relationship, and then the space-frequency matrix can be determined.
由于网络设备根据空频矩阵确定预编码矩阵的具体过程在上文中已经做了简单说明。并且,网络设备根据空域向量、频域向量和线性叠加系数来确定预编码矩阵的具体方式可以参考现有技术,例如可以参考R16中的相关说明,为了简洁,这里不做详述。The specific process of the network device determining the precoding matrix according to the space-frequency matrix has been briefly described above. In addition, the specific method for the network device to determine the precoding matrix according to the spatial vector, the frequency domain vector, and the linear superposition coefficient can refer to the prior art, for example, refer to the related description in R16. For brevity, it will not be described in detail here.
应理解,上文仅为便于理解引入了空频矩阵的概念。事实上,空频矩阵也是由多个预编码向量确定的,可以理解为是频域上的预编码矩阵。本申请并不对预编码矩阵的具体形式作出限定。同时也不排除采用其他名称来定义与空频矩阵相同或相似的矩阵。It should be understood that the above introduces the concept of space-frequency matrix only for ease of understanding. In fact, the space-frequency matrix is also determined by multiple precoding vectors, which can be understood as a precoding matrix in the frequency domain. This application does not limit the specific form of the precoding matrix. At the same time, it is not ruled out that other names are used to define the same or similar matrix as the space frequency matrix.
还应理解,网络设备根据第四信息确定预编码矩阵属于设备内部实现行为,可以基于预先配置的不同的算法来实现。本申请对于网络设备根据第四信息确定预编码矩阵的具体方式不作限定。It should also be understood that the network device determines that the precoding matrix belongs to the internal implementation behavior of the device according to the fourth information, and can be implemented based on different pre-configured algorithms. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the network device determines the precoding matrix according to the fourth information.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备通过对线性叠加系数进行二次量化处理,也就相当于把 线性叠加系数根据能量大小进行了分组,将能量较大的线性叠加系数归为一个组来进行压缩,将能量较小的线性叠加系数归为另一个组来进行压缩,并将两次压缩的结果分别进行量化得到第一量化信息和第二量化信息,通过第四信息将该第一量化信息和第二量化信息发送给网络设备。使得网络设备可以根据终端设备反馈的第四信息,以及两组线性叠加系数之间的能量大小关系,确定预编码矩阵。由于终端设备所反馈的线性叠加系数较多,可以避免对线性叠加系数的丢失造成的反馈精度下降,有利于网络设备准确地恢复出预编码矩阵。因此,本申请实施例所提供的预编码矩阵处理方法,可以获得较高的反馈精度,有利于提高系统的传输性能。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device performs secondary quantization processing on the linear superimposition coefficient, which is equivalent to grouping the linear superimposition coefficients according to the magnitude of energy, and grouping the linear superimposition coefficients with larger energy into a group for compression. The linear superposition coefficients with smaller energy are grouped into another group for compression, and the results of the two compressions are respectively quantized to obtain the first quantized information and the second quantized information. The first quantized information and the second quantized information are obtained through the fourth information. The quantitative information is sent to the network device. The network device can determine the precoding matrix according to the fourth information fed back by the terminal device and the energy relationship between the two sets of linear superposition coefficients. Since the terminal equipment feedbacks more linear superposition coefficients, it is possible to avoid the decrease in feedback accuracy caused by the loss of the linear superposition coefficients, which is beneficial to the network equipment to accurately recover the precoding matrix. Therefore, the precoding matrix processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application can obtain higher feedback accuracy, which is beneficial to improving the transmission performance of the system.
还应理解,在上文各实施例中,终端设备和/或网络设备可以执行各实施例中的部分或全部步骤。这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其它操作或者各种操作的变形。此外,各个步骤可以按照各实施例呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行本申请实施例中的全部操作。且,各步骤的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should also be understood that, in the above embodiments, the terminal device and/or the network device may perform part or all of the steps in the embodiments. These steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of various operations. In addition, each step may be performed in a different order presented in each embodiment, and it may not be necessary to perform all operations in the embodiments of the present application. Moreover, the size of the sequence number of each step does not mean the order of execution. The execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
图6是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。如图6所示,该通信装置600可以包括确定单元610、分组单元620、增益调整单元630和量化单元640。Fig. 6 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6, the communication device 600 may include a determination unit 610, a grouping unit 620, a gain adjustment unit 630, and a quantization unit 640.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置600可对应于上文方法实施例中的终端设备,例如,可以为终端设备,或者配置于终端设备中的部件(如芯片或芯片系统)。In a possible design, the communication device 600 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal device, or a component (such as a chip or a chip system) configured in the terminal device.
应理解,该通信装置600可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200中的终端设备,该通信装置600可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200中终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置600中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200的相应流程。It should be understood that the communication device 600 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 600 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the terminal device in the method 200 in FIG. 2. In addition, each unit in the communication device 600 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2.
其中,当该通信装置600用于执行图2中的方法200时,确定单元610可用于执行方法200中的步骤210,分组单元可用于执行方法200中的步骤2202,增益调整单元可用于方法200中的步骤230,量化单元640可用于执行方法200中的步骤240。Wherein, when the communication device 600 is used to perform the method 200 in FIG. 2, the determining unit 610 can be used to perform step 210 in the method 200, the grouping unit can be used to perform step 2202 in the method 200, and the gain adjustment unit can be used in the method 200. In step 230 in, the quantization unit 640 can be used to perform step 240 in the method 200.
可选地,该通信装置600还可包括收发单元650,用于执行方法200中的步骤2201和步骤250。Optionally, the communication device 600 may further include a transceiving unit 650 for performing step 2201 and step 250 in the method 200.
应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
应理解,该通信装置600为终端设备时,上述确定单元610、分组单元620、增益调整单元630和量化单元640均可以由至少一个处理器来实现。例如,可对应于图中所示的终端设备2000中的处理器2010。收发单元650可对应于图9中所示的终端设备2000中的收发器2020。It should be understood that when the communication apparatus 600 is a terminal device, the above-mentioned determining unit 610, grouping unit 620, gain adjusting unit 630, and quantizing unit 640 may all be implemented by at least one processor. For example, it may correspond to the processor 2010 in the terminal device 2000 shown in the figure. The transceiving unit 650 may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 9.
还应理解,该通信装置600为配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,上述收发单元620可以通过输入/输出接口实现,确定单元610、分组单元620、增益调整单元630和量化单元640可以通过该芯片或芯片系统上集成的处理器、微处理器或集成电路等实现。It should also be understood that when the communication device 600 is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device, the above-mentioned transceiving unit 620 may be implemented through an input/output interface, and the determining unit 610, the grouping unit 620, the gain adjustment unit 630, and the quantization unit 640 may be It is realized by the processor, microprocessor or integrated circuit integrated on the chip or chip system.
图7是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的另一示意性框图。如图7所示,该通信装置700包括收发单元710和确定单元720。FIG. 7 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 7, the communication device 700 includes a transceiving unit 710 and a determining unit 720.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置600可对应于上文方法实施例中的网络设备,例如, 可以为网络设备,或者配置于网络设备中的部件(如芯片或芯片系统)。In a possible design, the communication device 600 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device, or a component (such as a chip or a chip system) configured in the network device.
应理解,该通信装置700可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200中的网络设备,该通信装置700可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200中网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置700中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200的相应流程。It should be understood that the communication device 700 may correspond to the network device in the method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 700 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the network device in the method 200 in FIG. 2. In addition, each unit in the communication device 700 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2.
其中,当该通信装置700用于执行图2中的方法200时,收发单元710可用于执行方法200中的步骤250,确定单元720可用于执行方法200中的步骤260。Wherein, when the communication device 700 is used to execute the method 200 in FIG. 2, the transceiving unit 710 can be used to execute step 250 in the method 200, and the determining unit 720 can be used to execute step 260 in the method 200.
应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
应理解,该通信装置700为网络设备时,上述确定单元710、分组单元720、增益调整单元730和量化单元740均可以由至少一个处理器来实现。例如,可对应于图中所示的网络设备2000中的处理器2010。收发单元750可对应于图10中所示的网络设备2000中的收发器2020。It should be understood that, when the communication apparatus 700 is a network device, the aforementioned determining unit 710, grouping unit 720, gain adjusting unit 730, and quantizing unit 740 may all be implemented by at least one processor. For example, it may correspond to the processor 2010 in the network device 2000 shown in the figure. The transceiving unit 750 may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the network device 2000 shown in FIG. 10.
还应理解,该通信装置700为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,上述收发单元720可以通过输入/输出接口实现,确定单元710、分组单元720、增益调整单元730和量化单元740可以通过该芯片或芯片系统上集成的处理器、微处理器或集成电路等实现。It should also be understood that when the communication device 700 is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device, the above-mentioned transceiving unit 720 may be implemented through an input/output interface, and the determining unit 710, the grouping unit 720, the gain adjusting unit 730, and the quantizing unit 740 may It is realized by the processor, microprocessor or integrated circuit integrated on the chip or chip system.
图8是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的又一示意性框图。如图8所示,该通信装置1000可以包括处理单元1100和收发单元1200。FIG. 8 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 8, the communication device 1000 may include a processing unit 1100 and a transceiving unit 1200.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的终端设备,例如,可以为终端设备,或者配置于终端设备中的部件(如芯片或芯片系统)。In a possible design, the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal device, or a component (such as a chip or a chip system) configured in the terminal device.
应理解,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法300或方法400中的终端设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图3中的方法300或图4中的方法400中终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图3中的方法300或图4中的方法400的相应流程。It should be understood that the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 300 or the method 400 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a terminal device for executing the method 300 in FIG. 3 or the method 400 in FIG. 4 The unit of the method performed by the device. In addition, each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 300 in FIG. 3 or the method 400 in FIG. 4, respectively.
当该通信装置1000用于执行图3中的方法300时,处理单元1100可用于执行方法300中的步骤310至步骤330,收发单元1200可用于执行方法300中的步骤340。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。When the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 300 in FIG. 3, the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 310 to 330 in the method 300, and the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute step 340 in the method 300. It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
当该通信装置1000用于执行图4中的方法400时,处理单元1100可用于执行方法400中的步骤410至步骤430,收发单元1200可用于执行方法400中的步骤440。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。When the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 400 in FIG. 4, the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 410 to 430 in the method 400, and the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute step 440 in the method 400. It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为终端设备时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以通过收发器实现,例如可对应于图7中示出的终端设备2000中的收发器2020,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1100可通过至少一个处理器实现,例如可对应于图9中示出的终端设备2000中的处理器2010。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a terminal device, the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. The processing unit 1100 in 1000 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 2010 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 9.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以通过输入/输出接口实现,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1100可以通过该芯片或芯片系统上集成的处理器、微处理器或集成电路等实现。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device, the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 can be implemented through an input/output interface, and the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 can be implemented through the Implementation of a processor, microprocessor, or integrated circuit integrated on a chip or chip system.
在另一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的网络设备,例如,可以为网络设备,或者配置于网络设备中的部件(如芯片或芯片系统)。In another possible design, the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device, or a component (such as a chip or a chip system) configured in the network device.
应理解,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法300或方法400中的网络设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图3中的方法300或图4中的方法400中网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图3中的方法300或图4中的方法400的相应流程。It should be understood that the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network equipment in the method 300 or the method 400 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a network device for executing the method 300 in FIG. 3 or the method 400 in FIG. 4 The unit of the method performed by the device. In addition, each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 300 in FIG. 3 or the method 400 in FIG. 4, respectively.
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图3中的方法300时,处理单元1100可用于执行方法300中的步骤350,收发单元1200可用于执行方法300中的步骤340。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Wherein, when the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 300 in FIG. 3, the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute step 350 in the method 300, and the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute step 340 in the method 300. It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
当该通信装置1000用于执行图4中的方法400时,处理单元1100可用于执行方法400中的步骤450,收发单元1200可用于执行方法400中的步骤440。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。When the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 400 in FIG. 4, the processing unit 1100 may be used to execute step 450 in the method 400, and the transceiver unit 1200 may be used to execute step 440 in the method 400. It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为网络设备时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元可通过收发器实现,例如可对应于图8中示出的网络设备3000中的收发器3200,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1100可通过至少一个处理器实现,例如可对应于图10中示出的网络设备3000中的处理器3100。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a network device, the transceiver unit in the communication device 1000 can be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it can correspond to the transceiver 3200 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG. The processing unit 1100 in may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 3100 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG. 10.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以通过输入/输出接口实现,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1100可以通过该芯片或芯片系统上集成的处理器、微处理器或集成电路等实现。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device, the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 can be implemented through an input/output interface, and the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 can be implemented through the Implementation of a processor, microprocessor, or integrated circuit integrated on a chip or chip system.
图9是本申请实施例提供的终端设备2000的结构示意图。该终端设备2000可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。如图所示,该终端设备2000包括处理器2010和收发器2020。可选地,该终端设备2000还包括存储器2030。其中,处理器2010、收发器2002和存储器2030之间可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号,该存储器2030用于存储计算机程序,该处理器2010用于从该存储器2030中调用并运行该计算机程序,以控制该收发器2020收发信号。可选地,终端设备2000还可以包括天线2040,用于将收发器2020输出的上行数据或上行控制信令通过无线信号发送出去。FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The terminal device 2000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment. As shown in the figure, the terminal device 2000 includes a processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020. Optionally, the terminal device 2000 further includes a memory 2030. Among them, the processor 2010, the transceiver 2002, and the memory 2030 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control and/or data signals. The memory 2030 is used for storing computer programs, and the processor 2010 is used for downloading from the memory 2030. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 2020 to send and receive signals. Optionally, the terminal device 2000 may further include an antenna 2040 for transmitting the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 2020 through a wireless signal.
上述处理器2010可以和存储器2030可以合成一个处理装置,处理器2010用于执行存储器2030中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时,该存储器2030也可以集成在处理器2010中,或者独立于处理器2010。该处理器2010可以与图6中的确定单元、分组单元、增益调整单元和量化单元对应,或者,也可以与图8中的处理单元对应。The above-mentioned processor 2010 and the memory 2030 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 2010 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 2030 to realize the above-mentioned functions. During specific implementation, the memory 2030 may also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010. The processor 2010 may correspond to the determination unit, the grouping unit, the gain adjustment unit, and the quantization unit in FIG. 6, or may also correspond to the processing unit in FIG. 8.
上述收发器2020可以与图6或图8中的收发单元对应,也可以称为收发单元。收发器2020可以包括接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)和发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。其中,接收器用于接收信号,发射器用于发射信号。The aforementioned transceiver 2020 may correspond to the transceiver unit in FIG. 6 or FIG. 8, and may also be referred to as a transceiver unit. The transceiver 2020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
应理解,图9所示的终端设备2000能够实现图2至图4所示方法实施例中任意一个实施例中涉及终端设备的各个过程。终端设备2000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 9 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in any one of the method embodiments shown in FIG. 2 to FIG. 4. The operations and/or functions of the various modules in the terminal device 2000 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, please refer to the descriptions in the above method embodiments. To avoid repetition, detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here.
上述处理器2010可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由终端设备内部实现的动作,而收发器2020可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的终端设备向网络设备发送或从网络设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned processor 2010 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,上述终端设备2000还可以包括电源2050,用于给终端设备中的各种器件或电路提供电源。Optionally, the aforementioned terminal device 2000 may further include a power supply 2050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
除此之外,为了使得终端设备的功能更加完善,该终端设备2000还可以包括输入单元2060、显示单元2070、音频电路2080、摄像头2090和传感器2100等中的一个或多个,所述音频电路还可以包括扬声器2082、麦克风2084等。In addition, in order to make the function of the terminal device more complete, the terminal device 2000 may also include one or more of an input unit 2060, a display unit 2070, an audio circuit 2080, a camera 2090, and a sensor 2100. The audio circuit It may also include a speaker 2082, a microphone 2084, and so on.
图10是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图,例如可以为基站的结构示意图。该基站3000可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。如图所示,该基站3000可以包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)3100和一个或多个基带单元(BBU)(也可称为分布式单元(DU))3200。所述RRU 3100可以称为收发单元,与图7或图8中的收发单元对应。可选地,该收发单元3100还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等,其可以包括至少一个天线3101和射频单元3102。可选地,收发单元3100可以包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路),发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。所述RRU 3100部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,例如用于向终端设备发送指示信息。所述BBU 3200部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 3100与BBU 3200可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, for example, it may be a schematic structural diagram of a base station. The base station 3000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network equipment in the foregoing method embodiment. As shown in the figure, the base station 3000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 3100 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also known as distributed unit (DU) )) 3200. The RRU 3100 may be called a transceiver unit, which corresponds to the transceiver unit in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8. Optionally, the transceiver unit 3100 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 3101 and a radio frequency unit 3102. Optionally, the transceiver unit 3100 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter or transmitting circuit). The RRU 3100 part is mainly used for sending and receiving of radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment. The 3200 part of the BBU is mainly used for baseband processing, control of the base station, and so on. The RRU 3100 and the BBU 3200 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
所述BBU 3200为基站的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,可以与图7中的确定单元或图8中的处理单元对应,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理单元)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程,例如,生成上述指示信息等。The BBU 3200 is the control center of the base station, and can also be called a processing unit. It can correspond to the determining unit in FIG. 7 or the processing unit in FIG. 8. It is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, and modulation. , Spread spectrum and so on. For example, the BBU (processing unit) may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information.
在一个示例中,所述BBU 3200可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述BBU 3200还包括存储器3201和处理器3202。所述存储器3201用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器3202用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器3201和处理器3202可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the BBU 3200 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access standard, or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks). The BBU 3200 also includes a memory 3201 and a processor 3202. The memory 3201 is used to store necessary instructions and data. The processor 3202 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The memory 3201 and the processor 3202 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
应理解,图10所示的基站3000能够实现图2至图4所示方法实施例的任意一个实施例中涉及网络设备的各个过程。基站3000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 10 can implement various processes involving network devices in any of the method embodiments shown in FIG. 2 to FIG. 4. The operations and/or functions of the various modules in the base station 3000 are respectively for implementing the corresponding procedures in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, please refer to the descriptions in the above method embodiments. To avoid repetition, detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here.
上述BBU 3200可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作,而RRU 3100可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned BBU 3200 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the network device, and the RRU 3100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,图10所示出的基站3000仅为网络设备的一种可能的形态,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请所提供的方法可适用于其他形态的网络设备。例如,包括AAU,还可以包括CU和/或DU,或者包括BBU和自适应无线单元(adaptive radio unit,ARU),或BBU;也可以为客户终端设备(customer premises equipment,CPE),还可以为其它形态,本申请对于网络设备的具体形态不做限定。It should be understood that the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 10 is only a possible form of network equipment, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. The method provided in this application can be applied to other types of network equipment. For example, including AAU, CU and/or DU, or BBU and adaptive radio unit (ARU), or BBU; it can also be customer premises equipment (CPE), or For other forms, this application does not limit the specific form of the network device.
其中,CU和/或DU可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作,而AAU可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。Among them, the CU and/or DU can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiment implemented by the network device, and the AAU can be used to perform the network device described in the previous method embodiment to send to or receive from the terminal device Actions. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和接口;所述处理器用于执行上述任一方法实施例中的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute the method in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
应理解,上述处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片。例如,该处理装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),还可以是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC),还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP),还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。It should be understood that the aforementioned processing device may be one or more chips. For example, the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, each step of the above method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be noted that the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components . The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM), 其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of exemplary but not restrictive description, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), and synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) And direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memories of the systems and methods described herein are intended to include, but are not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memories.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2至图4所示实施例中终端设备执行的方法或网络设备执行的方法。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the steps shown in FIGS. 2 to 4 The method executed by the terminal device or the method executed by the network device in the embodiment is shown.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读介质,该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2至图4所示实施例中终端设备执行的方法或网络设备执行的方法。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer-readable medium that stores program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the steps shown in FIGS. 2 to 4 The method executed by the terminal device or the method executed by the network device in the embodiment is shown.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种系统,其包括前述的一个或多个终端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备完全对应,由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤,例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤,除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中,处理器可以为一个或多个。The network equipment in each of the above-mentioned device embodiments corresponds completely to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps. For example, the communication unit (transceiver) executes the receiving or the terminal equipment in the method embodiments. In the sending step, other steps except sending and receiving can be executed by the processing unit (processor). For the functions of specific units, refer to the corresponding method embodiments. Among them, there may be one or more processors.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在2个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system", etc. used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor. Through the illustration, both the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components. One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers. In addition, these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. The component can be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step),能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the various illustrative logical blocks and steps described in the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. achieve. Whether these functions are performed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of the description, the specific working process of the system, device and unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which is not repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显 示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
在上述实施例中,各功能单元的功能可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令(程序)。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令(程序)时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the foregoing embodiments, the functions of each functional unit may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs). When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server, or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium, (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk, SSD)) etc.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disks or optical disks and other media that can store program codes. .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (30)

  1. 一种预编码矩阵的处理方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for processing a precoding matrix, which is characterized in that it includes:
    终端设备确定预编码矩阵的码本系数;The terminal device determines the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix;
    所述终端设备对所述预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,得到多个端口组;The terminal device groups the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain multiple port groups;
    所述终端设备对所述多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整;The terminal device performs gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups;
    所述终端设备对增益调整后的码本系数进行量化处理。The terminal device performs quantization processing on the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备对所述预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,得到多个端口组,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the grouping of ports corresponding to the precoding matrix by the terminal device to obtain multiple port groups comprises:
    所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示以下一项或多项:端口组数、所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口数,以及所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口;The terminal device receives first information from the network device, where the first information is used to indicate one or more of the following: the number of port groups, the number of ports included in each port group in the plurality of port groups, and all Describe the ports included in each port group in the multiple port groups;
    所述终端设备基于所述第一信息,对所述预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,得到多个端口组。The terminal device groups the ports corresponding to the precoding matrix based on the first information to obtain multiple port groups.
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备向网络设备上报所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口。The terminal device reports the ports included in each port group of the multiple port groups to the network device.
  4. 如权利要求2或3所述的方法,其特征在于,对所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口的指示包括:The method according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the indication of the ports included in each port group in the plurality of port groups comprises:
    字符串,所述字符串中的每个字符对应一个端口,以用于指示所对应的端口所属的端口组;或A character string, where each character in the character string corresponds to a port to indicate the port group to which the corresponding port belongs; or
    端口组划分方式的指示;或An indication of the way the port group is divided; or
    端口组中包含的端口数、首个端口号和末个端口号中的至少一项。At least one of the number of ports, the first port number, and the last port number included in the port group.
  5. 如权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备对所述多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the terminal device performing gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups comprises:
    所述终端设备从网络设备接收一个或多个增益调整系数;The terminal device receives one or more gain adjustment coefficients from the network device;
    所述终端设备根据所述一个或多个增益调整系数,对所述多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。The terminal device performs gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups according to the one or more gain adjustment coefficients.
  6. 如权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备对所述多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the terminal device performing gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups comprises:
    所述终端设备基于预存储的一个或多个增益调整系数,对所述多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。The terminal device performs gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups based on one or more pre-stored gain adjustment coefficients.
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 6, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备向网络设备上报所述一个或多个增益调整系数。The terminal device reports the one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the network device.
  8. 如权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备向网络设备发送第二信息,所述第二信息用于指示量化后的码本系数,以用于构建预编码矩阵;其中,所述量化后的码本系数是对增益调整后的码本系数进行量化得到的。The terminal device sends second information to the network device, where the second information is used to indicate quantized codebook coefficients for use in constructing a precoding matrix; wherein, the quantized codebook coefficients are obtained after gain adjustment The codebook coefficients are quantized.
  9. 一种预编码矩阵的处理方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for processing a precoding matrix, which is characterized in that it includes:
    网络设备从终端设备接收第二信息,所述第二信息用于指示量化后的码本系数,所述量化后的码本系数是对预编码矩阵中与多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整后量化得到的;The network device receives second information from the terminal device, where the second information is used to indicate the quantized codebook coefficients, and the quantized codebook coefficients are performed on the codebook coefficients corresponding to multiple port groups in the precoding matrix. Quantized after gain adjustment;
    所述网络设备根据所述第二信息,确定所述预编码矩阵。The network device determines the precoding matrix according to the second information.
  10. 如权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 9, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示以下一项或多项:端口组数、所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口数,以及所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口。The network device sends first information to the terminal device, where the first information is used to indicate one or more of the following: the number of port groups, the number of ports included in each port group in the plurality of port groups, and Ports included in each port group in the multiple port groups.
  11. 如权利要求9或10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备从所述终端设备接收对所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口的指示。The network device receives an indication of the ports included in each port group of the multiple port groups from the terminal device.
  12. 如权利要求10或11所述的方法,其特征在于,对所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口的指示包括:The method according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the indication of the ports included in each port group in the plurality of port groups comprises:
    字符串,所述字符串中的每个字符对应一个端口,以用于指示所对应的端口所属的端口组;或A character string, where each character in the character string corresponds to a port to indicate the port group to which the corresponding port belongs; or
    端口组划分方式的指示;或An indication of the way the port group is divided; or
    端口组中包含的端口数、首个端口号和末个端口号中的至少一项。At least one of the number of ports, the first port number, and the last port number included in the port group.
  13. 如权利要求9至12中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 9 to 12, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送一个或多个增益调整系数,所述一个或多个增益调整系数用于对所述多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。The network device sends one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the terminal device, and the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used to perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups.
  14. 如权利要求9至12中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 9 to 12, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备从所述终端设备接收一个或多个增益调整系数,所述一个或多个增益调整系数用于对所述多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。The network device receives one or more gain adjustment coefficients from the terminal device, and the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used to perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups.
  15. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it comprises:
    确定单元,用于确定预编码矩阵的码本系数;The determining unit is used to determine the codebook coefficients of the precoding matrix;
    分组单元,用于对所述预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,得到多个端口组,其中,G大于或等于2,且G为整数;A grouping unit, configured to group ports corresponding to the precoding matrix to obtain multiple port groups, where G is greater than or equal to 2, and G is an integer;
    增益调整单元,用于对所述多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整;A gain adjustment unit, configured to perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups;
    量化单元,用于对增益调整后的码本系数进行量化处理。The quantization unit is used to quantize the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
  16. 如权利要求15所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括收发单元,用于接收来自网络设备的第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示以下一项或多项:端口组数、所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口数,以及所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口;所述分组单元具体用于基于所述第一信息,对所述预编码矩阵对应的端口分组,得到多个端口组。The device according to claim 15, wherein the device further comprises a transceiving unit, configured to receive first information from a network device, the first information being used to indicate one or more of the following: the number of port groups , The number of ports included in each port group in the plurality of port groups, and the ports included in each port group in the plurality of port groups; the grouping unit is specifically configured to: The ports corresponding to the precoding matrix are grouped to obtain multiple port groups.
  17. 如权利要求15或16所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括收发单元,用于向网络设备上报所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口。The device according to claim 15 or 16, wherein the device further comprises a transceiver unit, configured to report the ports included in each port group of the plurality of port groups to the network device.
  18. 如权利要求16或17所述的装置,其特征在于,对所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口的指示包括:The device according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the indication of the ports included in each port group in the plurality of port groups comprises:
    字符串,所述字符串中的每个字符对应一个端口,以用于指示所对应的端口所属的端 口组;或A character string, where each character in the character string corresponds to a port to indicate the port group to which the corresponding port belongs; or
    端口组划分方式的指示;或An indication of the way the port group is divided; or
    端口组中包含的端口数、首个端口号和末个端口号中的至少一项。At least one of the number of ports, the first port number, and the last port number included in the port group.
  19. 如权利要求15至18中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括收发单元,用于从网络设备接收一个或多个增益调整系数;所述增益调整单元具体用于根据所述一个或多个增益调整系数,对所述多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。The device according to any one of claims 15 to 18, wherein the device further comprises a transceiver unit, configured to receive one or more gain adjustment coefficients from a network device; the gain adjustment unit is specifically configured to receive The one or more gain adjustment coefficients perform gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups.
  20. 如权利要求15至18中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述增益调整单元具体用于基于预存储的一个或多个增益调整系数,对所述多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。The device according to any one of claims 15 to 18, wherein the gain adjustment unit is specifically configured to: based on one or more pre-stored gain adjustment coefficients, perform a comparison of the codebooks corresponding to the multiple port groups. The coefficient is adjusted for gain.
  21. 如权利要求19所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括收发单元,用于向网络设备上报所述一个或多个增益调整系数。The apparatus according to claim 19, wherein the apparatus further comprises a transceiver unit, configured to report the one or more gain adjustment coefficients to a network device.
  22. 如权利要求15至21中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括收发单元,用于向网络设备发送第二信息,所述第二信息用于指示量化后的码本系数,以用于构建预编码矩阵;其中,所述量化后的码本系数是对增益调整后的码本系数进行量化得到的。The device according to any one of claims 15 to 21, wherein the device further comprises a transceiver unit, configured to send second information to a network device, and the second information is used to indicate the quantized codebook Coefficients for constructing a precoding matrix; wherein the quantized codebook coefficients are obtained by quantizing the codebook coefficients after gain adjustment.
  23. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it comprises:
    收发单元,用于从终端设备接收第二信息,所述第二信息用于指示量化后的码本系数,所述量化后的码本系数是对预编码矩阵中与多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整后量化得到;The transceiving unit is configured to receive second information from the terminal device, where the second information is used to indicate quantized codebook coefficients, and the quantized codebook coefficients are for codes corresponding to multiple port groups in the precoding matrix. This coefficient is quantified after gain adjustment;
    确定单元,用于根据所述第二信息,确定所述预编码矩阵。The determining unit is configured to determine the precoding matrix according to the second information.
  24. 如权利要求23所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于向所述终端设备发送第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示以下一项或多项:端口组数、所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口数,以及所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口。The apparatus according to claim 23, wherein the transceiving unit is further configured to send first information to the terminal device, and the first information is used to indicate one or more of the following: the number of port groups, The number of ports included in each port group in the multiple port groups, and the ports included in each port group in the multiple port groups.
  25. 如权利要求23或24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于从所述终端设备接收对所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口的指示。The apparatus according to claim 23 or 24, wherein the transceiving unit is further configured to receive an indication of the ports included in each port group of the plurality of port groups from the terminal device.
  26. 如权利要求24或25所述的装置,其特征在于,对所述多个端口组中每个端口组包含的端口的指示包括:The device according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the indication of the ports included in each port group in the plurality of port groups comprises:
    字符串,所述字符串中的每个字符对应一个端口,以用于指示所对应的端口所属的端口组;或A character string, where each character in the character string corresponds to a port to indicate the port group to which the corresponding port belongs; or
    端口组划分方式的指示;或An indication of the way the port group is divided; or
    端口组中包含的端口数、首个端口号和末个端口号中的至少一项。At least one of the number of ports, the first port number, and the last port number included in the port group.
  27. 如权利要求23至26中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于向所述终端设备发送一个或多个增益调整系数,所述一个或多个增益调整系数用于对所述多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。The apparatus according to any one of claims 23 to 26, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send one or more gain adjustment coefficients to the terminal device, and the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used for Performing gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups.
  28. 如权利要求23至26中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于从所述终端设备接收一个或多个增益调整系数,所述一个或多个增益调整系数用于对所述多个端口组对应的码本系数进行增益调整。The apparatus according to any one of claims 23 to 26, wherein the transceiving unit is further configured to receive one or more gain adjustment coefficients from the terminal device, and the one or more gain adjustment coefficients are used for Performing gain adjustment on the codebook coefficients corresponding to the multiple port groups.
  29. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述通信装置实现如权利要求1至14中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that it comprises at least one processor, and the at least one processor is configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the communication device implements the communication device according to any one of claims 1 to 14 method.
  30. 一种计算机可读介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至14中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable medium, characterized by comprising a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 14.
PCT/CN2020/124105 2019-10-31 2020-10-27 Precoding matrix processing method and communication apparatus WO2021083157A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201911053219.7A CN112751598B (en) 2019-10-31 2019-10-31 Method for processing precoding matrix and communication device
CN201911053219.7 2019-10-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021083157A1 true WO2021083157A1 (en) 2021-05-06

Family

ID=75645044

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/124105 WO2021083157A1 (en) 2019-10-31 2020-10-27 Precoding matrix processing method and communication apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN112751598B (en)
WO (1) WO2021083157A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116405074A (en) * 2023-06-08 2023-07-07 北京智芯微电子科技有限公司 Codebook selection method, codebook selection device, storage medium and processor
US11909472B2 (en) 2021-11-16 2024-02-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Method and apparatus for selection of linear combination coefficients for precoding in frequency-selective channels

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116938300A (en) * 2022-04-11 2023-10-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 Feedback method, terminal and network equipment of precoding matrix

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20130010880A1 (en) * 2011-07-05 2013-01-10 Renesas Mobile Corporation Feedback Framework for MIMO Operation in Heterogeneous Communication Network
CN103944847A (en) * 2013-01-18 2014-07-23 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Pilot symbol bearing and processing method, and device
US20190036578A1 (en) * 2015-10-07 2019-01-31 Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy Techniques to reduce radiated power for mimo wireless systems
CN110120829A (en) * 2018-02-06 2019-08-13 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Poewr control method, equipment and storage medium

Family Cites Families (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2685557B1 (en) * 2012-04-20 2019-09-11 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Antenna and base station
CN103582101B (en) * 2012-07-31 2017-07-28 华为技术有限公司 Adjust method, device and the base station of antenna for base station transmission power
US10567060B2 (en) * 2014-10-24 2020-02-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Efficient vector quantizer for FD-MIMO systems
WO2016064246A1 (en) * 2014-10-24 2016-04-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Efficient vector quantizer for fd-mimo systems
CN107888246B (en) * 2016-09-29 2023-04-28 华为技术有限公司 Codebook-based channel state information feedback method and codebook-based channel state information feedback equipment
CN108023621B (en) * 2016-11-04 2022-07-15 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and device for channel information quantization feedback and electronic equipment
CN108271265B (en) * 2017-01-03 2023-04-07 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, base station and terminal equipment
CN108288984B (en) * 2017-01-09 2022-05-10 华为技术有限公司 Parameter indication and determination method, receiving end equipment and transmitting end equipment
CN108365877B (en) * 2017-01-26 2021-06-01 华为技术有限公司 Codebook feedback method and device
CN109150268B (en) * 2017-06-16 2021-03-23 华为技术有限公司 Channel state information feedback and receiving method, receiving terminal equipment and sending terminal equipment
US20180367197A1 (en) * 2017-06-16 2018-12-20 Mediatek Inc. Method And Apparatus For Linear Combination Codebook Design And CSI Feedback In Mobile Communications
CN114448477A (en) * 2017-06-16 2022-05-06 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, communication device and system
CN109787668B (en) * 2017-11-15 2023-10-20 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, communication device and communication system

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20130010880A1 (en) * 2011-07-05 2013-01-10 Renesas Mobile Corporation Feedback Framework for MIMO Operation in Heterogeneous Communication Network
CN103944847A (en) * 2013-01-18 2014-07-23 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Pilot symbol bearing and processing method, and device
US20190036578A1 (en) * 2015-10-07 2019-01-31 Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy Techniques to reduce radiated power for mimo wireless systems
CN110120829A (en) * 2018-02-06 2019-08-13 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Poewr control method, equipment and storage medium

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11909472B2 (en) 2021-11-16 2024-02-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Method and apparatus for selection of linear combination coefficients for precoding in frequency-selective channels
CN116405074A (en) * 2023-06-08 2023-07-07 北京智芯微电子科技有限公司 Codebook selection method, codebook selection device, storage medium and processor
CN116405074B (en) * 2023-06-08 2023-08-22 北京智芯微电子科技有限公司 Codebook selection method, codebook selection device, storage medium and processor

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN112751598A (en) 2021-05-04
CN112751598B (en) 2022-11-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020244368A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2020038154A1 (en) Method for indicating and determining pre-coding vector, and communication apparatus
WO2021083157A1 (en) Precoding matrix processing method and communication apparatus
WO2021083068A1 (en) Method for reporting channel state information and communication apparatus
WO2020221118A1 (en) Method for indicating precoding matrix, method for determining precoding matrix, and communication device
WO2021063178A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2020083057A1 (en) Method for indicating and determining pre-coding vector, and communication apparatus
CN111431679B (en) Parameter configuration method and communication device
US20230164004A1 (en) Channel parameter obtaining method and apparatus
WO2020143580A1 (en) Vector indication method for constructing precoding vector, and communication apparatus
CN112312464B (en) Method for reporting channel state information and communication device
WO2021081847A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
CN111757382A (en) Method for indicating channel state information and communication device
WO2021203373A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2020221117A1 (en) Coefficient indication method for constructing precoding matrix, and communication apparatus
WO2020244496A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2020143461A1 (en) Method for indicating and determining pre-coding vector, and communication apparatus
US20220416866A1 (en) Channel state information feedback method and communications apparatus
US20220271900A1 (en) Method for configuring transmit port of downlink reference signal and communication apparatus
WO2022160322A1 (en) Channel state information feedback method and communication apparatus
WO2021189302A1 (en) Updating method and communication apparatus
WO2020073788A1 (en) Precoding vector indication and determination method and communication device
WO2024001744A1 (en) Channel state information reporting method and communication apparatus
CN112398516A (en) Method and communication device for restricting codebook subset
WO2024093867A1 (en) Precoding indication method, and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20882334

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20882334

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1